Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol
Short Description
Download Actros Kezelesi Konyv Angol...
Description
ACTROS Operating Instructions
Order no. 6462 0338 02 Part no. 930 584 01 81 EN Edition A, 09/02
A CT ORS Op e art ngi nsI t ucr ti nos Buchrücken (Versalhöhe zentrisch)
Thank you for choosing MercedesBenz. We recommend that you familiarise yourself with the vehicle, its operation and the driving, control and comfort systems before starting your first journey. Please ensure that you read the Operating Instructions before starting your first journey. This will help to avoid endangering yourself and others. Since the scope of delivery depends on the order, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from the equipment actually installed on the vehicle. The Operating Instructions also describe items of optional equipment, if their operation needs explanation. Country-specific vehicle equipment, limited availability of optional equipment or varying product designations are possible in certain countries.
DaimlerChrysler reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and technical features at any time. You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions in these Operating Instructions. Please consult your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre should you have any questions. The Operating Instructions, Summary of control elements, Maintenance Booklet and equipment-dependent supplements are an integral part of your vehicle. You should therefore always keep them in the vehicle and pass them on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. The technical documentation team at DaimlerChrysler AG wishes you pleasant and safe motoring.
Contents 1
Introduction
The aim of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Protection of the environment . . . . 10 Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Mercedes-Benz original parts . . . . 11 Correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2
At a glance
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cockpit switch units . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . Gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telligent® gearshift unit . . . . . . . . Telligent® automatic gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel switch units, centre section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 18 20 22 25 26 26 27 28
Driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Co-driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Above windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Berth control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
29 30 31 32
Getting started
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening with the key . . . . . . . . . . . Opening using the radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the door from the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition lock positions . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for a journey . . . . . . . . . . Checks before starting a journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting the engine . . . . . . . Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . Adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 34 35 36 36 37 38 38 40 41 41 44 45 45 46
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . After the engine has been started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing the parking brake . . . . . Pulling away and changing gear . . . Switching on the headlamps . . . . . Indicating a turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying the parking brake . . . . . . Stopping – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping – Telligent® gearshift . . . Stopping – Telligent® automatic gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the door from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking with the key . . . . . . . . . . . Locking using the radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49 49 50 52 52 59 60 61 62 62 63 63 63 64 65 65 65
Contents 4
Safety
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Operation of audio and mobile communication equipment . . . . . . 73 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . 76 Telligent® brake system (BS) . . . . . 77 ABS deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . 87 Telligent® stability control (SR) . . . 90 Telligent® roll control (WR) . . . . . . 95 Lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Reversing warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Folding underride guard . . . . . . . . 100
5
Controls in detail
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Opening and closing doors . . . . . 102 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Unlocking/locking door using the "Door lock" switch . . . . . . . . . 104 Opening the door from inside . . . 105 Central locking with anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Enhanced central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 109 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . 111 Seats and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Upper berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Lower berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ADR emergency-off switch . . . . . . 126 Flame-start system . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Hillholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Headlamp range control . . . . . . . . 133 Switching on the front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Light switch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . 137 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Adjustable reading lamp . . . . . . . 143 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . 144 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Outside temperature display . . . . 147 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Reservoir pressure for brake circuits 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Contents Driver information system . . . . . . . Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driver information system menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . Event message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actros Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring info menu . . . . . . . . . Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . New SMS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance menu . . . . . . . . . . . Event info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary heating menu . . . . . . . . Alarm menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission control back-up mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . MB item number . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binary values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150 151 152 154 156 157 160 161 166 169 169 169 171 175 177 178 182 183 207 207 209 210 213 213
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear change methods . . . . . . . . . Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the splitter group . . . . . Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . . Telligent® gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telligent® gearshift unit . . . . . . . . Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . . Construction-site mode . . . . . . . . Rapid change of direction . . . . . . Telligent® automatic gearshift . . . Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telligent® automatic gearshift unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214 215 215 216 216 217 218 218 218 219 220 221 222 225 228 229 229 230 231 231 232
Engaging forward gears . . . . . . . . Selecting neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting reverse gear . . . . . . . . . Rapid change of direction . . . . . . Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power take-offs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous brake . . . . . . . . . . . . Idling speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching between various driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control (combined acceleration/braking control) . . . Telligent® distance control (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telligent® level control . . . . . . . .
235 236 237 238 239 243 250 251 251 252 253 255 261 265 267 267 269 275 280 290
Contents Starting-off aid, three-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . Hendrickson leading axle . . . . . . . Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telligent® trailing axle . . . . . . . . . Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen cleaning platform . . . Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating/heater air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic air conditioning . . . . . . Auxiliary air conditioning . . . . . . . Fresh air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296 297 298 300 302 302 304 305 307 308 315 323 326 327
Open-air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Opening and closing the side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Opening and closing the sliding/ tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Opening and closing the tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Opening and closing the roof hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Cab stowage compartments (interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Cab stowage compartments (exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Operating audio equipment . . . . . 359
6
Operation
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . 370 The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Trailer/semitrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Trailer/semitrailer coupling . . . . . 373 Coupling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Trailer/semitrailer monitoring . . . 378 Loading platform approach aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Wind deflector on cab . . . . . . . . . 381 Side wind deflector on the cab . . 384 Tippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Tipper operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Contents Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Checking the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Changing the tyre size . . . . . . . . . 391 Tightening wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . 392 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . 397 Caring for the exterior of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Caring for the interior of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Telligent® maintenance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Reconditioned components/ reconditioned parts . . . . . . . . . . . 409 High-pressure grease guns . . . . . 410 Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Maintenance flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Topping up the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system . . . . . 419 Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
7
Practical advice
Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle tool kit and emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic-pneumatic gearshift (EPS III S/EPS III SA) . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting and stopping the engine with the cab tilted . . . . . . . . . . . .
430 430 434 434 437 440 444 448 449 451 453 453 461
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Engine emergency running mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Poly-V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . 468 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Transmission control back-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Teach-in procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Emergency gearshift (NMV) . . . . . 481 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Releasing the spring-loaded parking brake if there is a failure of charge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Releasing the spring-loaded brake with an external source of compressed air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Contents Compressed-air system . . . . . . . . . 486 Charging the compressed-air system via the front coupling head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Charging the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Pneumatic suspension . . . . . . . . . . 488 Charging the pneumatic suspension from an external compressed-air source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Trailing axle, pneumatic . . . . . . . . 489 Nummek trailing axle, hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Steering system/Telligent® steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Spare wheel location . . . . . . . . . . 491 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . 502
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Headlamp setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Partially masking headlamps – driving on left/right . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Unlocking and locking in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . 534 Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Closing the tilting sunroof mechanically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Jump-starting, tow-starting/ towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Retrofitting the towing coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
8
Technical data
Type plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Vehicle type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Engine type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Service products and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 Service products and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Operating data – overview . . . . . . 575 Tyre pressure table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Single tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Twin tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Compressed-air reservoir . . . . . . . . 585 Compressed-air reservoir information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Aluminium tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Steel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Radio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 589 Radio type approvals . . . . . . . . . . 589 9
Glossary and index
Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Editorial office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Introduction The aim of these Operating Instructions The aim of these Operating Instructions These Operating Instructions are intended to assist you in all situations with your vehicle. Each section has its own print register to help you find the information you require quickly. 1
Introduction
This section explains the aim of these Operating Instructions. Details about the means of representation and the symbols used will help you to find your way about quickly.
2
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the controls you can operate from the driver's seat. 3
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you will need when you are driving the vehicle for the first time. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz or if you have hired the vehicle. 4
Safety
This section describes all the safety features of the vehicle.
5
1
Controls in detail
This is where you will find more detailed information about the equipment in your vehicle. This section expands on the "Getting started" section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of the vehicle, you will find this section particularly interesting. 6
2 3 4
Operation
5 Here you will find all the information you will need when you are driving the vehicle. 7
6
Practical advice
Here you will find practical help for possible problems.
7 8 9
7
Introduction The aim of these Operating Instructions
1
8
Technical data
All the important technical data for the
9
Glossary and index
2 vehicle is listed here.
The glossary of technical terms explains the most important technical concepts.
3
The table of contents and the index are intended to help you find information quickly.
4 5 6 7 8 9
8
Introduction Symbols Symbols You will find the following symbols used in these Operating Instructions: Warning
G
A warning draws your attention to possible risks to safety, the human body, health and life.
Environmental note
! This note draws your attention to possible hazards to your vehicle.
i This tip contains advice or further information you may find useful.
This symbol means that you have to do something.
1
A number of these symbols one after the other indicates a sequence of actions.
2
page
This symbol indicates the page on which you will find further information on the subject.
3
This continuation symbol indicates an interrupted sequence of actions that will be continued on the next page.
H
An environmental note gives you tips on the protection of the environment.
->
Display
This symbol in the glossary of technical terms means that the term following the arrow is also explained. Displays in the multi-function display are printed in this font.
4 5 6 7 8 9
9
Introduction Protection of the environment Protection of the environment
1 2 3 4
Environmental note
H
DaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. This policy starts at the root causes and encompasses in its management decisions all the consequences for the environment which could arise from production processes or the products themselves.
As fuel consumption and engine, brake and tyre wear depend heavily on the style of driving and operating conditions, please bear the following in mind:
A regularly serviced vehicle contributes to environmental protection. The driver information system indicates the service due dates in the multi-function display.
Make sure that the tyre pressures are always correct.
Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not warm the engine up when the vehicle is stationary. Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed.
6
The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis for our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account.
7
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally compatible manner, and you will help to protect the environment.
Switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
5
8 9
10
Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Introduction Operating safety Operating safety Risk of accident
G
Work incorrectly carried out on electronic equipment and its software could stop this equipment working. Since the electronic systems are networked, this might also affect systems that have not been modified. Faults in the electronic systems could seriously impair the operational safety of your vehicle. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The operating safety can be affected by other, unauthorised work or modifications to the vehicle.
1
Mercedes-Benz original parts DaimlerChrysler recommends that you: Use only Mercedes-Benz original parts and conversion parts or accessories that have been expressly approved by MercedesBenz for your type of vehicle. These parts have been specially tested to ensure their safety, reliability and suitability.
2 3 4 5
Some of the safety systems only work when the engine is running. Therefore, do not switch the engine off when the vehicle is in motion.
6 7 8 9
11
Introduction Operating safety
1 So that Mercedes-Benz can vouch for reliability, safety and suitability, the following should be observed:
2 Do not exchange Mercedes-Benz origi3
nal parts or authorised conversion parts or accessories for other parts Do not modify the vehicle in any other way
4 Only manufacture and assemble con5 6 7 8 9
version parts in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Body and Implement Mounting Directives Authorisation from Mercedes-Benz should be sought should there be any deviation from the Mercedes-Benz Body and Implement Mounting Directives
! Acceptance or approval granted by official test centres or the issue of official permits does not rule out safety risks.
12
i Further information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Correct use Observe the following information when using your vehicle: the entire Operating Instructions, safety notes the "Technical data" section in these Operating Instructions national road traffic regulations national road traffic licensing regulations
Risk of injury
G
Various warning stickers are attached to your vehicle. Their purpose is to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not, therefore, remove any of these warning stickers unless expressly instructed to do so by information on the sticker itself. If you remove these warning stickers, you or others may fail to recognise certain risks. The result of this could be injury to yourself or others.
At a glance Cockpit Instrument panel Cockpit switch units 1 Multi-function steering wheel Telligent® gearshift unit Telligent® automatic gearshift unit
2 3
Instrument panel switches, centre section Driver's door 4 Co-driver's door Above windscreen 5 Berth control panel
6 7 8 9
13
At a glance Cockpit Cockpit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14
At a glance Cockpit
Function
Page
Function
Page
1 Side sun visor
8 Interior lighting switch unit
31
2 Loudspeaker
9 Telephone bracket with microphone for hands-free system
350
3 Sun visor 4 Switch unit above windscreen
31
a FleetBoard® receiver
251
b FleetBoard® monitor
6 Audio equipment/ navigation system
359
c FleetBoard® computer
7 Stowage compartments
346
5 Tachograph
Function e Light switch/ headlamp range control
1
Page 59
2
f Combination switch Turn signals
60
Windscreen wipers
61
Main-beam headlamps
60
Horn
3 4
d Stowage compartments
5 6 7 8 9
15
At a glance Cockpit
1
Function g Instrument panel Speedometer and trip meter
2
144 144
Multi-function display
3 4 5 6
Page
8 9
16
Function l Heating/air conditioning control panel
Continuous brake
261
Limiter
269
Airflow
280
Air distribution/ recirculation
265
Temperature
Rev counter
144
Fuel gauge
148
Idling speed governor
Reservoir pressure display for brake circuits 1 + 2
149
25
Page
j Multi-function lever
Telligent® distance control
h Multi-function steering wheel
7
Function
k Cockpit switch units
22
Page 309
At a glance Cockpit
Function m Switch unit
Page 252
Transfer case
Function n Ventilation and heating vents
Page 307
Function t Instrument panel switch units, centre section
On-road selector position
o Lane assist camera
96
u Ashtray
p Driver's door control panel
29
v FleetBoard® switch unit
Off-road selector position
q Light switch unit
Differential locks Inter-axle lock, transfer case Cross-axle lock, rear axle
r Parking brake 253
®
s Telligent automatic gearshift unit
135 52 231
Telligent® gearshift unit
1
28
2 344
3
w 12 V socket
357
x Electrical equipment compartment
522
y Co-driver's door control panel
Driving mode selector switch
Page
4
30
5
220
6
Cross-axle lock, front axle
7 8 9
17
At a glance Instrument panel Instrument panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
18
At a glance Instrument panel
Function
Page
Function 7
Turn signal indicator lamp
Page
Function a
Rev counter with
144
Econometer
145
Instrument panel function buttons 144 159
1
Tractor vehicle
Clock
148
Í Reset trip meter
2
Trailer, semitrailer
147
3
Indicator lamps
Ambient temperature display
º Acknowledge event message
4
STOP lamp
8
Fuel gauge
148
G Reset button
5
Speedometer with
9
Brake circuit 1 and 2 reservoir pressure display with
149
Instrument panel lighting
6
20 451
Trip meter
144
Total distance recorder
144
Multi-function display
156
Page
1 2
143
3 4
æ Brighter
5
ç Darker
Brake circuit 1 indicator lamp
b
Indicator lamps, depending on equipment
20
Brake circuit 2 indicator lamp
c
Additional indicator lamps
20
6 7 8 9
19
At a glance Instrument panel
1
Indicator lamps
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
20
At a glance Instrument panel
Function Turn signal indicator lamps
Page 60
1 Tractor vehicle, left
b Continuous brake; Telligent® automatic gearshift
3 Trailer/semitrailer, right
Flame-start system
4 Tractor vehicle, right
262
2
60
Lane assist (SPA)
3 129
Converter and clutch unit (WSK)
261
7 Parking brake
130
8 STOP lamp
451
Telligent® steering system
9 Tilting cab lock
453
Hillholder
130
Tipper body
385
87, 90
4
96
6 Continuous brake
a Acceleration skid control (ASR)/Telligent® stability control (SR)
1
Page
c Indicator lamps, depending on equipment
2 Trailer/semitrailer, left
5 Main-beam headlamps
Function
5 6 7
Loading tailgate Auxiliary air-conditioning
323
8 9
21
At a glance Cockpit switch units Cockpit switch units
1
Function 1 Switches ABS on/off
2 3
Page 85
Switches ASR/SR on/off
87
Switches lane assist on/off
Function 3 Anti-theft alarm system panic switch
111
96
ADR/GGVS emergency-off switch
126 453
356
Raised travel position
295
Starting-off aid
296 298
5
Raises/lowers the trailing axle
Switches the electrohydraulic cab tilt on/off
Raises/lowers Nummek axle
299
Switches the 12 V socket on/off
Telligent® steering system lock
300
7
2 Controls the heating/air conditioning
8 9
22
116
Activates the anti-theft alarm system
4
6
Page
307
4 Constant engine speed Engages/disengages power take-off
255 255
At a glance Cockpit switch units
Function
Page
5 Changes horn to air horn
Function 6 Switches the air conditioning on/off
Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off
137
Switches the hillholder on/off
130
Page
Function
Switches the auxiliary heating on/off
327
7 Engages/disengages the transfer case for on-road or off-road selection
Charges the refrigerant accumulator
324
8 Engages/disengages the differential locks
Switches the refrigerator on/off
315
309, 316
Page 252
253
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
23
At a glance Cockpit switch units
1
Function
2 3 4 5
Switch unit on left of multi-function steering wheel
Page
1 Switches the work-area lamp on/off
135
2 Switches the load compartment light on/off
135
3 Switches the rotating beacon lamp on/off
136
4 Cleans the headlamps
136
i The layout of the switches can differ depending on the vehicle equipment level.
6 7 8 9
24
At a glance Multi-function steering wheel Multi-function steering wheel 1
FIS navigation buttons FIS navigation è Forwards ÿ Back Navigation within a menu
2
Audio/telephone buttons Adjusting volume of active audio source e.g. telephone, audio equipment or navigating within a menu list or making a selection.
j Forwards
æ Up/increases the volume
k Back
ç Down/decreases the volume
1 2 3 4
Making a telephone call í Accepts a telephone call/ direct entry into Redial list
5
ì Hangs up/direct entry into
6
Telephone menu
7 8 9
25
At a glance Gearshift unit Gearshift unit
1
Telligent® gearshift unit
2 3
Function button
2
Gear lever
3
Neutral button
4
Half-gear rocker switch
Telligent® gearshift ( page 220)
4 5
1
Gearshift unit
6 7 8 9
26
At a glance Gearshift unit Telligent® automatic gearshift unit
1
Function button
2
Gear lever
3
Neutral button
4
Half-gear rocker switch
5
Driving mode selector switch
1 2 3
Telligent® automatic gearshift ( page 231)
4 5
Gearshift unit
6 7 8 9
27
At a glance Instrument panel switch units, centre section Instrument panel switch units, centre section
1 1
2
Function
i
Switches the heated windscreen on/off
The layout of the switches can differ depending on the vehicle equipment level.
Switches the battery heating on/off
3
Switches the loading tailgate on/off 2
4
FleetBoard® emergency call Sends FleetBoard® service info
5
Sends FleetBoard® message to vehicle pool
6
User-definable FleetBoard® function
7 8 9
28
At a glance Driver's door Driver's door Function
1
Page
1 Adjusts the airflow
307
2 Adjusts the airflow direction
307
3 Heated exterior mirrors indicator lamp
302
4 Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off
302
5 Adjusts the exterior mirrors
302
6 Selects the left-hand exterior mirror
302
7 Selects the right-hand exterior mirror
302
6
8 Locks the doors
104
7
9 Unlocks the doors
104
a Opens/closes the driver's door window
338
b Opens/closes the codriver's door window
338
c Opens the door
105
2 3 4 5
8 9
29
At a glance Co-driver's door Co-driver's door
1
Function
Page
1 Adjusts the airflow direction
307
2 Adjusts the airflow
307
3 Unlocks the doors
104
4 Locks the doors
104
4
5 Switches the co-driver's reading lamp on/off
140
6 Opens/closes the codriver's door window
338
5
7 Switches the interior lighting on/off
138
8 Opens the door
105
2 3
6 7 8 9
30
At a glance Above windscreen Above windscreen Function
Page
1 Opens/closes the lefthand sun blind
Function 4 Audio equipment 5 Tachograph
Opens/closes the right-hand sun blind
Page 73 251
i
Activates/deactivates the sliding/tilting sunroof lock
341
Opens/closes the sliding/tilting sunroof
340
1
The layout of the switches can differ depending on the vehicle equipment level.
2 3 4 5
2 Stowage space, installation space for CB radio 3 Switches the interior lighting on/off
138
6
Switches the driver's reading lamp on/off
140
7
Switches the nightlight on/off
141
Switches the ambient lighting on/off
142
8 9
31
At a glance Berth control panel Berth control panel
1
Function
2
Page
1 Berth reading lamp
138
2 Switches the auxiliary heating on/off
327
Audio equipment
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
32
3 Press briefly: Increases the volume Press and hold: Function parallel with function on audio equipment – see the manufacturer's operating instructions
359
4 Press briefly: Decreases the volume Press and hold: Audio equipment ON/OFF
359
Function
Page
5 Opens the sliding/tilting sunroof
340
6 Closes the sliding/tilting sunroof
340
7 Switches the interior lighting on/off
138
8 Switches the interior lighting off centrally
138
9 Switches the auxiliary air conditioning on/off
323
Getting started Opening Preparing for a journey Adjusting 1 Driving Parking and closing
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
33
Getting started Opening Opening
1 The "Getting started" section contains 2 3
summarised information. This information refers not only to the basic functions of the vehicle but also to the steps that need to be followed before starting a journey. You should read this section in particular if this is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
Opening with the key
Unlocking Only the driver's and the co-driver's doors can be unlocked with the key.
4 5
Left-hand door
1 To unlock 2 To lock
6 7 8 9
34
i
Getting started Opening Unlocking the driver's door
Opening using the radio remote control The radio remote control will work regardless of the direction in which it is pointed.
The turn signals flash once.
It is also possible to unlock the vehicle from some distance. To prevent theft, the radio remote control should only be used in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The radio remote control unlocks the driver's door first and then the co-driver's door.
1
Press the Πbutton once.
Radio remote control
1 ‹ Locking button 2 Œ Unlocking button Press and hold the locking/unlocking button for approximately one second.
2
Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
3
Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's doors
4
Press the Πbutton twice.
5
The turn signals flash once. Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
6 7 8 9
35
Getting started Opening
1 2 3
Getting in and out of the vehicle
!
Pull the door handle on the outside to open the door.
Lower the driver's suspension seat completely ( page 43).
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 102).
Swing the armrest up.
Do not use the seat armrest as a grab handle. It is not designed to support such a load.
Opening the door from the outside
Entrance
Risk of injury
4
G
There can be no guarantee that you can get in and out of the vehicle safely if the grab handles and the steps are not used. Do not jump out of the cab.
5 6
There is a risk of slipping if the steps are not kept clean.
7 8 9
Use the grab handles and steps provided.
Entrance (example)
1 Grab handles
36
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 102).
Getting started Opening
Ignition lock positions
Risk of accident
G
Under no circumstances should the ignition lock be turned to position 0 when the vehicle is in motion. The ignition lock locks the steering and the vehicle can no longer be steered.
0 To insert or remove the key, to lock the steering
1
1 To unlock the steering
2
Some consumers are operational 2 Drive position
3
3 To start the engine
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short time. Children or unauthorised persons could otherwise start the engine and set the vehicle in motion.
4 5 6 7 8 9
37
Getting started Preparing for a journey Preparing for a journey
1
Checks before starting a journey
Vehicle exterior Page
Driver's vehicle checks
2 Inspect the vehicle outside and inside before starting a journey.
3 Rectify identified faults before starting
5
Risk of fire and accident
G
Tyres and wheels
40
damages or destroys the tyres causes the tyres to overheat until they ignite
7
Check tyre pressures regularly before starting a journey and correct as necessary.
8
Check tyres for foreign objects and for damage before starting a journey.
9
38
Cab tilt lock Steering wheel play
390
Semitrailer coupling1 Trailer coupling1
Insufficient tyre pressure jeopardises operating safety
6
Check function of lighting, turn signals and brake lamps
Page
Secure fastening of side trim and quick-release locks
a journey.
4
Vehicle interior
1 Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer
Disc inserted in tachograph
453 51 251
Getting started Preparing for a journey Emergency equipment/first-aid kit
First-aid
Breakdown equipment
The first-aid kit and breakdown equipment can be found in the cab or in the exterior stowage compartments ( page 430).
First-aid equipment:
Special tools in the vehicle tool bag and vehicle document wallet
Check that the equipment can be accessed easily, and that it is complete and intact.
!
First-aid kit Warning triangle Fire extinguisher Warning lamp Reflective safety jacket
1
Jack Wheel wrench
2 3
Chocks Tyre inflator hose
4
Have the fire extinguisher refilled after every use.
5
Check at regular intervals that the firstaid kit is complete and usable.
6
Note the use-by dates of the contents. Have the fire extinguisher checked every 1 to 2 years. Otherwise it could fail in an emergency.
7 8 9
39
Getting started Preparing for a journey
1 Trailer/semitrailer coupling 2 3
Before starting the engine
The trailer or semitrailer coupling is one of the vehicle components which is particularly important to road safety. Please comply with the manufacturer's operating instructions with regard to operation, care and maintenance.
Fuel level Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Check the fuel level in the fuel gauge. If necessary, refuel the vehicle.
Further notes ( page 373).
4 Risk of accident
5 6 7
G
There should be no longitudinal play in the trailer coupling. Otherwise there is a danger of the trailer breaking free. Check the trailer coupling daily for longitudinal play by moving the towbar firmly backwards and forwards. Do not hold the coupling jaws when doing this. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it rectified immediately.
8 9
40
Vehicle check using the driver information system (FIS) Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: The FIS shows the selected mode of operation auto or man. ( page 232) in the multi-function display. Any faults will be indicated in the multifunction display by means of an event message ( page 156).
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to acknowledge the event message ( page 159). Rectify the faults indicated. Vehicle lighting, turn signals and brake lamps Following the function check, the driver information system checks the function of the exterior lighting bulbs. Check exterior lighting for cleanliness and damage. Rectify identified faults before starting a journey.
Getting started Adjusting Adjusting Seat Adjusting the driver's suspension seat (example)
1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 2 Seat cushion forwards/backwards 3 n Vertical seat suspension 4 = Seat cushion angle 5 Ò Seat height 6 o Seat lowering, easy-exit feature
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
1
Pull adjusting bar 1 upwards. Slide the seat forwards or backwards. Adjust the distance to the pedals so that you can depress them fully. Release adjusting bar and engage it audibly.
2 3 4
7 Backrest 8 Armrest
5 6 7 8 9
41
Getting started Adjusting
1 Seat cushion Pull adjusting handle 2 upwards.
2 Slide seat cushion forwards or backwards.
3 4
Release the adjusting handle and engage it audibly.
i
Seat height
The seat suspension adjustment is infinitely adjustable.
Pull lever 5 up,
Adjust the seat suspension so that it does not bottom out, even on poor road surfaces.
Push lever 5 down,
Vertical seat suspension
Seat cushion angle
Pull lever 3 up to select a softer suspension setting.
Pull lever 4 up,
5 Push lever 3 down to select a harder suspension setting.
adjust the seat by leaning backwards or forwards on the seat cushion or backrest, release the lever.
6 7 8 9
42
the seat is raised.
the seat lowers.
i The seat height is infinitely adjustable.
Getting started Adjusting Seat lowering, easy-exit feature
Backrest
Armrest
Pull lever 7 up.
Turn rotary button 8 beneath the armrest,
The backrest is pushed forwards in the normal direction of travel under spring loading. Adjust the backrest by leaning backwards or forwards on the backrest – infinitely adjustable.
1
the armrest rises/lowers. Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 118).
2 3 4
Release the lever.
i
5
The backrest is infinitely adjustable.
6 Push lever 6 down, the seat will lower.
7
Pull lever 6 up, the seat will return to the stored height setting.
8 9
43
Getting started Adjusting
1 2
Adjusting the steering wheel You can adjust the height and angle of the steering column.
Risk of accident
G
An unlocked steering column could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
3
Adjust the steering column only when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake is applied.
4
Do not unlock the steering column when the vehicle is in motion.
5
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied:
6
Press the lower section of the steering column lock switch. The steering column is released.
7 1 Steering column lock switch
8 9
44
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. Press the upper section of the steering column lock switch. The steering column locks.
i If the steering column is unlocked, it will relock itself automatically after ten seconds.
Getting started Adjusting
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied: Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Select the exterior mirror you wish to adjust by pressing button 1 or 2. Adjust the exterior mirror by pressing button 3.
1
Tachograph
i A correctly filled out disc must always be inserted in the tachograph for any journey ( page 251). Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
2 3 4
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 302)
5 6 1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror 2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror 3 To adjust the exterior mirrors
7 8 9
45
Getting started Adjusting
1 2 3 4 5 6
Wearing seat belts Ensure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly for every journey. Risk of accident
G
An incorrectly worn seat belt will not provide the necessary degree of protection and could even cause injury. For this reason, make sure that all occupants, especially pregnant women, wear their seat belts correctly for every trip. Always fasten your seat belt before starting the vehicle. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly.
7 8 9
46
Persons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt properly. They therefore require additional restraint systems for protection in an accident. Under no circumstances should the seat belts be modified. They will not be able to function as intended.
i The legal requirements for the use of seat belts and restraint systems should be observed at all times.
1 Belt tongue 2 Buckle 3 Release button
Getting started Adjusting Wearing seat belts correctly Pull the belt smoothly from the seat belt reel and route it over the shoulder. Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Click belt tongue 1 into buckle 2 (it must audibly engage). Adjust the backrest to an almost vertical position.
Pass the belt over the middle of the shoulder.
Check the seat belt during the journey to ensure that it is still correctly routed.
The belt must not pass around the neck or under the arm.
Releasing the seat belt
If necessary, pull the belt upwards in front of the chest so that it rests tightly against the chest. The belt must cross over the hips as low down as possible, i.e. over the hip joint and not across the abdomen.
Press release button 3 in buckle. Guide belt tongue 1 back to its out-ofuse position.
Risk of injury
G
1
Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
2
Do not use seat belts to secure both objects and persons.
3
The seat belt should always pass closely over the body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
4
Under no circumstances should the seat belts be modified. They might no longer function correctly.
5
Seat belt warning system
6
Optional extra Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
7
A warning buzzer will sound for approximately 10 seconds if the driver's seat belt is not engaged.
8 9
47
Getting started Adjusting
1 2
Risk of injury
G
Replace the following items seat belts
3 4 5 6
belt tensioners airbags if these have been subjected to a load in an accident. The restraint systems should be checked and replaced if necessary if they have been subjected to a load or damaged in an accident. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 8 9
48
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 68).
Getting started Driving Driving Starting the engine The starter inhibitor prevents the engine from being started if a gear is selected and the clutch pedal not fully depressed.
Shift the transmission to neutral. Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift or Telligent® automatic gearshift: The transmission neutral position N must be shown in the multi-function display. Disengage power take-off. The J power take-off display or the c tipper body indicator lamp must not light up. Vehicles with flame-start system: Wait until the q indicator lamp goes out ( page 129).
Transmission neutral position N
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and wait at least one second until the immobiliser is deactivated.
Without depressing the accelerator pedal, turn the key to position 3 and hold it in this position until the engine starts.
!
1
Do not drive off straight away. Leave the engine to idle for a short time until sufficient oil pressure has built up. This prevents wear and potential damage to the engine.
2
Quickly warm up the engine by driving in the middle range of the engine speed. Observe the green section in the rev counter as you do this. Depending on the ambient temperature, the engine will reach its operating temperature after approximately 10 –20 minutes. The engine's full power output becomes available once the operating temperature has been reached.
Release the key when the engine has started.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
49
Getting started Driving
1
i
2
Vehicles with hot-water auxiliary heating: At ambient temperatures below –20 °C, pre-heat the engine before starting ( page 327).
3 Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 125).
4
After the engine has been started Reservoir pressure in the compressedair system There must be sufficient reservoir pressure in the following pressure circuits before a journey is started: in brake circuit 1 or 2 3 – the event message with red status display must go out
5
in the spring actuator pressure circuit – the ! indicator lamp in the instrument panel must go out
6
in the auxiliary consumers circuit ΠРthe event message with yellow status display must go out
7 8 9
50
Event messages in the multi-function display indicate insufficient reservoir pressures. At the same time the STOP lamp will light up. Risk of accident
G
If the reservoir pressure in the compressedair system is too low it will not be possible to brake the vehicle or to change gear. The operating reliability and road safety of the vehicle are jeopardised. Do not start off until the reservoir pressures have been reached and the STOP lamp goes out.
Getting started Driving Checking steering wheel play With the engine running turn the front wheels to the straightahead position. Turn the steering wheel to left and right. The front wheels must begin to move when the steering wheel is turned by not more than 30 mm (1.2 in), measured at the steering wheel rim. If this is not the case, have the steering and steering linkage checked immediately.
Risk of accident
G
If the steering wheel play is greater than 30 mm, the vehicle can no longer safely maintain a straight line. The direction of travel will need to be corrected continually. The operating reliability and road safety of the vehicle are jeopardised. Have the steering system inspected. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Cab tilt lock
1
The Ÿ cab tilt lock indicator lamp in the instrument panel must go out once the engine has been started.
2
If the indicator lamp does not go out: Tilt the cab back to the driving position ( page 453). Risk of accident
G
An unlocked cab could tilt forwards if the vehicle is braked sharply. Only start off once the cab is tilted fully back and locked in this position.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
51
Getting started Driving
1
Releasing the parking brake
The ! parking brake indicator lamp in the instrument panel will go out.
2
i If the reservoir pressure in the parking brake circuit is too low and the engine cannot be started to charge the reservoirs, it is possible to release the parking brake mechanically or pneumatically ( page 483).
3 4 5 1 Brake fully applied, lever engaged 6 7 8
Move the lever to release position 3.
2 To raise the lever 3 Released position If necessary, wait until sufficient reservoir pressure has built up in the brake circuits and the STOP lamp has gone out. Raise parking brake lever 2 out of fully applied position 1.
9
52
Pulling away and changing gear Risk of accident
G
The movement of the pedals must not be obstructed. If floormats and carpets are fitted, ensure these are secured correctly and cannot slip and that there is sufficient pedal clearance. Do not place any loose objects in the driver's footwell. Such objects could interfere with the pedals in the event of sudden acceleration or braking manoeuvres. The objects could block the pedals and it might be impossible to brake, depress the clutch or accelerate. Store all loose objects or secure them so they cannot get into the driver's footwell during a journey.
Getting started Driving
Do not start off if: the reservoir pressure in brake circuit 1 or 2 3 is below 6.8 bar (event message with red status indicator) the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Œ is too low (event message with yellow status indicator) there is insufficient oil pressure the STOP lamp is lit. on vehicles with pneumatic suspension: the chassis frame is not in the ‘ drive position.
Brake circuit 1 and 2 reservoir pressure display
1 Brake circuit indicator lamp 1 2 Brake circuit indicator lamp 2
!
1
Do not drive off straight away. Leave engine to idle for a short time until sufficient oil pressure has built up. This prevents wear and potential damage to the engine.
2 3
Quickly warm up the engine by driving in the middle range of the engine 4 speed. Observe the green section in the rev counter as you do this. Depending on the ambient temperature, the engine will reach its operating 5 temperature after approximately 10 – 20 minutes. The engine's full pow6 er output becomes available once the operating temperature has been reached.
7 8 9
53
Getting started Driving
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
If the warning signal sounds when shifting to a lower gear, do not engage the clutch but select a higher gear instead. There is a risk of engine damage from overrevving.
Pulling away – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift
If the vehicle is driven at too high or too low an engine speed, the engine will be damaged.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Do not rely on hearing to judge when to change gear. Observe the green range in the rev counter. Avoid the red range in the rev counter. Under no circumstances should the engine speed exceed 2,500 rpm when the continuous brake is in operation.
8 9
54
DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and gradient. Move the gear lever to the desired gear, but without using force. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator. Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. Pay attention to the traffic situation as you do this. Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it slows down in a controlled manner.
Risk of accident
G
If a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not continue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once (road and traffic conditions permitting).
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 216).
Getting started Driving Changing gear – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift
! A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, do not engage the clutch. Select the next highest gear instead. There is a risk of engine damage. Depress the clutch pedal. Apply slightly increased pressure on the gear lever to overcome the lock between the gear ranges.
Move the gear lever to the desired gear, but without using force. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
i To change between gear ranges L and H, e.g. when changing from 4th to 5th gear, the clutch pedal must remain depressed.
Pulling away – Telligent® gearshift
1
If you wish to pull away from stationary in transmission neutral position N, the Telligent® gearshift will only permit selection of the 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear. Risk of accident
G
If the clutch pedal is released before a gear is selected, the transmission remains in neutral. Depress the clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
55
Getting started Driving Wait until the selected gear is engaged.
1
A selection sound is heard over the central loudspeaker.
2
The gear engaged flashes briefly on the left in the gear indicator.
3
Release the parking brake.
4
Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator. Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. Pay attention to the traffic situation as you do this.
5 6 Depress the clutch pedal. 7 8
Press and hold down function button 1 and push gear lever forwards 2 until a resistance can be felt and hold in this position. The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator.
9
56
Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it slows down in a controlled manner. Risk of accident
G
If a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not continue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once (road and traffic conditions permitting).
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 218).
Getting started Driving Changing gear – Telligent® gearshift
Guide the gear lever in the direction of gear engagement until a resistance can be felt.
Pulling away – Telligent® automatic gearshift
2
The optimum gear selected by the Telligent® system flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator.
3
Wait until the selected gear is engaged. A selection sound is heard in the central loudspeaker.
4
The gear engaged flashes briefly on the left in the gear indicator. Release the gear lever.
1 To shift up 2 To shift down Depress the clutch pedal.
Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
1
5
1 Driving mode selector switch M Manual mode
6
A Automatic mode Press automatic mode A on the driving mode selector switch.
7
The driver information system shows
8
auto in the multi-function display.
9
57
Getting started Driving Press function button 1.
1
Push gear lever 2 forwards. Telligent® automatic gearshift engages a suitable gear. The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator and then changes to the left position.
2 3
Release the parking brake and slowly depress the accelerator.
4
The vehicle pulls away.
5 6
i
7
If a gear is selected when the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Πis too low, a system fault will result. The engine must be stopped and restarted.
8 9
58
Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. Pay attention to the traffic situation as you do this. Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it slows down in a controlled manner.
Risk of accident
G
If a brake or a brake circuit fails, do not continue the journey. Stop the vehicle at once (road and traffic conditions permitting).
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 218).
Getting started Driving Changing gear Risk of accident
Accelerating
G
If the engine speed drops below 550 rpm, Telligent® automatic gearshift will switch off. This could lead to critical driving situations when driving up or downhill. Do not let the engine speed drop below 550 rpm.
1
Switching on the headlamps
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the maximum speed is reached for the driving situation and the gear engaged, Telligent® automatic gearshift selects the next highest optimum gear.
2 3 4
Decelerating Release the accelerator pedal. Slowly depress the brake pedal. ®
Telligent automatic gearshift changes down to the optimum gear.
5
Light switch M Lights off
6
B Dipped-beam headlamps on Turn the light switch to B. Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 132).
7 8 9
59
Getting started Driving
1 Main-beam headlamps Switch on the lights.
2 Push the combination switch on the left 3 4
Indicating a turn The combination switch can be found on the left of the steering column.
Indicating a right turn Engage combination switch in position 1.
of the steering column forwards and engage.
The / right turn signal indicator lamp flashes in the instrument panel.
The A main-beam headlamps indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
If a trailer is attached, the right-hand ( trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp also flashes. Indicating a left turn Engage combination switch in position 2.
5 Combination switch
6
1 To indicate a right turn 2 To indicate a left turn
7
The & left turn signal indicator lamp flashes in the instrument panel. If a trailer is attached, the left-hand ) trailer/semitrailer indicator lamp
also flashes.
8 9
60
Getting started Driving
Windscreen wipers The combination switch can be found on the left of the steering column.
i
Single wipe
Check at regular intervals that the wiper blades are clean and undamaged.
Turn the rotary switch briefly towards the steering column up to the pressure point.
2
The windscreen wiper wipes once without windscreen washer fluid.
3
Switching the windscreen wipers on Turn rotary switch to the required position depending on the intensity of the rain. Ä Windscreen wipers off 5 Intermittent wipe Æ Normal wipe To switch the windscreen wipers on/off
Ç Rapid wipe È Windscreen washer system
1
Wiping with windscreen washer fluid Turn the rotary switch to the stop towards the steering column and hold in this position.
4 5
Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windscreen as long as the rotary switch is in the rearmost position.
6
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 304).
7 8 9
61
Getting started Parking and closing Parking and closing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Press lever downwards, swing into test position 3 and hold.
Applying the parking brake Risk of accident
G
The braking efficiency of the parking brake may not be sufficient on uphill or downhill gradients to prevent the laden vehicle from rolling away. In the test position, check whether the braking force of the spring actuators is adequate to hold the vehicle. If necessary, the vehicle's wheels should be chocked as an additional safety measure. The vehicle could start moving spontaneously. Always check that the lever has engaged correctly in the fully applied position, or else it may move back automatically to the released position.
8 9
62
The vehicle must not move. If the braking force of the spring actuators on the towing vehicle is not sufficient to hold the vehicle, chock the wheels as an additional safety measure.
1 Released position 2 Fully-applied position 3 Test position Swing lever out of released position 1 to fully-applied position 2.
Allow lever to swing back from test position 3 to fully-applied position 2 and engage in this position. The ! parking brake indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
Getting started Parking and closing
Stopping – Hydro-pneumatic gearshift Brake the vehicle. Depress the clutch pedal fully. Shift the transmission into neutral. Hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake ( see page 62). Release the clutch pedal.
i When the transmission is in neutral, the gear lever is in the gate between 3rd and 4th gear, or between 5th and 6th gear.
Stopping – Telligent® gearshift Brake the vehicle. If necessary, change down a gear. Depress the clutch pedal fully. Press neutral button on gear lever. N flashes on the right in the gear indica-
tor. Telligent® gearshift engages neutral. Hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake ( see page 62). Release the clutch pedal.
Stopping – Telligent® automatic gearshift Risk of accident
1
G
2
The vehicle could roll away with the engine running and a gear engaged. Telligent® automatic gearshift disengages automatically when the idle speed is reached.
3 4
Always hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake when you stop.
5 Brake the vehicle. Telligent® automatic gearshift disengages automatically just before the idle speed is reached.
6 7
Automatic mode (A): When the vehicle is stationary, a pullaway gear is selected.
8
9
63
Getting started Parking and closing
1
i Manual mode (M):
2
When the vehicle is stationary, the selected gear remains engaged.
3 Stopping the engine – Telligent® automatic gearshift
Risk of accident
G
A parked vehicle could roll away as the Telligent® automatic gearshift always engages neutral position once the engine has been switched off. You cannot park the vehicle with a gear engaged. Always hold the vehicle using the parking brake.
4
Stopping the engine Leave engine running for approximately one to two minutes at idle if the coolant temperature is above 95 °C it had been run at maximum output, e.g. uphill. Release the accelerator pedal.
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the transmission into neutral.
5
Apply the parking brake ( see page 62).
Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
6
Press neutral button 1 on the gear lever.
Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 250).
7
N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.
Telligent® gearshift engages neutral. Switch off the engine.
8 9
64
Getting started Parking and closing
Opening the door from the inside
Locking with the key
1
Locking using the radio remote control The radio remote control will work regardless of the direction in which it is pointed. It is also possible to unlock the vehicle from some distance. To avoid theft, the radio remote control should only be used in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
Left-hand door
Pull interior door handle 1 to open door
1 To unlock 2 To lock
i
i
A locked door can always be opened from the inside using the interior door handle.
The driver's and co-driver's door always lock simultaneously.
3 4
The radio remote control 1 Interior door handle
2
Locks the driver's and co-driver's door centrally Locks the side windows automatically on vehicles with enhanced central locking system
5 6
Locks the sliding/tilting sunroof auto7 matically on vehicles with enhanced central locking system, depending on the position of the lock switch
8 9
65
Getting started Parking and closing
1 Activates/deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.
2
Press ‹ locking button 1 for approximately one second. The driver's and co-driver's door will lock.
Opened side windows close automatically.
The turn signals will flash 3 times.
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically, depending on the position of the lock switch.
3 Risk of injury
4
Radio remote control
6
G
Take care when closing the power windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody becomes trapped in them.
5 1 ‹ Locking button 2 Œ Unlocking button
7
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short time. Children or unauthorised persons could otherwise start the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a locked door from the inside and endanger themselves and others.
8 9
66
Vehicles with enhanced central locking system:
Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
i Turn signals only flash if the locking procedure is successful. Further information can be found in the "Controls in detail" section ( page 102).
Safety Occupant safety General Driving safety systems 1 Underride guard
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
67
Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety
1
Restraint systems
2
This section describes the most important aspects of the restraint systems of the vehicle.
3
Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the restraint systems consist of: seat belts
4 belt tensioners airbag
5 Seat belts, belt tensioners and the airbag 6 7 8
are supplementary restraint systems whose protective functions complement one another. Always fasten your seat belt before starting off. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly.
9
68
i
Replace the following items
The driver's airbag and belt tensioners are always installed together in a vehicle.
seat belts belt tensioners airbags
Risk of injury
G
Do not modify components of the restraint systems or interfere with restraint system wiring. The belt tensioners or airbag could be triggered accidentally or fail to function and therefore no longer protect in the event of an accident.
if these have been subjected to a load in an accident. The restraint systems should be checked and replaced if necessary if they have been subjected to a load or damaged in an accident. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Safety Occupant safety Seat belt
i
Wearing seat belts is a legal requirement in many countries – observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
The locking action of the inertia reel can be checked by pulling sharply on the belt.
Regardless of such requirements, all occupants should wear a seat belt for every journey. Information about wearing seat belts can be found in the "Getting started" section ( page 46). This information applies only to seat belts fitted at the plant in which the vehicle was manufactured. Inertia reel – How it works The inertia reel will prevent the belt strap from being pulled out further if the vehicle is decelerated suddenly in any direction and if the belt is pulled out sharply
Seat belt warning system Optional extra Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. A warning buzzer will sound for approximately 10 seconds if the driver's seat belt is not engaged.
Seat belts which have been subjected to a heavy load in an accident must be replaced. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1 2
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
3 4 5
G
6
Always fasten your seat belt before starting off. Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly.
7
Risk of injury
8 9
69
Safety Occupant safety
1 Belt tensioners 2
In an impact, the belt tensioner tightens the belt to pull it close to the body thus optimising the protective function of the seat belt.
3 Risk of injury
4 5 6 7
G
Damage or accident-related stress to the restraint system (seat belt, anchor points, belt tensioner or airbag) may mean that the system will not be able to provide the protection for the occupants. For this reason, damage or accident-related stress to restraint systems should be inspected immediately at a qualified specialist workshop and, if necessary, the system should be replaced.
8 9
70
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driver's airbag The airbag offers additional protection against injury and complements the protective functions of the belt tensioner and seat belt. The airbag is located beneath the padded boss of the steering wheel. Risk of injury
G
Airbags and belt tensioners will only be able to perform their protective function effectively if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly and are sitting properly. Because the airbag inflates in a matter of milliseconds, there is a risk of serious injury or death.
Safety Occupant safety
Risk of injury
G
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury caused by inflation of the airbag in milliseconds, observe the following: Choose a seat position that allows you to sit as far back from the airbag as possible, but still allows you to drive the vehicle safely. Only hold the steering wheel by the rim. Do not lean over the padded boss of the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion or when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. This allows the airbag to inflate fully. Do not cover the padded boss of the steering wheel or affix badges or stickers to it. Otherwise correct functioning of the airbag cannot be guaranteed.
Because the airbag inflates in a matter of milliseconds, there is a high risk of injury. Severe injuries could be caused by being very near the point where the airbag is triggered. Do not touch any parts of the airbag once it has been triggered. Parts of the airbag could be hot. Correct operation of the airbag module is no longer guaranteed after 15 years of service. For safety reasons, the airbag module should be replaced after 15 years at the latest.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you sell the vehicle, you should pass the Operating Instructions on to the new owner. The buyer or others would otherwise not be aware of and be able to reduce the risks of injury.
1 2 3 4 5 6
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 8 9
71
Safety Occupant safety
1 Function of airbag and belt tensioner 2
The airbag and belt tensioners are only operational once the key has been turned to position 2 in the ignition lock. The airbag and belt tensioners will be trig-
3 gered from a certain degree of vehicle deceleration, e.g. in a frontal collision. The seat belt will tension automatically so
4 that the strap is close to the body. 5 6
i Although smoke is released, this neither constitutes a health hazard nor implies that fire has broken out in the vehicle.
7 8 9
72
Risk of injury
G
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury caused by inflation of the airbag in milliseconds, observe the following: Choose a seat position that allows you to sit a far back from the airbag as possible, but still allows you to drive the vehicle safely. Ensure that small children are kept away from the airbag inflation point as serious or fatal injuries could otherwise result.
Safety General General Navigation system Risk of accident
Operation of audio and mobile communication equipment
G
Stop the vehicle to enter data into the navigation system. Attention would otherwise be drawn away from the traffic. The navigation system is unable to take account of the load-bearing capacity of bridges or the permissible headroom in tunnels or under bridges. The driver is responsible for ensuring that bridge load-bearing capacities and maximum headroom capacities are not exceeded.
e.g. telephone, two-way radio, fax machine, etc. Risk of accident
G
Operate the audio or mobile communication equipment only when road and traffic conditions permit. Attention would otherwise be drawn away from the traffic.
i
1
In the Federal Republic of Germany it is forbidden to use mobile telephones without a permanently installed handsfree system while the vehicle is in motion or while the engine is running.
2 3
Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
4 5
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is covering a distance of some 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
6
i 7
Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
8 9
73
Safety General
1 Operation and retrofitting of mobile te-
i
!
2
In the Federal Republic of Germany it is forbidden to use mobile telephones without a permanently installed handsfree system while the vehicle is in motion or while the engine is running.
Bank cards, credit cards or other cards with magnetic strips should not be kept near the telephone bracket and loudspeaker.
lephones, two-way radios and fax machines Risk of accident
3 4 5 6
G
Operating mobile telephones, two-way radios and fax machines that have an aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems.
Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. When retrofitting
As a result, the operating reliability and vehicle safety are considerably jeopardised.
mobile telephones
Only use the telephone with a permanently installed hands-free system and if the traffic conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away from the traffic.
fax machines
7 8 9
74
two-way radios the relevant installation specifications issued by Mercedes-Benz are to be observed. Contravention of these specifications could invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit (EU Directive 95/54/EC).
If a magnetic strip is kept in the vicinity of this equipment, the data stored on the card could be deleted or modified.
Safety General
Tyres Risk of accident
Air conditioning
G
Tyres age from the influence of sunlight and the environment. The rubber of the tyre gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become harder and more brittle and they begin to split through age.
Safety requirements Specialist knowledge is required for service and repair work to the air conditioning. For this reason, such work should only be carried out by a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
G
Tyres more than six years old are no longer safe for use.
Risk of injury
Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after six years at the latest. This also applies to the spare wheel.
Leaking refrigerant from the air conditioning can cause frostbite. Avoid all contact with refrigerant. If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin, consult a doctor immediately.
Checking the age of tyres ( page 390).
!
1
If the air conditioning is damaged in an accident, do not switch the system on. This could result in damage to the air conditioning system.
2
Have the air conditioning system checked.
3
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
4 5 6 7 8 9
75
Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems
1 The following driving safety systems are described in this section:
2
Telligent® brake system (BS) with ABS Telligent® brake system (BS) with ABS and ASR
3 Telligent® stability control (SR)
Telligent®
roll control
4 Lane assist (SPA) Reversing warning
5 6
i During the winter, the best performance is only attained from the driving safety systems in conjunction with M+S tyres (winter tyres).
7 8 9
76
Risk of accident
G
The risk of an accident is higher: at high speeds, especially when cornering on wet or slippery road surfaces if a safe distance is not kept from the vehicle in front The driving safety systems are unable to overcome the laws of physics. For this reason, adapt your driving style to current road and weather conditions.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied. The vehicle thus remains steerable. It is operational from walking pace, regardless of road surface conditions.
Safety Driving safety systems Telligent® brake system (BS) ®
The Telligent brake system features all the control functions of ABS, ASR and SR. The Telligent® brake system ensures particularly good braking efficiency with an even shorter braking distance. The Telligent® brake system can detect emergency braking situations via the integrated brake assist system. To conserve the wheel brakes, the Telligent® brake system can also employ the vehicle's engine brake/retarder, depending on the laden weight of the vehicle and the weather conditions.
i ®
The Telligent brake system imparts control over the trailer that results in the vehicle and trailer/semitrailer automatically contributing to the braking effort of the entire vehicle and trailer combination in accordance with their weight. This means the vehicle and trailer combination has improved braking characteristics. On 4 x 2 vehicle and semitrailer combinations, the Telligent® brake system monitors the temperature of the wheel brakes.
Function check
1
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The multi-function display will light up for approximately two seconds. At the same time, the warning buzzer sounds.
2 3 4 5 6
Function check of brake systems
1 ABS on tractor vehicle 2 ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS on trailer/semitrailer
7
8 9
77
Safety Driving safety systems
1 The multi-function display will then show: ABS on tractor vehicle
2 or 3
ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS on trailer/semitrailer
Risk of accident
G
If there is no display or the display does not go out after three seconds or the display does not go out when the vehicle pulls away, anti-lock protection is not guaranteed. The vehicle cannot be steered if the wheels lock during braking. The vehicle could skid due to locked wheels. The vehicle can still be slowed down using the normal brakes. Drive with particular care. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible.
4 5 6 7 8 9
78
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Safety Driving safety systems Event messages Vehicles with Telligent® brake system (BS) Risk of accident
G
An event message with a yellow status indicator means the braking characteristics could be affected. Drive with particular care. Have the brake system checked and repaired as soon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Risk of accident
G
An event message with a red status indicator means the braking characteristics are affected.
The pedal travel and pedal force required to brake the vehicle/vehicle and trailer combination may be increased. The anti-lock function may be deactivated. The vehicle can still be slowed down using the normal brakes. Drive with particular care. Have the brake system checked and repaired immediately by a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
79
Safety Driving safety systems
1
i
or without function restriction
2
Malfunctions in the Telligent® stability control (SR) are shown by the multifunction display as a Telligent® brake system (BS) event message.
3 Vehicles with Telligent® brake system (BS)
4 An event message from the tractor vehicle 5 6 7
brake system is shown by the multi-function display with: function restriction instructions fault location and system abbreviation "BS"
8 9
80
without instructions but with fault location and system abbreviation "BS" At the same time, the status indicator will light up yellow or red. Tractor vehicle BS event message (example)
1 System abbreviation 2 Status indicator (yellow or red) 3 Function restriction 4 Instructions 5 Fault location L Tractor vehicle A Trailer/semitrailer
Safety Driving safety systems An event message from the trailer or semitrailer brake system is shown by the multifunction display:
1
with fault location and
2
the system abbreviation "ABS trailer/ semitrailer"
3
or for trailer/semitrailer and electropneumatic brake system with the system abbreviation "EAB". At the same time, the status indicator will light up yellow or red.
4 "ABS/EBS trailer" event message with ABS fault message (example)
1 System abbreviation 2 Status indicator (yellow or red) 3 Function restriction 4 Instructions 5 Fault location L Tractor vehicle A Trailer/semitrailer
"EBS trailer" event message (example)
1 System abbreviation 2 Status indicator (yellow or red) 3 Function restriction 4 Instructions 5 Fault location L Tractor vehicle A Trailer/semitrailer
5 6 7 8 9
81
Safety Driving safety systems
1 To drive the tractor unit without semitrailer or with semitrailer without ABS:
2
Insert the connector of connecting cable in the "blank socket". To drive the tractor vehicle with a semitrail-
3 er having ABS or electronic trailer brake: 4
Remove connector of connecting cable from empty socket and insert in trailer socket. Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)
Brake system memory function (example)
5
1 Blank socket 2 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin
6
Memory function of Telligent® brake system (BS)
7
When the key is turned to position 2 in the ignition lock and there had been a dynamic fault in the Telligent® brake system the last time the vehicle was driven, an event message will indicate this.
1 System abbreviation 2 Status indicator (yellow or red) 3 Function restriction 4 Instructions 5 Fault location L Tractor vehicle A Trailer/semitrailer
8
Semitrailer tractor vehicle (example)
9
82
Safety Driving safety systems Excessive wheel brake temperature 4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles An event message with yellow status indicator will indicate excessive temperatures in the wheel brakes.
Drive with particular care. Adapt driving style and try to use the continuous brake (exhaust brake/retarder) to brake the vehicle where possible. Once the wheel brake temperature drops back below the critical level, the display will go out.
i
1
The system is unable to detect and display increases in temperature caused by defects in the wheel brakes (seized calliper, reduced air gap etc.).
2 3
Risk of accident
G
An event message with a yellow status indicator means the braking characteristics could be affected. Drive with particular care.
4 5 6
1 Excessive wheel brake temperature event message 2 Status indicator (yellow)
7 8 9
83
Safety Driving safety systems
1 Braking with anti-lock protection 2 3 4 5 6
In an emergency, apply full pressure to brake pedal. This guarantees optimum deceleration of the vehicle. Risk of accident
G
If a trailer/semitrailer without ABS is attached, this could be over-braked if the brakes are applied fully. There is a danger that control over the vehicle could be lost. Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an emergency to prevent the wheels of the trailer/semitrailer from locking.
7 8 9
84
The BS or ABS anti-lock braking systems do not relieve you of the responsibility for adopting a driving style which suits traffic and road conditions. True running and steerability of the vehicle/vehicle and trailer combination under braking is improved. The anti-lock protection is not capable, however, of overcoming the laws of physics and cannot protect against the consequences of not keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front or excessive speed when cornering, for instance.
If the multi-function display shows the event message ABS on trailer/semitrailer or ABS on tractor vehicle and ABS on trailer/semitrailer the anti-lock protection for the trailer/ semitrailer or for the tractor vehicle and trailer/semitrailer is not operational.
Safety Driving safety systems
Risk of accident
G
If the multi-function display shows just the event message "ABS trailer/semitrailer", there is a danger of the trailer/semitrailer over-braking. There is a danger of control over the vehicle being lost if full braking effort is applied. Avoid applying brakes fully unless it is an emergency to prevent the wheels of the trailer/semitrailer from locking. Telligent®
Vehicles without automatic gearshift: On a slippery road surface, declutch as well so that the ABS control system is not affected by the engine braking effect.
i The continuous brake switches itself off automatically during ABS intervention. The b indicator lamp does not go out.
1
ABS deactivation If ABS is switched off, it may be possible to achieve shorter stopping distances on rough terrain and on unmade roads (e.g. soft or extremely corrugated surfaces and on downhill slopes). Risk of accident
G
2 3 4
The vehicle could skid due to locked wheels. If ABS is switched off, the wheels may lock and skid under braking. The vehicle cannot be steered if the wheels lock during braking.
5
ABS must always be switched on when driving on public roads.
6 7 8 9
85
Safety Driving safety systems Deactivating ABS
1
i The "Tractor vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer ABS off" display is only available on trailers/semitrailers with EBS
2
Press upper section of switch 1.
3
ABS is deactivated. The multi-function display shows tractor vehicle ABS off.
4 1 ABS OFF switch
5
i On vehicles with ABS deactivation:
6 7
Deactivate ABS for off-road travel. The next time the engine is started, ABS is automatically activated. Switch ABS off again for off-road driving.
8 9
86
1 Display for tractor vehicle ABS off 2 Status indicator (yellow) 3 Display for tractor vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer ABS off
On trailers/semitrailers with EBS, the multi-function display shows tractor vehicle and trailer/semitrailer ABS off. At the same time, the status indicator will light up yellow.
Safety Driving safety systems Reactivating ABS Press upper section of switch 1. ABS is reactivated. The display in the multi-function display must go out.
Acceleration skid control (ASR) Acceleration skid control prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the vehicle pulls away or during acceleration, regardless of the road conditions.
Activating ASR
1
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
2
The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up and then goes out after two seconds. Risk of accident
3
G
4
If the ASR is switched off and the wheels slip, the vehicle could skid.
1 ASR OFF switch
5
Acceleration skid control does not relieve you of the responsibility of driving the vehicle in a manner which suits road and traffic conditions. If the indicator lamp does not go out, have ASR checked.
6 7
8 9
87
Safety Driving safety systems
1 2 3 4 5
Risk of accident
G
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
6 7 8 9
88
Driving with ASR
!
If the drive wheels start to spin on one or both sides of the vehicle, ASR switches itself on automatically.
During the winter, the best performance is only attained from ASR in conjunction with winter tyres.
The v ASR indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
If traction problems occur when the vehicle is driven with chains or driven on loose ground (e.g. sand or gravel), switch off acceleration skid control.
If the drive wheels spin on one side, ASR brakes them automatically. If the drive wheels spin on both sides, ASR automatically reduces engine power output.
Vehicles with two driven rear axles: On a slippery road, engage the "inter-axle" differential lock ( page 253).
Safety Driving safety systems
i
Deactivating ASR
Cruise control or the cruise control continuous brake cannot be activated during skid control. If cruise control was already switched on, it will remain active. It is not possible to accelerate or decelerate using the cruise control function.
Reactivating ASR
1
Press upper section of switch 1 again. ASR is activated. The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will go out.
2 3 4
1 ASR OFF switch
5
Press upper section of switch 1. ASR is deactivated. The v ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will flash.
6 7 8 9
89
Safety Driving safety systems
1
Telligent® stability control (SR) 4 x 2 semitrailer tractor vehicles
® 2 Telligent stability control only operates
3 4
within physical limitations. In critical driving situations, such as sudden evasive manoeuvres or increased speed in corners, it reduces skidding, jack-knifing or tipping of the semitrailer. This is independent of the load condition of the semitrailer or the type of road surface.
5
i
6
Telligent® stability control is operational regardless of whether or not the service brake and continuous brake are engaged.
Handling characteristics Understeering The vehicle moves off the correct path 1 over the front axle to the outer edge of the carriageway 2.
1 Intended 2 Actual
8 9
90
The vehicle breaks away through the rear axle. Moving off the intended path 3, the vehicle turns toward the inner edge of the carriageway 4.
Path correction (oversteering) Path correction (understeering)
7
Oversteering
3 Intended 4 Actual
Safety Driving safety systems Activating SR
Deactivating SR
1
Press upper section of switch 1 again.
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The v SR/ASR indicator lamp lights up and should go out after two seconds. This indicates that Telligent® stability control is active.
i When the key is turned to position 2 in the ignition lock, Telligent® stability control is activated automatically.
Reactivating SR
1 SR OFF switch Press upper section of switch 1.
The stability control and acceleration skid control functions are active.
2
The flashing SR/ASR indicator lamp v in the instrument panel will go out.
3
Driving with SR
4
Telligent® stability control is an extension of the Telligent® brake system (BS), which already incorporates both ABS and ASR.
5
The stability control and acceleration skid control functions are deactivated.
6
The v SR/ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will flash.
7 8 9
91
Safety Driving safety systems ® 1 If Telligent stability control recognises a
i
2
During automatic control, the v SR/ASR indicator lamp in the instrument panel will light up.
critical driving situation, the following automatic control interventions will stabilise the tractor and trailer combination: Reduction in engine power output
3 Targeted intervention in the brake system on each wheel of the tractor vehicle individually
4 Actuation of the semitrailer brake system
5 Braking of the entire vehicle and trailer combination
6 7 8 9
92
Risk of accident
G
Telligent® stability control does not relieve you of the responsibility of driving the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the loading of the vehicle and the road and traffic conditions. Stability control is not capable, for example, of overcoming the laws of physics and cannot protect against the consequences of the semitrailer vehicle being driven at excessive speed in corners. Excessive speed in corners could lead to control over the vehicle being lost. Therefore, brake the vehicle in good time when approaching corners, so that there is no danger when cornering.
Safety Driving safety systems
i ®
Telligent stability control is only active when the vehicle is moving at a speed of at least 6 mph (10 km/h). If reverse gear is engaged, stability control will be deactivated.
!
SR event message
1
During the winter, the best performance is only obtained from Telligent® stability control in conjunction with M+S tyres (winter tyres).
Telligent® stability control messages are shown by the multi-function display as a Telligent® brake system (BS) event message.
2
Switch off Telligent® stability control if traction problems occur when driving with snow chains or on loose surfaces (e.g. sand and gravel).
At the same time, the multi-function display indicates any function restriction and the status indicator lights up yellow.
3
Telligent® stability control is then deactivated.
4
®
Telligent stability control is automatically deactivated:
G
if there is a malfunction in Telligent® stability control
Risk of accident
if there is a malfunction in Telligent® brake system which affects Telligent® stability control.
Excessive speed when cornering could lead to control over the vehicle being lost. Drive with particular care. Therefore, brake the vehicle in good time when approaching corners, so that there is no danger when cornering.
5 6 7 8 9
93
Safety Driving safety systems
1
Acknowledging event message
i
Have Telligent stability control inspected.
Press the ÿ or è button on the multi-function steering wheel.
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
or
If the cause of the malfunction is not rectified when the engine is started again, the event message is shown again in the multi-function display.
! ®
2 3 4 5 6
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 8 9
94
Press the º button on the instrument panel. The message is cleared. The system abbreviation is shown in the reminder section.
Safety Driving safety systems Telligent® roll control (WR) 4x2 and 6x2 vehicles with steel/airsprung front axle and air-sprung rear axle: Telligent® roll control controls the chassis suspension electronically. Depending on the laden weight of the vehicle, the driving situation and the road properties, the chassis suspension regulates itself automatically.
When driving, rolling movements of bodies with a high centre of gravity e.g. box bodies, are reduced safety in critical driving situations is increased, e.g. lane change or sudden evasive manoeuvres
i
1 ®
Malfunctions in Telligent roll control are shown in the multi-function display. An event message in the multi-function display is indicated by the system abbreviation HM.
2 3
ride comfort is improved on poor road surfaces
4
Telligent® roll control is gentle on sensitive freight
5
pitching movements are reduced when the vehicle pulls away or brakes
6 7 8 9
95
Safety Driving safety systems
1 2 3 4
G
Risk of accident ®
If there is a Telligent roll control event message, the risk of the vehicle tipping over in corners is increased. The suspension's damping characteristics may be affected. Drive with particular care. Slow down in particular when approaching corners. Telligent® roll control should be repaired as soon as possible.
5
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
6
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 8 9
96
Lane assist Lane assist is a convenience system which continuously monitors the position of the vehicle in relation to the roadside markings through a camera behind the windscreen. If the road lane markings are driven on or crossed, an audible warning in the form of a "rumble strip" noise will sound in the lefthand or right-hand cab loudspeaker. 1 "Lane assist" camera
Safety Driving safety systems
Risk of accident
G
Lane assist is merely a tool to assist the driver. When driving, you are responsible for keeping the vehicle on the correct lane and in the correct direction. Lane assist can only give a warning when the road lane markings are driven over or crossed if these are easily detectable. Active Lane assist will not give a warning if: the speed of the vehicle is below 40 mph (60 km/h)
Risk of accident
G
Adverse weather conditions, such as: snow slush heavy rain and a very dirty windscreen can impair the function of Lane assist. You should therefore switch on the windscreen wiper, for example, to keep the area around the camera free from dirt.
G
1
Note that the function of Lane assist is limited:
2
if the lane markings are difficult to detect (e.g. if the road is covered by snow, sand or debris)
3
if there are shadows or several markings on the road (e.g. roadworks)
4
when the main-beam headlamps are switched on
5
Risk of accident
in tight corners
a turn signal is on
6
the vehicle is decelerating
7 8 9
97
Safety Driving safety systems
1 Switching on Lane assist
Press upper section of switch 1. Lane assist is activated. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. A brief crackling noise will be heard from the loudspeakers in the cab.
2 3
i
4 5 1 Lane assist switch 6
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
7 8 9
98
If Lane assist was already activated before the engine was started, the crackling noise will be heard as the engine is started. The radio is automatically muted when a Lane assist warning is being given.
i If a Lane assist warning is not possible, the f "Lane assist" indicator lamp will light up in the instrument panel. Switching off Lane assist Press upper section of switch 1. Lane assist is deactivated. The indicator lamp in the switch will go out.
Safety Driving safety systems
Reversing warning
G
1
The reversing warning does not relieve you of your duty to make sure that there are no persons/obstacles behind the vehicle.
2
Risk of accident
1
The reversing warning is an audible warning device built into the rear lamp cluster of the vehicle. The reversing warning is activated and emits a warning tone when reverse gear is engaged.
If necessary, a second person should assist during manoeuvring.
3 4
1 Reversing warning
5 6 7 8 9 1. Legal requirement in Austria
99
Safety Underride guard Underride guard
1 2
Folding underride guard
Risk of accident
The underride guard can be folded up for off-road journeys, for example.
The underride guard must be folded down and locked in this position when the vehicle is driven on public roads. Only this way can a vehicle be prevented from becoming jammed beneath the frame in the event of a collision.
3 4 Underride guard (example)
5 6 7
Underride guard (example)
1 Unlocked 2 Locked
8 9
100
G
1 Unlocked 2 Locked 3 Folded down 4 Folded up
Controls in detail Opening and closing Seats and berths Starting and stopping the engine 1 Brakes Lighting Instrument panel
2 3
Driver information system Gear selection 4 Driving Driving systems 5 Good visibility Climate control Open-air
6 7
Features
8 9
101
Controls in detail Opening and closing Opening and closing
1 The "Controls in detail" section contains
detailed information about the functions of the vehicle.
2 Do not read this section until you are fully 3
conversant with the basic functions of the vehicle. You can read about the basic functions in the "Getting started" section.
4 5
i
Opening and closing doors Risk of accident and injury
G
Only drive with the doors properly closed. If you open or close the doors while the vehicle is in motion there is a risk of injury. Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short time. Children or unauthorised persons could otherwise start the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. They could open a locked door from the inside and endanger themselves and others.
6 7 8 9
102
If you unlock the vehicle using the radio remote control, you must open one of the doors within 25 seconds. Otherwise the electronics system relocks the vehicle. A locked door can always be opened from the inside using the interior door handle. Before the vehicle can be locked, all doors must be closed. The lock-out protection prevents opened doors from being locked.
Controls in detail Opening and closing
i
Vehicle key
Central locking The vehicle is equipped with a special key When you unlock the vehicle using the Included with the vehicle are two keys. system. You can only start the engine usradio remote control, the interior light lights up for approximately ten seconds. ing the keys coded to the vehicle. Locking/unlocking driver's door The interior light goes out when the i key in the steering lock is turned to poUnlocking/locking doors using the key If a key is lost, obtaining a replacement sition 1. If a door is open, the interior is a time-consuming process which only light goes out after approximately a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can five minutes. perform for you. When pressing the buttons of the radio For this reason, DaimlerChrysler recomremote control, always hold for approximends that you always keep an easily mately one second. This avoids malaccessible spare key with you for emerfunctions. gencies.
Left-hand door
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 unlocked 2 locked
8 9
103
Controls in detail Opening and closing
1 Exterior door release mechanism 2 3 4
To lock
To open the door, pull the door handle on the outside.
Press switch 1. Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes out.
i
All doors must be closed. The vehicle locks centrally.
Unlocking Only the driver's and the co-driver's door can be opened using the key.
Unlocking
To lock The driver's and co-driver's door always lock simultaneously.
Press switch 3. Indicator lamp 2 in the switch flashes.
5 6 7 8
The vehicle unlocks centrally.
Unlocking/locking doors using the "Door lock" switch You can lock and unlock the vehicle centrally via the door lock switch in the control panel of the driver's and co-driver's door. This is useful, for example, to unlock the co-driver's door from inside or to lock the vehicle before driving off.
9
104
Door lock switch in driver's door
i Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: If the vehicle was locked from the outside, the anti-theft alarm system is activated if switch 3 is pressed.
Controls in detail Opening and closing
Opening the door from inside
Central locking with anti-theft alarm system Included with the vehicle are: two keys two radio remote controls Unlocking/locking doors using key The locking and unlocking function is the same as on vehicles with central locking ( page 103).
1 Interior door handle To open the door, pull door handle 1 on the inside.
To activate the anti-theft alarm system at the same time, hold the key in the locked position for longer than two seconds. The vehicle is locked. The turn signals flash 3 times1. The anti-theft alarm system is primed.
i If there is no visual confirmation, the anti-theft alarm system is activated but at least one of the components that are monitored is not in an operational condition and is not being monitored.
1 2 3 4 5 6
i A locked door can always be opened from the inside using the interior door handle.
7 8 9 1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.
105
Controls in detail Opening and closing
1 Locking and unlocking doors using the radio remote control
Included with the vehicle are
The turn signals flash 3 times.
two radio remote controls
The turn signals flash once1.
The anti-theft alarm system is primed.
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
i
The enhanced central locking system is an extension of the central locking system.
Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door
5 Press the Πbutton twice. The turn signals flash once1.
6
Enhanced central locking system two keys
Press the Πbutton once.
4
Press the ‹ button once. Driver's and co-driver's door locks.
2 Unlocking driver's door 3
Locking driver's and co-driver's door
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
The turn signals only flash if the locking procedure is successful. If there is no confirmation from the turn signals1, not all components/vehicle access points monitored by the anti-theft alarm system are in the ready position ( page 111). 1 Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly
7
Unlocking/locking doors using the key The vehicle should be locked using the key in the same way as any standard central locking system ( page 103). If you lock a vehicle with enhanced central locking system, the following also have to be closed the driver's and co-driver's door windows the sliding/tilting sunroof
8 9 1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.
106
Controls in detail Opening and closing
i
Unlocking/locking doors using the key
The power windows feature protection against entrapment.
The vehicle should be locked using the key in the same way as any standard central locking system ( page 103).
The closing function is interrupted if an object prevents the side window from closing fully. The sliding/tilting sunroof remains open if the closure lock is activated before you lock the vehicle ( page 341). The enhanced central locking system is only effective if the key in the steering lock is in position 0 or removed you lock or unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door or if you use the radio remote control both doors are closed
Locking and unlocking the doors using the radio remote control
1
Unlocking the driver's door
2
Press the Πbutton once. Convenience opening Hold key in driver's door lock for longer than three seconds in the "unlock" position.
The turn signals flash once1.
3
Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
4
The driver's door unlocks The turn signals flash once1 The side windows open The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into the raised position
i
Unlocking driver's and co-driver's door Press the Πbutton twice. The turn signals flash once1.
5 6
Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
When you release the key, the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof stop moving.
7 8 9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.
107
Controls in detail Opening and closing
1 Locking driver's and co-driver's door Press the ‹ button once.
2
The turn signals flash once1. The driver's and co-driver's door lock.
3
Opened side windows close automatically.
4
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically, depending on the position of the lock switch.
5
The turn signals flash three times1.
6
Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock
Protection against entrapment feature in power windows.
Before locking, select position of sliding/tilting sunroof on closure lock switch.
Opened windows close automatically when the vehicle is locked. The closing function is interrupted if an object prevents the side window from closing fully.
Vehicles with anti-theft alarm system: The anti-theft alarm system is primed.
i 7
i
Turn signals only flash if the locking procedure is successful.
8 9 1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.
108
1 Closure lock switch
Controls in detail Opening and closing Activating Press the upper section of the P closure lock switch. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. The next time the vehicle is locked, the sliding/tilting sunroof remains open.
Radio remote control The radio remote control works regardless of the direction in which it is pointed. It is also possible to unlock the vehicle from some distance. To avoid theft, the radio remote control should only be used in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
Closes the sliding/tilting sunroof automatically on vehicles with the enhanced central locking system, depending on the position of the closure lock
1 2
Activates/deactivates the anti-theft alarm system
3
The radio remote control Deactivating Press the upper section of the P closure lock switch. The indicator lamp in the switch should go out. The sliding/tilting sunroof closes when the vehicle is locked.
4
Unlocks the driver's and co-driver's door in succession
5
Locks the driver's and co-driver's door centrally
6
Closes the side windows automatically on vehicles with the enhanced central locking system
7
Radio remote control
1 ‹ Locking button 2 Œ Unlocking button
8
9
109
Controls in detail Opening and closing
1 Press and hold locking/unlocking button for approximately one second.
2 3
i If you unlock the vehicle using the radio remote control and none of the doors are opened within 25 seconds, the vehicle locks itself again automatically.
4 Risk of injury
5 6
G
When closing the power windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof, ensure that nobody becomes trapped in them.
7 8 9
110
i The driver information system shows when the battery in the radio remote control needs to be replaced. Replacing the battery ( page 534). Loss of a radio remote control If a radio remote control is lost, a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can prevent further use by deactivating all of the radio remote control units.
Be prepared to hand over all available radio remote control units to the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for recoding. The vehicle can then only be locked/ unlocked with the recoded radio remote control units.
Controls in detail Opening and closing
Anti-theft alarm system The anti-theft alarm system protects the tractor vehicle and the attached trailer/ semitrailer against break-in and theft. The activated anti-theft alarm system triggers an optical and acoustic alarm if: a door is opened the maintenance flap is opened the cab is tilted a stowage compartment is opened on the driver's or co-driver's side a connecting cable to the trailer or semitrailer is disconnected the driver's door is unlocked using the "Lock door" switch in the driver's door control panel if the vehicle was locked from the outside
the voltage supply is interrupted due to the battery terminal clamps being undone, for example. supply to the anti-theft alarms is interrupted the panic switch in the cab interior is pressed a signal is set off by sensors fitted by the body manufacturer. To activate the anti-theft alarm system with monitoring of all sensors, the following must be observed: Only those components that were in the ready position, i.e. locked or attached, when the alarm was activated will trigger an alarm. The anti-theft alarm system only monitors closed or attached components.
The turn signals1 confirm the locking procedure with activated anti-theft alarm system only when all components are in the ready position.
1 2
On vehicles with enhanced central locking system, the side windows close first and then the sliding/tilting sunroof before the turn signals confirm completion of the locking procedure.
3
It is possible to place a component in the ready position up to ten seconds after the anti-theft alarm system has been activated. The anti-theft alarm system then monitors this component.
5
The anti-theft alarm system cannot monitor trailers or semitrailers with LED tail lamps. The multi-function display shows Trailer cannot be monitored!.
4
6 7 8 9
1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly
111
Controls in detail Opening and closing
1 Anti-theft alarm system for vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods
Activating or deactivating the anti-theft alarm system from outside the vehicle
2
The functional differences in the anti-theft alarm system are listed as follows:
To lock the vehicle centrally and to activate or deactivate the anti-theft alarm system:
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated and the voltage supply is interrupted via the emergency-off switch, an alarm sounds.
the radio remote control or
3
4 If the voltage supply has been inter5 6 7
rupted via the emergency-off switch, the anti-theft alarm system cannot be activated as the anti-theft alarm system will then sound an alarm. Lock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door to prevent an alarm. Do not hold the key in the locked position for longer than one second. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed.
8 9
112
the key (in driver's door only) should be used.
i The key in the ignition lock must be in the 0 position or removed.
Activating using the key When locking the vehicle, hold key in the locked position for approximately two seconds. Vehicles with enhanced central locking system: opened side windows and sliding/tilting sunroof close automatically. The vehicle locks and at the same time the anti-theft alarm system is activated. Deactivating using the key Unlock the vehicle by turning the key to the unlock position ( page 103). The vehicle is unlocked. The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
Controls in detail Opening and closing Deactivating using the radio remote control Press the Πbutton once. All turn signals and the indicator lamp in the anti-theft alarm system switch flash once1. The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
i If none of the doors are opened within 25 seconds, the vehicle locks itself again automatically the anti-theft alarm system that was previously deactivated is activated once again
Activating using the radio remote control
1
Press the ‹ button once. Vehicles with enhanced central locking system: Opened side windows close automatically. The driver's and co-driver's door lock. The turn signals flash three times1. The indicator lamp in the anti-theft alarm system switch flashes if all monitored components are in the ready position.
2 3 4 5 6
The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
7 8 9 1. Great Britain: and the horn sounds briefly.
113
Controls in detail Opening and closing
1 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp 2
The indicator lamp in anti-theft alarm system switch 1 indicates to the driver the status of the anti-theft alarm system in its various stages of operation.
3 4 5 6 1 Anti-theft alarm system switch
7 If the anti-theft alarm system is activated: The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes.
8 9
114
If the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated: The indicator lamp in switch 1 is off.
Deactivating from inside the vehicle Press the upper section of switch 1 once.
Activating or deactivating the anti-theft alarm system from inside the vehicle
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
If the anti-theft alarm system is switched on from inside the vehicle, it can only be switched off in this way.
The indicator lamp in switch 1 goes out.
i
Activating from inside the vehicle
Vehicles with immobiliser:
Press the upper section of switch 1 once.
If you activated the anti-theft alarm system from inside the vehicle, you can deactivate it by starting the engine.
The anti-theft alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes. Both doors lock at the same time.
The prerequisite is that the immobiliser can recognise the key.
Controls in detail Opening and closing The multi-function display indicates
Anti-theft alarm
a malfunction
If an alarm is activated, all turn signals and the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the alarm sounds.
an alarm source that is not in the ready position (closed or attached) when the anti-theft alarm system is activated from inside the vehicle ( page 111). The event message indicates the alarm sources to be checked and, if necessary, an instruction on what to do. Anti-theft alarm system event message (example)
1 Alarm source 2 Instructions
1 2
After a predetermined period of approximately five minutes, the alarm switches off.
3
The acoustic alarm switches off after approximately 30 seconds.
4
After the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated, the multi-function display shows an alarm message when the ignition key is turned to position 1 in the steering lock.
5 6 7 8 9
115
Controls in detail Opening and closing
1 The multi-function display shows the
i
Panic alarm
2 The message must be acknowledged by
If more than one alarm was set off, the multi-function display shows the first alarm.
You can activate the panic alarm at any time by pressing the anti-theft alarm system switch.
source of the alarm or the reason it was activated. the driver.
3 Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.
4
Cancelling the alarm If an alarm is activated, it is possible to cancel it by:
If the alarm is activated, all turn signals and the dipped-beam headlamps flash and the alarm horn sounds1.
Unlocking the vehicle using the radio remote control
5
Pressing the Πbutton once.
6
Unlocking the vehicle using the key in the driver's door
7
Turn the key in driver's door to the "unlock" position and hold for two seconds ( page 103) Alarm message (example)
8 1 Source or reason why alarm was activated
9
If the alarm system has been activated from inside the vehicle:
1 Anti-theft alarm system switch
Press the upper section of the antitheft alarm system switch in the switch panel once ( page 114) 1. Great Britain: If the alarm is activated, only the alarm horn sounds.
116
Controls in detail Opening and closing Activating Press the lower section of anti-theft alarm system switch 1 once. The panic alarm is activated. Both doors lock. On vehicles with enhanced central locking system: Both side windows close.
i The closing function is interrupted if an object prevents a side window from closing fully.
Risk of injury
G
Take care when closing the power windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof that nobody becomes trapped in them. Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short time. Children or unauthorised persons could otherwise start the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a locked door from the inside and endanger themselves and others.
To release
1
Press the lower section of anti-theft alarm system switch 1 once. The panic alarm switches off. The doors remain locked. The anti-theft alarm system maintains its previous status.
2 3 4
i The panic alarm switches off automatically after a maximum of 30 seconds. The optical alarm terminates after a maximum of five minutes. During this period, the doors remain locked and the anti-theft alarm system maintains its previous status.
5 6 7 8 9
117
Controls in detail Seats and berths Seats and berths
1
Seats
2
The vehicle may be equipped with different types of seats depending on the equipment level.
3
Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
4
Risk of accident and injury
G
6
Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary and with the parking brake applied. The movement of the seat could otherwise lead to you losing control over the vehicle and causing an accident.
7
Adjusting the seat while driving would also divert your attention away from the road and traffic conditions.
5
8 9
Ensure, when adjusting the seat, that you select a relaxed position that does not promote body fatigue. The seat catches must audibly engage.
118
Make sure that none of the occupants or you yourself become caught in the seat when it is being adjusted.
i Adjust backrest into vertical position, if possible.
Ensure that all occupants have secured their seat belts before commencing any journey ( page 46).
Set the distance to the pedals so that you can comfortably depress them fully.
Before exiting the vehicle, lower the suspension seat fully, otherwise the seat could rise and trap your legs between the steering wheel and the seat.
With both hands on the steering wheel, the arms should be slightly bent.
! Vehicles with upper berth: To avoid damage to the berth and seats. Fold up the berth before adjusting the seat ( page 121). Move the backrest forwards before folding down the berth.
Adjust height adjustable head restraints so that the back of the head is supported approximately at eye level. Do not operate several control elements for seat adjustment at the same time. To prevent noises while driving, the codriver's seat should be fully lowered if it is not being used.
Controls in detail Seats and berths Seat adjustment, driver's suspension seat Further information can be found in the "Getting started" section ( page 41). Seat adjustment, co-driver's function seat (example)
Adjusting the backrest
Folding up the seat cushion
Sit down on the seat and pull the adjustment lever 1 upwards.
Push seat cushion 2 towards the backrest until the seat cushion audibly engages (click).
The backrest moves forwards. Apply or release pressure to/from backrest to adjust backrest to desired position. Release adjustment lever.
1
Folding down the seat cushion Push seat cushion 2 towards the backrest again until the seat cushion audibly disengages.
2 3 4
Fold down seat cushion 2.
5 6 7 8 1 Backrest adjustment lever 2 Seat cushion
9
119
Controls in detail Seats and berths
1 Centre seat head restraint 2 3 4 5
Risk of injury
Removing the head restraint Pull the head restraint up to the stop.
G
Simultaneously press in and hold the retainers 1.
Only drive the vehicle with head restraints fitted so that occupants are protected against critical injuries should an accident occur. Adjust the head restraints so that they support the back of the head at approximately eye level. This reduces the risk of injury to the head and neck area in case of an accident or similar situation.
Pull the head restraint sharply up and out. Installing head restraints Head restraint
1 Safety retainers
Insert head restraint in guides. Push head restraint down to the stop. The head restraint locks in place automatically. Adjust to the desired position.
6 7 8 9
120
Controls in detail Seats and berths Folding the berth up
Upper berth Risk of injury
G
Folding the berth down (sleeping position)
1
i
2
To prevent damage to the berth and seats, ensure that there is enough space for the upper berth before it is folded down. Move the backrests of the driver's and co-driver's seats forward.
Only use the berth when the vehicle is stationary. It is forbidden for anyone to be in or on the upper berth while the vehicle is in motion.
3 4
Do not drive the vehicle unless the berth has been folded up and is secured by the belts. When folding the berth in/out, take care to ensure that your fingers do not get trapped between the parts of the berth.
i Before adjusting the seats, fold the upper berth up. When doing this, avoid damage to the berth and the backrest.
1 Belt buckles
5
Fold berth up and hold in place, Push the securing belt tongues 1 into the belt buckles until they audibly engage,
6
If necessary, adjust the seats back into position.
7 2 Belt buckle release button
8
9
121
Controls in detail Seats and berths
1 Lift berth up slightly, hold in place and
press the red release button of the belt latches 2,
2 Release securing belt, Fold the berth down.
Folding out the access step
Lower berth
Press against access step and then release.
Risk of injury
The access step folds out and engages audibly.
3 Upper berth access step
Folding in the access step
The access step is there to assist you in ac-
Push release lever 1 downwards. Push access step down onto stop.
in the instrument panel.
Take hand away from release lever 1.
4 cessing the upper berth and is integrated 5 6 7 8 1 Release lever
9
122
G
A person on the lower berth should be secured in place with the restraint system when the vehicle is in motion. When folding the berth in/out, take care to ensure that your fingers do not get trapped between the parts of the berth.
Controls in detail Seats and berths Use when the vehicle is in motion
1
Hook restraint system 2 in eye 1 on cab roof.
2
i The covers for the stowage compartments can be found beneath the mattress ( page 348).
3 4
Recliner
Lower berth restraint system
The recliner seat in the single cab is not designed to be used permanently as a codriver's seat. However, for exceptional cases, it can be used as a seat for passengers.
5 Recliner
6
7 8 9
123
Controls in detail Seats and berths
1 2 3 4 5
Risk of injury
Fold backrest of co-driver's seat down towards the seat cushion,
Make sure, before commencing any journey, that the person occupying the recliner seat has his/her seat belt applied ( page 46).
Position swivel bar 1 vertically and engage downwards, Fold up 1/3 part of mattress onto backrest.
When converting the recliner into a berth, make sure that no one can become caught in the seat.
Conversion to recliner
When the seat is being used as a berth, the person occupying it must be secured by:
Lower berth with two-part mattress
the seat belt ( page 122)
1 Swivel bar
the locked backrest securing bar
6
Conversion to berth
G
when the vehicle is in motion.
Fold 1/3 part of mattress onto 2/3 part, Pull swivel bar 1 upwards vertically, release and fold up towards the backrest, Set up backrest towards cab backwall.
7 8 9
124
Controls in detail Starting and stopping the engine Starting and stopping the engine Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents the engine from being started by unauthorised persons. You can only start the engine using the keys supplied with the vehicle. The vehicle is equipped with a special key system.
Deactivating the immobiliser Turn the key in ignition lock to position 2. Hold in position 2 for approximately 0.5 seconds. If the immobiliser recognises the coded key, the immobiliser switches off. The engine can be started.
i Activating the immobiliser Remove the key from the ignition lock. The immobiliser electronics are activated.
If you do not hold the key in position for the specified duration or an incorrect key is used, the multi-function display shows CODE. If five unsuccessful attempts are made with an incorrect key, the waiting period is extended by one minute every time the key is used in an attempt to start the engine.
For the waiting period, the key must be in position 2 in the steering lock.
i After four unsuccessful attempts, it may be necessary to use the spare key. Slowly turn the key. Wait briefly (approximately 0.5 seconds) in between positions 2 and 3 in the steering lock. If a key is lost, obtaining a replacement is a time-consuming process which only a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can perform for you. For this reason, DaimlerChrysler recommends that you always keep an easily accessible spare key with you for emergencies.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
125
Controls in detail Starting and stopping the engine
1 2 3 4 5
ADR emergency-off switch Vehicles used for the transportation of hazardous goods: Vehicles used for the transportation of hazardous goods are equipped with two emergency-off switches. The switches are intended to allow isolation of the power supply and to prevent spark generating short circuits that could set off a fire or explosion. The following components are supplied with electricity even if the isolation switch has been pressed:
6 Tachograph Anti-theft alarm system
7 8 9
126
i If the voltage supply is interrupted by actuation of the emergency-off switch if the anti-theft alarm system is active, the anti-theft alarm system sounds an alarm. Ensure the anti-theft alarm system is deactivated before interrupting the power supply using the emergencyoff switch.
Risk of accident
G
The switch interrupts the power supply to all main electrical consumers. The engine switches off automatically. The following have no function: Power steering Vehicle lighting Anti-lock protection Electronic gear selection The vehicle can no longer be kept under control. Only operate the emergency-off switch if there is imminent danger and the vehicle is stationary. It must never be operated while the vehicle is in motion.
Controls in detail Starting and stopping the engine Emergency-off switch in cockpit
Activating
Deactivating
The switch is located in the cockpit on the left or right-hand side next to the heater control panel.
Fold cover upwards.
Push down cover until it audibly engages.
Remove switch pin 1. All electrical consumers apart from the tachograph and the anti-theft alarm system are isolated from the power supply system.
1
The voltage supply for all electrical consumers is reinstated.
2 3 4 5 6
1 Emergency-off switch (example)
7 8 9
127
Controls in detail Starting and stopping the engine
1 Emergency-off switch on outside of 2
Activating
Deactivating
vehicle
Open cover,
The switch is on the co-driver's side behind the cab.
Push lever 1 upwards.
Push down cover until it audibly engages.
All electrical consumers apart from the tachograph and the anti-theft alarm system are isolated from the power supply system.
3 4 5 6 1 Emergency-off switch 7 8 9
128
The voltage supply for all electrical consumers is reinstated.
Controls in detail Starting and stopping the engine
Flame-start system At low ambient temperatures, the flamestart system makes it possible to quickly and easily start the engine. Environmental note
H
The advantages of the flame-start system are:
The electronics system activates the flame-start system at a temperature below –4 °C as soon as the ignition lock is in position 2. The q indicator lamp in the instrument panel shows that the flamestart system is being primed. When the engine has been started, the system remains active until the coolant temperature is at 0 °C.
Optimal combustion which leads to
i
A considerable reduction in harmful exhaust emissions while the engine is warming up
At coolant temperatures above –4 °C, the q indicator lamp lights up to show the function check of the flamestart system.
Avoidance of poor cold running properties
!
1
The electronic system switches the flame-start system off initially if you start the engine while the q indicator lamp is on. Do not start the engine until the indicator lamp has gone out. if you do not start the engine within 30 seconds after the q indicator lamp has gone out. Activate the flame-start system again before starting the engine.
2 3 4 5 6
Less load on battery and starter
7 8 9
129
Controls in detail Brakes Brakes
1 2 3 4 5
Parking brake The parking brake is designed to prevent a parked vehicle from rolling away. It actuates the spring-loaded cylinders.
i Trailer/semitrailer parking brake, see manufacturer's operating instructions. Trailer/semitrailer with EU brake system: If the trailer is attached, the parking brake also has an effect on the service brakes of the trailer/semitrailer.
6 Applying ( page 62) or releasing ( page 52) parking brake.
7 8 9
130
Hillholder
Activating hillholder
The hillholder is an extension of the Telligent® brake system and offers pulling away assistance. When pulling away on hills, the hillholder prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards When reversing up gradients, the hillholder prevents the vehicle from rolling forwards 1 Hillholder switch Press the upper section of hillholder switch 1. The hillholder is primed but not active. Bring the vehicle to a halt using the brakes. The hillholder is active automatically. The k hillholder indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
Controls in detail Brakes
i As long as you maintain even the slightest of pressure on the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal, the hillholder remains active. Deactivating hillholder When you drive off in your vehicle, the hillholder is deactivated automatically. The k hillholder indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out.
Risk of accident
G
If none of the pedals are pressed when the hillholder is active (accelerator, clutch or brake pedal), a warning buzzer sounds briefly. The hillholder is deactivated and the k hillholder indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out. The vehicle could roll away unintentionally.
Switching off hillholder
1
Press the lower section of hillholder switch 1. The k hillholder indicator lamp goes out and the function of the hillholder is deactivated.
2 3
i The hillholder remains primed as long as upper section of switch 1 is latched. When you apply the parking brake, the k hillholder indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes out. The hillholder function is no longer active but remains in the primed state.
4 5 6 7 8 9
131
Controls in detail Lighting Lighting
1 Information about switching on lights and turn signals ( page 59).
2
Light switch
i
i
There may be a slight deviation in the function of the light switches described here due to legal requirements in all countries concerned.
In countries where traffic drives on the side of the road opposite to that which is normal in the country where the vehicle was registered, there is a danger of oncoming vehicles becoming dazzled due to the symmetry of the dippedbeam headlamps.
3 M
Lights off
C
Side lamps, switch illumination
B
Dipped or main-beam headlamps on
5
¥
Front foglamp indicator lamp (green)
6
¨
Rear foglamp indicator lamp (yellow)
4
7 8 9
132
For journeys in these countries, mask the headlamps ( page 517).
Controls in detail Lighting
Headlamp range control Depending on the laden state of the vehicle, the focus of the dipped-beam headlamps can rise or fall. Always adjust the headlamp range control in such a way that oncoming vehicles are not dazzled.
Reducing headlamp range
1
Switching on the front foglamps
Turn thumbwheel from position 0 downwards until the dipped-beam headlamps no longer dazzle oncoming vehicles.
2
Setting headlamp range to neutral
3
Turn thumbwheel to position 0.
4 5
With dipped-beam headlamps on: Pull light switch out onto first stop. The ¥ green indicator lamp in the light switch lights up.
6 7 8 9
133
Controls in detail Lighting
1 Switching on rear foglamps 2 3
Combination switch
With dipped-beam headlamps and front foglamps on:
The combination switch is located to the left of the steering column.
Pull light switch out onto second stop.
Indicating change of direction ( see page 60).
The ¨ yellow indicator lamp in the indicator lamp lights up.
Switching on main-beam headlamps Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Turn the light switch to position B. The dipped-beam headlamps are on. Push the combination switch in direction 1 onto detent. The A main-beam headlamp indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up.
4 5
Headlamp flasher Pull the light switch in direction 2.
6 1 Main-beam headlamps 2 Headlamp flasher
7 8 9
134
Controls in detail Lighting
Light switch unit The light switch unit is equipped for various lighting functions. The light switch unit is located on the left next to the multi-function steering wheel.
Work-area lamp
Load compartment light
Switching on
Switching on
Press the upper section of switch 1 1.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
2
Press the upper section of switch 2 F.
3
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. Switching off Press the upper section of switch 1 1. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. 1 Work-area lamp 2 Load compartment light 3 Rotating beacon lamp 4 Headlamp cleaning system
i
1
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
4
Switching off Press the upper section of switch 2 F.
5
The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.
6
The work-area lamp switches off automatically if the vehicle accelerates.
7 8 9
135
Controls in detail Lighting Rotating beacon lamp
1
Switching on
2
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
3
Press the upper section of switch 3 D. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
4 5
1 Work-area lamp 2 Load compartment light 3 Rotating beacon lamp 4 Headlamp cleaning system
Switching off Press the upper section of switch 3 D. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.
6 7 8 9
136
Headlamp cleaning system Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Press the upper section of switch 4 Y. The headlamp cleaning system sprays washer fluid onto both headlamps for approximately 0.3 seconds.
Controls in detail Lighting
Hazard warning lamps The hazard warning lamps will still operate if the steering lock is in position 0.
Switching on hazard warning lamps
Switching off hazard warning lamps
Press switch 1.
Press switch 1 again.
The indicator lamp in the hazard warning lamp switch, the turn signal indicator lamps in the instrument panel and all turn signals on the vehicle flash.
The indicator lamp in the hazard warning lamp switch, the turn signal indicator lamps in the instrument panel and all turn signals on the vehicle go out.
1 2 3 4 5
1 Hazard warning lamp switch
6 7 8 9
137
Controls in detail Lighting
1 2 3 4
Interior lighting
Interior lighting switches
In the vehicle interior there are four different types of lighting: Interior lighting Reading lamp Nightlight (green) Ambient lighting (blue) The different modes of lighting can be switched on and regulated individually.
5 6
i If the voltage supply drops below 22 V, the electronics system switches the interior lighting off.
7 8 9
138
Co-driver's door control panel Switch unit above windscreen
1 Ambient lighting 2 Driver's reading lamp 3 Interior lighting 4 No interior lighting when door open 5 Nightlight
3 Interior lighting 6 Co-driver's reading lamp
Controls in detail Lighting Switching on interior lighting Briefly touch switch 3 U.
i From a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), the electronics system dims the cab lighting.
Berth switch unit
3 Interior lighting 7 Central interior lighting off switch
When you open a door, the interior and entry lights light up. The lighting goes out after approximately 30 minutes, even if one of the doors is still open.
Switching lighting on when vehicle is in motion Briefly touch switch 3 U. The electronics system switches the interior lighting on with reduced brightness.
1 2 3
i The level of brightness can be adjusted while the vehicle is motion.
4 5
Dimming interior lighting Hold down switch 3 U. The brightness is reduced. Dimming continues for as long as the switch is held down. Once dimming is reduced to the minimum level, the function is reversed. Brightness increases.
6 7 8 9
139
Controls in detail Lighting
1 Switching off interior lighting Briefly touch switch 3 U.
Activating "no interior lighting when door open" function
The interior lighting goes out.
2 or
3 4 5
Press and hold switch 4 L in the switch unit above the windscreen until a brief signal sounds.
i
6
Driver's and co-driver's reading lamp If the interior and entry lights are to remain off when the doors are opened: Press and hold switch 4 L in the switch unit above the windscreen until a brief signal sounds.
7 8 9
140
If you switch the interior lights on before opening the door, they remain on. Deactivating "no interior lighting when door open" function
Press switch 7 I in berth switch unit.
When you start the engine, the interior lighting switches on by the door opening, is switched off by the electronics system.
i
The switch for the driver's reading lamp 2 S is located in the switch unit above the windscreen. The switch for the co-driver's reading lamp 6 S is located in the control panel of the co-driver's door.
Controls in detail Lighting Switching on reading lamp
Switching off reading lamp
Switching off nightlight
Briefly touch switch 2 S or 6 S.
Briefly touch switch 2 S or 6 S.
Press switch 5 Q in the switch unit above the windscreen.
The respective reading lamp lights up.
The respective reading lamp goes out.
1
The nightlight goes out.
2
Dimming reading lamp
Nightlight (green)
3
Press and hold switch 2 S or 6 S.
The nightlight or green light is dazzle-free and intended to aid orientation while the vehicle is in motion.
4
The brightness is reduced. Dimming continues for as long as the switch is held down. Once dimming is reduced to the minimum level, the function is reversed. Brightness increases.
Switching on the nightlight
5
Press switch 5 Q in the switch unit above the windscreen.
6
The nightlight lights up.
7 8 9
141
Controls in detail Lighting
1 Ambient lighting (blue) 2
The ambient lighting is intended for the vehicle when it is parked.
Switching off ambient lighting
Press and hold switch 1 O in the switch unit above the windscreen.
Briefly touch switch 1 O in the switch unit above the windscreen.
The brightness is reduced. Dimming continues for as long as the switch is held down. Once dimming is reduced to the minimum level, the function is reversed. Brightness increases.
3 4 5 6 Switching on ambient lighting 7
Dimming ambient lighting
Briefly touch switch 1 O in the switch unit above the windscreen.
8 9
142
The ambient lighting goes out.
Controls in detail Lighting
Instrument lighting
Brighter
The instrument lighting consists of the instrument panel lighting and switch illumination.
Press and hold the æ button until required degree of brightness has been achieved.
Dimming instrument lighting
Darker
The degree of instrument lighting brightness can be adjusted using the æ and ç buttons in the instrument panel.
Press and hold the ç button until required degree of brightness has been achieved.
1
Adjustable reading lamp
2 3 4 5
Reading lamp
Switching on
6
Turn switch cover to position 1. Switching off
7
Turn switch cover to position 2.
8 9
143
Controls in detail Instrument panel Instrument panel
1 2
Total distance recorder
Rev counter
Depending on the country, the speed and distance travelled are recorded in miles or kilometres.
The rev counter shows the engine speed. The scale is split into three areas.
3 Resetting the trip meter 4
Press and hold button the Í button in the instrument panel until the trip meter is reset to zero.
5 6
1 Trip meter 2 Total distance recorder
7 8 9
144
Controls in detail Instrument panel
1 Green 2 Yellow
Economical operating range Engine brake operating range
Economical operating range
The econometer is active
Operation of the vehicle in the economical range has the following effects
at speeds above 12 mph ( 20 km/h)
low fuel consumption
3 Red
Overrevving range
low wear and tear
4 Green diode strip
Econometer
In some exceptional circumstances, operation outside the economical range may be necessary, for example:
1
if the relation between the engine speed and the selected gear does not appear to be correct at an almost constant speed
2 3
The econometer does not light up if the engine speed is at an economical level in terms of fuel consumption
4
i
on gradients
On vehicles that are used predominantly for long distance driving, the rev counter features an econometer.
when overtaking
if the speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h)
5
Econometer
!
Several segments of the econometer light up depending on the how much the engine is placed under load. This range indicates the most economical rev range in terms of fuel consumption.
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: In the automatic mode of operation
6
Avoid overrevving range. This could lead to engine damage.
7 8 9
145
Controls in detail Instrument panel
1 The econometer goes out 2
Driving with the econometer
two seconds after the engine has reached the displayed speed range if high output is requested from the engine
3 if the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than five seconds
4 if neutral is selected at the transmission for longer than five seconds.
5 6 7 8 9
146
If the engine speed is higher than the economical speed range indicated:
If the engine speed is lower than the economical speed range indicated:
select a higher gear.
select a lower gear.
Controls in detail Instrument panel
Outside temperature display
G
1
Even if the outside temperature display shows temperatures that are just above freezing point, the roads could still be icy. This applies in particular to shaded areas or bridges.
2
Risk of accident
The display in the rev counter can show the outside temperature in two temperature scales. Degrees Celsius (°C) Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) Changing the unit of measurement for temperature ( page 205).
Extreme temperature changes are not shown in the outside temperature display immediately. This prevents an incorrect reading as a result of the engine heat when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly.
1 Outside temperature display
3 4 5 6
i Extreme temperature changes are not shown in the outside temperature display immediately. This prevents an incorrect reading as a result of the engine heat when the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly.
7 8 9
147
Controls in detail Instrument panel
1 2
Time
Fuel gauge The fuel gauge shows the quantity of fuel in all fuel tanks of the vehicle.
The display in the rev counter can show the time in two different ways depending on requirement.
If the fuel volume drops to 14% of the maximum level, an event message is shown in the multi-function display indicating this.
12 hour mode
3 24 hour mode Changing clock mode ( page 206).
4 5 6
1 12 hour clock mode
7 8 9
148
Controls in detail Instrument panel
i The volume of fuel in litres and the distance that can be travelled with that amount of fuel can be called up in the driver information system in the trip computer menu ( page 166).
1
Reservoir pressure for brake circuits 1 and 2 The instrument shows the pressure in the brake circuit with the least amount of pressure. The brake circuit in question is shown by an active indicator lamp. If the reservoir pressure in one of the brake circuits drops below 6.8 bar, an event message is shown in the multi-function display indicating this.
2 3 4 1 Brake circuit indicator lamp 1 2 Brake circuit indicator lamp 2
5
The reservoir pressure of both brake circuits can be called up in the monitoring info menu ( page 162).
6 7 8 9
149
Controls in detail Driver information system Driver information system
1 The driver information system is activated when the key in the ignition lock is in position 2.
Maintenance
2 The driver information system features the following functions:
5 6 7
Page Information about vehicle operation Digital speedometer
160
Monitoring info
161
Trip computer
166
Control functions Navigation system Operating audio equipment
359
Mobile telephone
350
Reading Fleetboard text message
169
Auxiliary heating
177
Wakeup call
178
®
8 9
Viewing/confirming service due dates
171
Settings
3 4
Page
150
Display configuration
183
Activating menu
183
Monitoring load
189
Clock
197
Service products
198
Changing units of measurement
205
Page Changing language
182
Transmission control back up mode
189
Diagnostics
207
Display of malfunctions – Event message
175
Controls in detail Driver information system
Risk of accident
G
Use the driver information system only if the traffic situation permits it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle is covering a distance of some 50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The driver information system shows all information in the multi-function display. If necessary, this information may be accompanied by acoustic signals.
Structure
i
1
The driver information system features various menus.
The number of menus depends on
There are several functions combined in each of the menus under the main category. In the Audio menu, for example, there are functions for operating the radio or the CD player. In the Monitoring info menu, all the main information dealing with operation can be called up. In the Settings menu, all functions are found for making adjustments to the display and for the vehicle.
whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion
the equipment level of the vehicle
which additional menus in the Settings menu, sub-menu Configuration have been activated
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
151
Controls in detail Driver information system
1
Driver information system menus
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
152
Controls in detail Driver information system
Menu
Page
Menu
1 Actros info
160
2 Monitoring info
161
Configuration
184
3 Trip computer
166
Load
189
Time
197
4 Navigation
1
Page
d Settings
183
5 Audio
169
Service products
198
6 Telephone
169
Units
205
7 New SMS message (Fleetboard®)
169
8 Maintenance
171
MB item number
209
9 Event info
175
Events
210
a Auxiliary heating
177
Binary values
213
b Alarm
178
Measured values1
213
c Language
182
e Transmission control
207
f Diagnostics
207
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 For service personnel only
8 9
153
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
i
User guidance
If the multi-function display shows the symbol ? 6, you can make a selection or adjustment using the + and - buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. However, volume control using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel is then no longer possible.
The user guidance at the top of the multifunction display shows where you are in the driver information system and which steering wheel buttons should be used for navigation. The name of the menu 3 is shown in the centre of the multi-function display The number 13 2 to the left of the menu name shows that the Settings menu is the 13th in the driver information system The number 1 5 to the right of the menu name shows that the list is the first display/function in the Settings menu
8 9
154
1 Symbol for steering wheel è and ÿ buttons 2 Menu number 3 Menu name 4 Symbol for steering wheel j and k buttons 5 Display/function number 6 Symbol for steering wheel æ and ç buttons
The quantity and numbering of the menus can differ depending on the vehicle equipment level.
Controls in detail Driver information system System navigation
Menu navigation
The structure of the driver information system is circular.
The structure within the menus is usually circular as well.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel. The display shows the next menu. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly. Each time the button is pressed, the display shows the next menu until it returns to the start of the loop.
i In the Settings, Language and Diagnostics menus, a menu list is displayed instead of the functions. You can navigate in the menu list using the + and - steering wheel buttons. The multi-function display shows the ? symbol next to the menu list.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system shows the next function or item of information. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly. Each time the button is pressed, the multi-function display shows the next function until it returns to the start of the loop.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
155
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 2 3
Multi-function display The multi-function display is split up into set areas. The gear indicator is always displayed. All other displays show the function of a vehicle system or information that is shown automatically by the driver information system.
4
Function
Page
1 User guidance
154
2 Digital speed display
160
3 Level control display
186
1
4 Gear indicator
219
5 Reminder with system symbol
160
1 Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift and Telligent® automatic gearshift
5 6 7 8 9
156
Function 6 Differential lock display
Page 185
Starting-off aid switched on display (6x2 vehicles)
296
Starting-off aid switched on display (6x2/4 vehicles)
297
Hendrickson leading axle raised display
297
Trailing axle raised display (vehicles with pneumatic suspension)
298
Nummek axle raised display (vehicles with pneumatic suspension)
299
7 Cruise control/Limiter/ ART display
267
Controls in detail Driver information system
Event message If there are malfunctions on the vehicle, the driver information system informs the driver with an event message. The background colour of the message indicates the degree of importance in terms of operational and road safety of the vehicle. The driver must acknowledge this message ( page 159). If more than one message is displayed, the driver information system shows the messages in succession. If the malfunctions are serious, a warning buzzer and a STOP lamp may accompany the event message.
Risk of accident
G
If the STOP lamp lights up, the operational and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised
Event message with red status display Risk of accident
1
G
2
Stop the engine
The operational and road safety of the vehicle is at risk if there is a message with red status display.
3
When bringing the vehicle to a halt, take the traffic situation into consideration.
The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change
4
Rectify faults before starting a journey.
If it is possible to continue driving, adjust driving style respectively
Bring the vehicle to a halt in all cases
5 Red
Adjust driving style as appropriate or bring vehicle to a halt.
6
Carry out action in accordance with the event message. Rectify fault immediately. Have affected system checked.
7
8 9
157
Controls in detail Driver information system
1
Red
2
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
3 4 5
Continuing the journey
6
may lead in some circumstances to vehicle damage
7
may mean in some circumstances that legal requirements are not being adhered to
8 9
158
Event message with yellow status display Yellow
Adjust driving style. Carry out action in accordance with the event message. Have the fault rectified as soon as possible. Maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! The operational and road safety of the vehicle is impaired. The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change Adjust driving style
Controls in detail Driver information system Event message with action to be carried out
Event message with symbol
Event message for acknowledgement Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel. or Press the º button in the instrument panel.
1 Red status display 2 System abbreviation/Symbol ( page 208) 3 Fault location L Tractor vehicle A Trailer/Semitrailer 4 Functional restriction 5 Instructions 6 Reminder ( page 160)
2 Coolant temperature symbol 7 Yellow status display 8 Reminder
1 2 3
The message is cleared. The system abbreviation is shown in the reminder section.
4
i
5
If the fault is not rectified the next time the engine is started, the driver information system repeats the event message.
6 7 8 9
159
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Reminder 2 3 4
i
In order that the acknowledged event message is not forgotten, the driver information system shows the relevant symbol or system abbreviation in the reminder section. If there are several messages that must be displayed due to legal requirements, the reminder function shows these one after the other in the reminder section.
Actros Info menu
Faults that must be displayed due to legal requirements have a red or yellow background.
In the Actros Info menu you can choose between three different displays:
The messages stored in the reminder section can be viewed in the Event-Info menu ( page 175).
Digital speed display
Neutral Date
Symbols:
5
7
Collective symbol for malfunctions
6
BS
There are faults that must be displayed due to legal requirements. Example: ABS.
7 Digital speed display
8 9
160
Controls in detail Driver information system
i
Changing Actros Info menu display
After the functional check, the multifunction display always shows the menu that was last selected.
Call up the Actros Info menu.
Calling up the Actros Info menu
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display shows the desired display.
1
Monitoring info menu In the Monitoring info menu you can call up information which is important for the operation of the vehicle. Page
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
Coolant temperature
162
Reservoir pressure
162
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Engine oil level
163
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel continually until the Actros Info menu is shown in the multi-function display.
Axle load indicator
163
Load info
165
Trailer ID
165
Converter and clutch unit temperature
166
2 3 4 5 6 7
i Further information can be called up by selecting the Monitoring info sub-menu from the Diagnostics menu.
8 9
161
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Calling up the Monitoring info menu
Calling up the coolant temperature
Calling up the reservoir pressure
5
Call up the Monitoring info menu.
6
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display shows Coolant temperature.
1 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 1 2 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 2
2 3 4
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display shows Monitoring info.
7 8 9
162
Call up the Monitoring info menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display shows Brake pressure.
Controls in detail Driver information system Calling up the engine oil level
Topping up engine oil ( page 418).
1
i Do not top up engine oil unless prompted to do so.
2
Calling up the axle load indicator
3
Vehicles with axle load measurement device:
Engine oil level display, oil level 3.5 l
Call up the Monitoring info menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display shows Oil level.
The axle load measuring device determines the axle load from the pressure in the air springs when the vehicle chassis is in the driving position.
4 Axle load indicator
Set chassis to driving position ( page 294).
5
Switch off starting-off aid ( page 296).
6
Call up the Monitoring info menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel continually until the multi-function display shows Axle load Overall.
7 8 9
163
Controls in detail Driver information system
1
i
2
The axle load measuring device is not calibrated nor is it a system capable of calibration. The measured data only provides an approximate guide which is not suitable for official use.
3 4 5 6
If the chassis is not in the driving position when the axle load indicator is selected, the arrows in the level control display flash ‘ . The multi-function display does not show the axle loads. If there is a notable difference between the axle load indicator and the weighbridge results, the axle load indicator can be adjusted.
Setting the axle load indicator
Indicator lamps 1 and 2 should not light up. Press "M1" 5 for the 1st axle "M2" 6 for the 2nd axle "Driving position" 7 for the 3rd axle Drive vehicle onto single axle weighbridge. Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Call up the axle load indicator.
8 9
164
and hold.
Level control operating unit
Set chassis to driving position ( page 294).
7
Press button 3 or 4 to switch off level control operating unit.
To increase the displayed value, press and hold the "Raise" button 8 until the displayed value equals the value indicated by the weighbridge. or To decrease the displayed value, press and hold the "Lower" button 9 until the displayed value equals the value indicated by the weighbridge
Controls in detail Driver information system Calling up the load info
i
Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in accordance with ISO 11992 and associated sensor technology:
The trailer ID is the chassis number of the trailer.
1
The multi-function display can show the following information depending on the equipment level of the trailer or semitrailer:
3 4
Load temperature Load pressure Fluid load volume Trailer ID Trailer/semitrailer monitoring ( page 378).
2
Load temperature
Call up the Monitoring info menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Load. Calling up the trailer ID Trailer or semitrailer with telematics in accordance with ISO 11992:
5 6
Trailer ID
Call up the Monitoring info menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Trailer ID.
7 8 9
165
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Calling up the converter and clutch unit temperature
2
Vehicles with converter and clutch unit:
Trip data
Trip computer menu In the trip computer menu you can call up the following information Page
3 4
7 8
Converter temperature display
Call up the Monitoring info menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows WSK temperature.
9
166
duration of journey in hours
166
average speed in kilometres per hour
Fuel level and range
168
average fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
6
distance travelled in kilometres
Trip data
Calling up the trip computer
5
The trip data comprises:
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Trip computer.
Controls in detail Driver information system The trip data can be viewed
Calling up the trip data
i
After reset – from the point at which the data was last reset ( page 167)
Call up the trip computer.
A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can alter the reset time.
After start – if the key has been removed from the ignition lock for longer than four hours
The trip data After reset is shown in the multi-function display. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows the trip data After start. Resetting trip data After start, automatically The driver information system resets the trip data After start if
Trip data after start
1 2
After start, manually Call up the trip computer.
3
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Trip computer, After start.
4
Press the l button in the instrument panel and hold until the trip data is reset After start.
the ignition lock is in position 0 for longer than four hours or
5 6 7
the key has been removed from the ignition lock for longer than four hours
8 9
167
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 After reset, manually
Calling up the fuel level and range
Call up the trip computer.
2 3
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the next menu.
The multi-function display shows the trip data After reset. Press the l button in the instrument panel and hold until the trip data After reset is reset.
4 Fuel level and range This function shows the following informa-
5 tion in the multi-function display: current tank contents in litres
Fuel level and range
Call up the trip computer.
6 estimated range in kilometres with cur- Press the j button on the multirent fuel level
7 8 9
168
Quitting trip computer
function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Tank contents and Range.
Controls in detail Driver information system
Audio menu Using the functions in the audio menu, you can operate the basic functions of the audio equipment ( page 359).
Telephone menu
1
New SMS menu ®
Vehicles with hands-free system:
Vehicles with FleetBoard :
Using the functions in the telephone menu, you can operate the basic functions of a mobile telephone connected to a handsfree system ( page 350).
The driver information system indicates in the reminder section of the multi-function display when a text message has been received by FleetBoard®. If you wish to read the text message, call it up in the new SMS menu.
Risk of accident
G
2 3 4
Operating mobile telephones that have an aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems.
5
As a result, the operating reliability and road safety is at considerable risk.
6
Only use the telephone with a permanently installed hands-free system and if the traffic conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much.
7 Receiving several text messages
8 9
169
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Calling up the New SMS menu 2 3
Risk of accident
G
The priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only read the text messages if the traffic situation permits it.
4 With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
5 6 7
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
i
Deleting SMS
Each text message consists of at least 2 pages.
The last page of a text message is the prompt to delete the message.
The last page of the text message is the prompt to delete the message. Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel.
i The multi-function display only shows the next text message once the current text message has been deleted.
The multi-function display shows the next page of the text message.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows New SMS. The multi-function display shows the first page of the text message. SMS delete command
8 9
170
Controls in detail Driver information system Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The selection bar is on Yes. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system deletes the current text message and displays the next one. If no other text messages are stored in the system, the multi-function display shows: No SMS message.
Maintenance menu
1
The Maintenance menu serves as a means of
2
calling up the service due dates for the vehicle and the assemblies calculated by the Telligent® maintenance system
3
confirming the completion of service work
4
i
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows the service due dates in individual submenus in the order they are due. The number 1 in the menu list shows which sub-menu you are in.
The driver information system deletes the current text message and moves on to the next menu.
Further service information can be found in the Diagnostics menu, in the Service Info submenu.
or
Calling up the Maintenance menu
1 Item that requires service 2 Item designation 3 Estimated service due date 4 Distance remaining
5 6
! If you do not keep to the service due dates, this could lead to the vehicle or assemblies becoming damaged. Always keep to the schedule for service work.
7 8 9
171
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
2 3 4 5
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows the Maintenance menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the service due dates for individual items.
7
®
If the Telligent maintenance system is unable to calculate the service due date, the multi-function display shows --.--.-- instead of the service due date.
8 9
172
The Telligent® maintenance system automatically indicates the service due dates 14 days in advance. Furthermore, the maintenance system indicates current service due dates exceeded service due dates particularly late service due dates in the case of the brake system
i
i 6
Service note
Each time you turn the ignition lock to position 2, the multi-function display shows the service messages for approaching or current service due dates.
If you do not acknowledge a service message ( page 173), the multi-function display always show it for approximately 20 seconds.
Risk of accident
G
If you override a service note, you could be putting the operational reliability and road safety of the vehicle at risk. There is a danger of important assemblies, such as the brake system, failing due to worn parts and this could lead to an accident. Always adhere to the scheduled service due dates.
! If the service work is not carried out at the time specified, the result could be increased wear and damage to the vehicle or assemblies.
Controls in detail Driver information system Acknowledging service message
1
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel or Press the º button in the instrument panel.
Approaching service due date
Service due date passed
2 3
In the case of an approaching, current or late service due date, the service 4 message is cleared.
5 6 7 8 Current service due date
Particularly late service due date (brake system)
9
173
Controls in detail Driver information system
1
Risk of accident
G
2
There is a danger of the brake system failing as a result of worn brake linings.
3
Have the brake system repaired immediately by a qualified specialist workshop.
4 5 6 7 8
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The service message for a particularly late service due date relating to the brake system cannot be acknowledged using the steering wheel buttons. The service message cannot be deleted. It remains in the multi-function display.
9
174
Confirming completed service work
! If you confirm that service work has been carried out when this is not the case, increased wear and even damage to the vehicle or assemblies could be the result confirm a current or an approaching service due date, the Telligent® maintenance system recalculates the date. To avoid damage to the vehicle or assemblies, the relevant service work may need to be carried out immediately. Do not confirm service work until the specified service work has been carried out.
1 Reset button
i Use a pointed object, such as a pen to press the reset button in the instrument panel. Call up the Maintenance menu. Press and hold the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the driver information system in the multi-function display shows the desired service due date.
Controls in detail Driver information system Press and hold reset button in the instrument panel for one second. The driver information system resets the displayed service due date. The multi-function display shows --.--.--.
! Once you have confirmed a service, check whether the oil grade and viscosity (SAE grade) is the same as that which has been used in the assembly. If necessary, adjust the setting ( page 198). Quitting maintenance menu
Event info menu
Calling up the Event info menu
1
The Event info menu serves as a means of selecting the events stored in the reminder section. Unlike the display of a new event, only the control unit abbreviation/ symbol and the fault location have a red or yellow background. If the cause of the event is no longer present while you are viewing the information, the driver information system removes the event from the display.
2 3 4 1 Control unit abbreviation 2 Functional restriction 3 Reminder 4 Instructions
5 6
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the next menu.
7 8 9
175
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 2
Risk of accident
G
The priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only read the event info if the traffic situation permits it.
3 4 5 6
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Event info.
7 8 9
176
i
Quitting event info menu
The driver information system shows the last acknowledged event in the multi-function display.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the next menu.
The number in the menu list next to the arrow symbol shows the number of events. If there is no new event, the multi-function display shows No malfunctions. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select further events.
Controls in detail Driver information system Switching on auxiliary heating
Vehicles with auxiliary heating:
Risk of fire and poisoning
G
1
Continuous heating ( page 328),
The Auxiliary heating menu serves as a means of
Timed heating ( page 332),
The auxiliary heating may not be used in enclosed spaces such as garages or workshops unless there is suitable extraction, whether in timer or preselected mode, due to the risk of poisoning and suffocation.
2
Auxiliary heating menu
Checking the operating data of the auxiliary heating Activating the preselected heating requirements Adjustment of the heating temperature of the heating duration and the remaining time of the auxiliary heating on the timer or preselected operation
Preselected heating ( page 334).
At filling stations and tanking systems, the auxiliary heating must be switched off due to the risk of explosion. In places where vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g. in the vicinity of fuel, coal, wood dust and grain stores or similar), the auxiliary heating must be switched off. Vehicles for the transportation of hazardous goods: Comply with relevant safety regulations.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
177
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Calling up the auxiliary heating menu
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
2
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Auxiliary heating.
3 4 5 6 7 8
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
Operating data for auxiliary heating, preselect 1
Risk of accident
G
The priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings on the auxiliary heating when the vehicle is stationary.
9
178
Alarm menu There is an alarm clock function integrated in the instrument panel. The alarm menu comprises the following: Page Setting alarm mode
179
or
Setting alarm time memory
180
Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch è.
Setting alarm time
180
The multi-function display shows the current operating data depending on the selected mode of operation ( page 327).
There are three modes available: Off Radio Buzzer
Controls in detail Driver information system Calling up the Alarm menu
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
G
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
The priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only adjust the settings on the alarm when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Alarm.
Risk of accident
Setting alarm mode/switching alarm off Call up the Alarm menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Setting alarm mode.
Alarm menu
The selected alarm mode can be seen in the change bar.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired alarm mode can be seen in the highlight.
1 2
Radio Buzzer
3
Off Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.
4 5
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
6
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.
7 8 9
179
Controls in detail Driver information system
1
i
2
If you would like to woken up by the radio, the ignition lock must be in position 1.
3
Setting alarm time memory There are two memory slots for the alarm time.
4
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Set memory. The highlight is on the selected memory slot. Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel to change between the memory slots. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.
5 6
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.
7
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
8
1 Alarm time memory 2
9
180
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.
Setting alarm time Call up the alarm menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Set memory. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel. The multi-function display shows Set hour. The highlight is on hours.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired hour has been selected in the highlight.
Controls in detail Driver information system Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel. The multi-function display shows Set minutes. The highlight is on minutes.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.
Switching off alarm
1
Press any button on the multi-function steering wheel. The alarm is turned off.
2
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
3
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.
4 5 6
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the desired minutes are shown in the highlight.
7 8 9
181
Controls in detail Driver information system
i
Changing language
2
The language menu serves as a means of selecting the language for the multi-function display.
The Language menu can only be selected in the multi-function display when the vehicle is stationary.
With the vehicle stationary and the hand brake applied
3
The following languages are available in the driver information system as standard:
If the language for the country in which the vehicle was sold is English, only English and German are available.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Language.
1
Language menu
German
4 English 5
Language of country in which vehicle was sold
Other languages can be installed in the driver information system by a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired language.
6
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.
7
The driver information system accepts the chosen language and continues onto the next menu.
8 9
182
Controls in detail Driver information system
1
Settings menu The settings menu serves as a means of Page Activating/deactivating
Page Adjusting
Cruise control sound
184
Differential lock permanent display
185
Level control permanent display
186
Page
2
Activating menus
Load monitoring restrictions
189
Diagnostics
188
Clock
197
Transmission control
189
Service fluid grades
198
i
Unit of temperature measurement
205
Clock mode 12 h/24 h
206
The settings menu can only be selected in the multi-function display when the vehicle is stationary.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
183
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Calling up the Settings menu
Cruise control sound menu
2
The Cruise control sound menu serves as a means of activating and deactivating the acoustic signal during operation of the various driving systems:
3
Limiter Cruise control Telligent® distance control (ART)
4 5 With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
6 7
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Settings.
8 9
184
Calling up the Cruise control sound menu With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Settings menu. Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Cruise control sound.
Controls in detail Driver information system Activating
Permanent display of differential lock and additional equipment
1 2
Deactivating
The Differential lock permanent display menu serves as a means of activating the display when the locks are disengaged.
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The differential lock display shows operation of the following equipment:
3
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Quitting Cruise control sound menu Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next menu.
Transfer case/through-drive lock Differential lock
4 1 Differential lock permanent display
Power take-off
5
Leading/trailing axle
6
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu.
7
Telligent® distance control ( page 280).
8 9
185
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Selecting differential lock permanent display
2
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
3
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
4
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.
Quitting differential lock permanent display Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu.
Level control permanent display The Level control permanent display menu serves as a means of activating the display when the level control is switched off. The level control display shows the status and operation of the Telligent® level control. Telligent® level control ( page 290).
5 Press the j or k button on the 6
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Differential lock permanent display.
7 Activating 8
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Deactivating
9 Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
186
1 Level control permanent display
Controls in detail Driver information system Selecting level control permanent display With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the settings menu. Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Level control permanent display.
Activating
Arrow buttons in radio mode menu
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio equipment:
Deactivating Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Arrow buttons in radio mode menu serves as a means of assigning functions to the arrow keys for radio operation ( page 362).
1 2 3 4
Quitting level control permanent display menu Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next menu.
5 6
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu.
7 8 9
187
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu 2 3
Truckline CC30, CC70 or CD70 audio equipment: The Arrow buttons in cassette mode menu serves as a means of assigning functions to the arrow keys for cassette operation ( page 365).
4
Diagnostics menu activation
Activating
Diagnostics menu activation can be selected using the Display diagnostics menu function ( page 207).
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Deactivating
Calling up diagnostics menu activation With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Settings menu ( page 184). Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.
5 6
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Display diagnostics menu.
7 8 9
188
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. Quitting diagnostics menu activation Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu. Diagnostics menu ( page 207).
Controls in detail Driver information system Enabling transmission control back up mode menu
Activating
Load temperature monitoring in trailer/semitrailer, min./max. temperature
1
Trailer/semitrailer telematics with load temperature monitoring system:
2
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The menu serves as means of adjusting the thresholds for the load temperature monitoring system.
3
Quitting Transmission control back up mode menu
Setting range: –125 °C to +125 °C.
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next menu.
The driver information system monitors the load temperature. If the temperature rises or drops, an event message indicates the deviation.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Configuration.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Enable transmission control backup mode.
Transmission control back up mode ( page 207).
Transmission control back up mode serves as a means of activating the Transmission control back up mode menu ( page 207) for Telligent® gearshift/ automatic gearshift. Calling up the Transmission control back up mode menu With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Deactivating
4 5 6 7 8 9
189
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Calling up the Min. temperature menu 2
Adjusting lower threshold temperature
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
The min. temperature decreases in 1° increments.
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
i
3 Press the æ or ç button on the 4 5 6
To change the setting quickly, press and hold the appropriate button.
multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Load. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows Min. temperature. The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold temperature.
Quitting min. temperature menu 1 Load temperature monitoring system 2 Trailer 1 3 Highlight Call up the Min. temperature menu. Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7
The minimum temperature increases in 1° increments.
8 9
190
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the setting menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the max. temperature menu.
Controls in detail Driver information system Calling up the maximum temperature menu
Adjusting the upper threshold temperature
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
The maximum temperature decreases in 1° increments.
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
i To change the setting quickly, press and hold the appropriate button.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the highlight is on Load.
Quitting the Max. temperature menu
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Max. temperature.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the Settings menu.
The highlight 3 is on the upper threshold temperature.
1 Load temperature monitoring system 2 Trailer 1 3 Highlight Call up the max. temperature menu. Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings.
The maximum temperature increases in 1° increments.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
191
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Load pressure monitoring in trailer/ semitrailer, min./max. pressure
2
Trailer/semitrailer telematics with cargo pressure monitoring:
3
The menu serves as means of adjusting the thresholds for the load pressure monitoring system.
4 5
Calling up the Min. pressure menu With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
Setting range: 0 bar to 25 bar.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Load.
The driver information system monitors the load pressure. If the pressure rises or drops, an event message indicates the deviation.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Min. pressure. The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold pressure.
6 7 8 9
192
Adjusting the lower threshold pressure
1 Load pressure monitoring 2 Trailer 1 3 Highlight Call up the Min. pressure menu.
Controls in detail Driver information system Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The minimum pressure increases in 0.1 bar increments. Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. The minimum pressure decreases in 0.1 bar increments.
i To change the setting quickly, press and hold the appropriate button. Quitting the Min. pressure menu Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the Settings menu.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the Max. pressure menu.
Adjusting the upper threshold
1 2
Calling up the Max. pressure menu
3
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
4
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Load.
1 Load pressure monitoring 2 Trailer 1 3 Highlight
5
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Max. pressure.
Call up the Max. pressure menu.
6 7
The highlight 3 is on the upper pressure threshold.
8 9
193
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
2
The maximum pressure increases in 0.1 bar increments.
3
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
4
The maximum pressure decreases in 0.1 bar increments.
i 5
To change the setting quickly, press and hold the appropriate button.
6 Quitting the Max. pressure menu 7
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the Settings menu.
8 Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting.
9
194
Liquid load volume monitoring in trailer/semitrailer, min./max. quantity
Selecting the minimum volume
Trailer/semitrailer telematics with liquid load volume monitoring:
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
The menu serves as means of adjusting the thresholds for the liquid load volume monitoring system.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on load.
Setting range: 0 l to 128,510 l
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Min. quantity.
The driver information system monitors the liquid load volume. If the volume rises or drops, an event message indicates the deviation.
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
The highlight 3 is on the lower threshold.
Controls in detail Driver information system Adjusting the lower threshold
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. The minimum quantity decreases in 2 l increments.
i To change the setting quickly, press and hold the appropriate button. Quitting the Min. quantity menu 1 Liquid load volume monitoring 2 Trailer 1 3 Highlight Call up the Min. quantity menu. Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The minimum quantity increases in 2 l increments.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the Settings menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the Max. quantity menu.
Calling up the Max. quantity menu With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Settings menu ( page 184). Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Load. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Max. quantity. The highlight 3 is on the upper threshold.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
195
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Adjusting the upper threshold 2
Call up the Max. quantity menu.
Quitting the Max. quantity menu
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the Settings menu.
The maximum quantity increases in 2 l increments.
3
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
4
The maximum quantity decreases in 2 l increments.
5 1 Liquid load volume monitoring
i
2 Trailer 1 3 Highlight
6 7 8 9
196
To change the setting quickly, press and hold the appropriate button.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting.
Controls in detail Driver information system Clock menu The Clock menu is used to set the time in the rev counter. Setting time, hours With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Settings menu ( page 184). Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Clock. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Setting clock, hours.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows the desired hour.
Setting clock, minutes
1
Call up the Settings menu.
Quitting menu for setting clock, hours
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Clock.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to select the previous or next menu.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Setting clock, minutes.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to select the minutes setting or the start screen for the Settings menu.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel repeatedly until the multi-function display shows the desired minutes.
2 3 4 5 6 7
The highlight is on hours.
8 9
197
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Quitting the menu for setting clock, min- Fluids and lubricants menu utes
2 3 4
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to select the previous or next menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and select the start screen of the Settings menu or the hours setting.
5 6 7 8 9
198
The fluids and lubricants menu serves as means of setting the properties of the fluids and lubricants.
! If you make changes to the properties of the fluids and lubricants, the Telligent® maintenance system modifies the service due dates accordingly. To avoid damage to the vehicle assemblies, the properties specified for the fluids and lubricants must be the same as those of the fluids and lubricants actually used.
The following settings are possible: Page Fuel sulphur content/ biodiesel fuel (FAME)
199
Engine oil viscosity
200
Engine oil grade
202
Transmission oil grade
203
Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).
Controls in detail Driver information system Fuel sulphur content
!
Selecting fuel sulphur content display
For operation of the vehicle, the sulphur content of the diesel in the vehicle must be entered.
If the sulphur content entered for the fluid/lubricant is not the same as the sulphur content of the fuel used, there is a danger of the engine becoming damaged.
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
A higher sulphur level accelerates the ageing process of the engine oil. The Telligent® maintenance system calculates the date for engine oil change on the basic of the sulphur level specified. Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart ( page 567).
Biodiesel (FAME)
! If you use biodiesel (FAME), you must select FAME in the fluids and lubricants/ fuel sulphur content menu. This is also required for a mixture of conventional diesel fuels and biodiesel fuels. The periods for changing engine oil and engine oil filters are more frequent than for conventional diesel fuels with low sulphur content ( page 564).
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184). Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/ lubricants. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Fuel sulphur content.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
199
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Changing fuel sulphur content
Select the fuel sulphur content display ( page 199). Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired fuel sulphur content is shown in the multifunction display or until FAME is shown if biodiesel is being used.
2 3 4 5
i
6
To press the reset button in the instrument panel, use a pointed object, such as a pen.
7
Observe "Fuel sulphur content" chart ( page 567).
The fuel sulphur level or FAME (if biodiesel is used) as seen on the screen is then set. Quitting the fuel sulphur level display Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next menu or Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next display.
8 9
200
Engine oil viscosity display The engine oil viscosity value in the fluids/ lubricants menu must be the same as the viscosity class (SAE class) of the oil in the engine.
! Always use a viscosity class appropriate for the ambient temperature ( page 558). Engine oil grade display ( page 202). Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).
Controls in detail Driver information system Select engine oil viscosity display With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
Changing engine oil viscosity
i
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to press the reset button in the instrument panel.
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/lubricants.
Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).
Press the j button until the multifunction display shows Engine oil viscosity.
Select engine oil viscosity display.
1
Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired engine oil viscosity is shown in the multi-function display.
2 3
The engine oil viscosity displayed is set.
4 Quitting the engine oil viscosity display Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next menu
5
or
6
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next display.
7 8 9
201
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Engine oil grade display 2 3 4
The engine oil grade must be set in accordance with the data sheet values from Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. The higher the data sheet value, the higher the engine oil grade level. The data sheet value in the fluids/ lubricants menu must be the same as that of the engine oil actually used.
!
5 6 7
Risk of engine damage. If possible, do not mix engine oils of different grades. If you mix engine oils of different grades, the data from the poorest grade must be entered in the fluids/ lubricants menu. The periods for changing the engine oil are more frequent compared with those for engine oil of the same grade.
8 9
202
Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569). Engine oil viscosity menu ( page 200). Calling up the Engine oil grade menu With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Settings menu ( page 184). Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Fluids/lubricants. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Engine oil grade.
Changing the engine oil grade
i Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to press the reset button in the instrument panel. Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 556).
Controls in detail Driver information system Call up the Engine oil grade menu ( page 202). Press the reset button in the instrument panel until the multi-function display shows the desired engine oil grade. The engine oil grade shown in the multifunction display is now set. Quitting the Engine oil grade menu Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next display.
Transmission oil grade menu The transmission oil grade must be set in accordance with the data sheet values from Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. The higher the data sheet value, the higher the transmission oil grade level. The data sheet value in the fluids/lubricants menu must be the same as that of the transmission oil actually used.
! Danger of transmission damage. If possible, do not mix transmission oils of different grades. If you mix transmission oils of different grades, the data from the poorest grade must be entered in the Fluids/lubricants menu.
The periods for changing the transmission oil are more frequent compared with those for transmission oil of the same quality.
1 2
Observe the "Fluids, lubricants and capacities" section ( page 569).
3
Call up the Transmission oil grade menu
4
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
5
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
6
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel continually until the highlight is on Fluids/lubrications. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel until the multifunction display shows Transmission oil grade.
203
7 8 9
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Changing the transmission oil grade i Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to 2 press the reset button in the instrument panel.
3
Observe the "Service products and capacities" section ( page 569).
4 5 6 7 8 9
204
Call up the Transmission oil grade menu.
Quitting the transmission oil grade menu
Press and hold the reset button (for approximately one second) in the instrument panel until the desired transmission oil grade is shown in the multifunction display.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next menu
The transmission oil grade shown in the multi-function display is now set.
or Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to select the previous or next display.
Controls in detail Driver information system Units menu The units menu serves as a means of switching the unit of temperature measurement between °C/°F the clock mode between 12 h/24 h Units menu, temperature unit The menu is used to specify the way temperature is displayed for the entire instrument panel. The following modes are available: Degrees Celsius (°C) Degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Calling up the Units menu, Temperature unit
Changing the temperature unit
1
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
2
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184).
3
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Units.
4
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Units Temperature unit:. The highlight 1 is on the current setting.
Degrees Celsius (°C) display
5
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
6
Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) display Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7 8 9
205
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Quitting the temperature unit display 2
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the next menu.
3 Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the display.
4 12 h/24 h
5
Call up the Settings menu ( page 184). Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Units. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Units Clock mode. The highlight 1 is on the current setting. 12 hour mode
6
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7
The clock display in the instrument panel is in 12 hour mode
8 9
206
24 hour mode Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. The clock display in the instrument panel is in 24 hour mode Quitting the menu for setting the clock mode Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to select the previous or next menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to quit the display.
Controls in detail Driver information system
Transmission control back up mode menu Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift/ automatic gearshift: If there is a malfunction or complete failure of the gearbox electronics
i
Diagnostics menu The Diagnostics menu is used in fault finding. It comprises a list of all the control units installed in the vehicle which will vary depending on the equipment level. The following information is available for each control unit:
the drive control
Function
the gearshift unit
MB item number
209
the gearbox signal wire
Events
210
you can still reach a workshop using the transmission control back up mode.
Binary values
213
Measured values
213
Deleting events
212
i
Page
1
The Diagnostics menu can only be selected when the vehicle is stationary when the Settings menu/ Configuration is activated ( page 184)
2 3 4
! Check event menus of all control units at regular intervals for events. Rectify any faults in the stored events before commencing a journey.
The Transmission control back up mode menu can only be selected once it has been activated in the Settings menu.
5 6 7 8
The gearshift detects if there is a need for substitute operation and indicates when transmission control back up mode is selected with an event message.
9
207
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Control unit abbreviations 2 3
5 6 7
System
Abbreviations
System
GS
Telligent® gearshift
MS
Modular switch panel
Abbreviations
System
AG
Automatic gearshift
HM
Rear module
NOX
APU
Air-Process-Unit
HPS
Hydraulic-pneumatic gearshift
Exhaust emission treatment (DeNOx)
NR
Telligent® level control
PFA
Particulate filter system
PSM
Programmable special module
ART
4
Abbreviations
BS
®
Telligent distance control Battery isolation switch
EAB
Electronic trailer brake
EDW
Anti-theft alarm system
FLA
Flame-start system
FM
Front module
FR
Drive control
GM
General module
9
208
Heating control/air conditioning
INS
Instrument panel
KB
Clutch mechanism
RAD
Radio
KOM
Communication interface
RS
Retarder control
SPA
Lane assist
KS
Clutch control
SRS
Safety restraint system
KSA
Convenience closing system
MR
Telligent® engine control
Telligent brake system
BTS
8
HZR
®
Controls in detail Driver information system Calling up the Diagnostics menu
Abbreviations
System
TCO
Tachograph
TEL
Telephone, hands-free system
TMB
Door module, co-driver's door
TMF
Door module, driver's door
TP
Telematics platform ®
WR
Telligent active roll stabilizer
WS
Telligent® maintenance system
WSK
Converter and clutch unit
ZDS
Central data memory
ZHE
Auxiliary heating
ZL
Telligent® trailing axle
1
MB item number The MB item number identifies the control unit.
2
Selecting the MB item number With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Diagnostics menu.
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Turn the key in ignition lock to position 2. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Diagnostics.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on the desired control unit abbreviation. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the system abbreviation and the MB item no. menu list.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
209
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Press the æ or ç button on the
multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on MB item no.
2 Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
3 4 5 6
The multi-function display shows the MB item number. Events menu In the Events menu, the driver information system stores all system malfunctions for a period of 2.5 days. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can carry out a diagnosis of the faults based on the stored events.
7
Selecting events With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Call up the Diagnostics menu ( page 209). Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Diagnostics. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel. The multi-function display shows the list of control units. Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on the desired control unit abbreviation. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the system abbreviation and the MB item no. menu list.
8 9
210
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Events. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel. The multifunction display shows the first event in memory 1 of the control unit. If there is no new event, the multifunction display shows No events.
i A fault which has not been rectified is represented by 2 as being current. The event priority 3 and the event code 4 assist the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre in rectifying the fault.
Controls in detail Driver information system Quitting the Event menu
1
If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows: Delete event? The highlight is on No. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to move on to the next menu. 1 Event number 2 Current event 3 Event priority (1st digit) 4 Event code (digits 2 – 5) Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel. The multi-function display shows the event text 5 and the action to be taken 6.
5 Event text 6 Instructions Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
2 3
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to return to the menu list.
4
Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel to return to the previous display.
5
The multi-function display shows the next event.
6
i
7
If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows: Delete event? The highlight is on No.
8 9
211
Controls in detail Driver information system
1 Deleting events The following options are available:
Deleting events from an individual control unit
The highlight is on Yes.
2 You can delete the events from an indi-
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
vidual control unit
3 4 5 6 7
You can delete the events from all control units
The multi-function display shows Events deleted and returns to the
i
Diagnostics menu.
It is possible to carry out a fault diagnosis based on the stored events. The event memory should therefore only be deleted at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required.
8 9
212
Press button æ on the multi-function steering wheel.
Call up the event menu of the desired control unit. If there are no further events, the multifunction display shows Delete events? The highlight is on No.
Controls in detail Driver information system Deleting events from all control units
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Delete events. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
1
Binary values
i The binary values are intended to assist Mercedes-Benz Service Centres in vehicle diagnosis.
The multi-function display shows Delete events.
The highlight is on No.
Call up the Diagnostics menu ( page 209). Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel until the highlight is on Diagnostics. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to select the list of control units.
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight is on Yes.
2 3
Measured values
i
4
The measured values are intended to assist Mercedes-Benz Service Centres in vehicle diagnosis.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
5 6
The multi-function display shows the Event deleted message and returns to
7
the Diagnostics menu.
8 9
213
Controls in detail Gearshift Gearshift
1 The vehicle is equipped with a fully syn2 3
chronised 4 speed transmission. Half stages (post-selection) are also possible which doubles the number of gears. The pre-selection group provides a high and a low ratio for each of the gears. This means that there are 16 forward and 2 reverse gears available.
4 To select the gears, the vehicle is equipped with the following modes of gearshifting: Page
5 6 7
Risk of accident
G
If the reservoir pressure is too low in the auxiliary consumer circuit, complete declutching and secure gear change cannot be guaranteed. The driver information system displays an event message. Under certain circumstances you may not be able to pull out of dangerous situations effectively. Do not accelerate or change gear until the reservoir pressure in the auxiliary consumer circuit is sufficient and the message clears from the screen.
Reservoir pressure in auxiliary consumer circuit too low
1 Auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure 2 Yellow status indicator
HPS
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift
215
EPS III S
Telligent® gearshift
218
i
EPS III SA
Telligent® automatic gearshift
231
Try to maintain the engine speed in the economic range. See also "Rev counter". Drive in the lowest possible gear.
8 9
214
Controls in detail Gearshift
i Change gear in good time when approaching steep gradients. If possible, block change and avoid changing gear unless absolutely necessary. Always fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear.
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) The hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) is designed with a double H layout and is split into a low and a high gear range. The low gear range "L" comprises the reverse gear and gears 1 to 4. The high gear range "H" comprises the gears 5 to 8. The split groups can be selected using the switch on the front of the gear lever.
Change gear smoothly without using force.
1
Gear change methods On vehicles with HPS there are three ways to operate the transmission: Gear selection in low ratio, e.g. for offroad driving
2
Gear selection in high ratio e.g. for onroad driving
3
Gear selection in either low or high ratio, e.g. when vehicle is fully laden
4 5
Only select reverse gear at idling speed and when the vehicle is stationary.
6
When the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is in neutral, the engine only speeds up after a delay.
7 8
HPS gearshift pattern
9
215
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 2
Pulling away DaimlerChrysler recommends pulling away in 1st to 4th gear, depending on load and gradient. Depress the clutch pedal.
3 Without using force, select desired gear using gear lever.
4 Release the parking brake. 5 6 7
Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator. Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. When doing this, observe the traffic situation. Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it comes safely to a halt.
8 9
216
Risk of accident
G
If the vehicle pulls to the left or right during the brake test or it does not come to a halt safely, there is a danger that the brakes could fail and you could cause an accident. If continuing your journey is not possible, park the vehicle and have it towed away. If it is possible to continue your journey, drive at a suitable speed to a specialist workshop and have the brake system checked. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Changing gear
! A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, do not engage, select next highest gear. There is a risk of engine damage. Depress the clutch pedal. Apply slightly increased pressure on the gear lever to overcome the lock between the gear ranges. Without using force, select desired gear using gear lever.
Controls in detail Gearshift Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
i When changing between gear ranges "L" and "H", e.g. from 4th to 5th gear, the clutch pedal must remain depressed.
Selecting the splitter group The splitter group allows the vehicle to be driven in a higher or lower ratio in the selected gear without the need for gear change.
High-range splitter group
1
Place split-shifter in upper position 1. Keep clutch pedal depressed until the splitter group is selected. Release the clutch pedal.
2 3
Low-range splitter group Place split-shifter in lower position 2. Keep clutch pedal depressed until the splitter group is selected. Release the clutch pedal.
4 5 6
Split-shifter
7
1 High-range splitter group 2 Low-range splitter group
8 9
217
Controls in detail Gearshift
1
Stopping Brake the vehicle.
2 Depress the clutch pedal fully. Shift the transmission into neutral.
3 Apply the parking brake ( see page 62).
4
Release the clutch pedal.
i 5 6
When the transmission is in neutral, the gear lever is in the gate between 3rd and 4th gear, or between 5th and 6th gear.
Selecting reverse gear Depress the clutch pedal. Wait for a period of three to six seconds until the layshaft has come to rest in the transmission. Guide gear lever to the left into the reverse gear gate. Apply slightly increased pressure on the gear lever to overcome the lock. Engage reverse gear. Vehicles with reversing horn: The reversing horn is activated. To proceed, release parking brake. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
7 8 9
218
Telligent® gearshift Telligent® gearshift (EPS III S) is an electronic-pneumatic gear selection device. To change gear, the gear lever or the half-gear rocker on the gearshift unit must be moved in the desired direction. Telligent® gearshift allows you to let the Telligent® gearshift select the optimum gears for you (Telligent® selection) or determine the point of gear change yourself (driver's choice)
Controls in detail Gearshift In both cases, the gear can be selected directly: Depress the clutch pedal Select a gear Release the clutch pedal or Gearshift with preselection: Select a gear Depress the clutch pedal The Telligent® gearshift engages the gear Release the clutch pedal
1
Gear indicator This gear indicator shows the following information in the multi-function display:
2
the engaged gear and the selected splitter group on the left 1 and
3
the recommended or preselected gear (flashing) with the appropriate splitter group on the right 2 x
High-range splitter group
y
Low-range splitter group
N
Transmission neutral position
R
Reverse gear
4 1 Engaged: 8th gear, high splitter group 2 Preselected: 7th gear, low splitter group
5 6 7 8 9
219
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 2
Telligent® gearshift unit
Gear lever
The gearshift unit is located on a separate folding armrest on the driver's seat.
3
1
Function button
2
Shift up
3
Shift down/select reverse
4
Neutral button Half-gear rocker
4 Gearshift unit on right-hand drive vehicles
5 6 7 8 9
220
5
Shift ½ gear up
6
Shift ½ gear down
Controls in detail Gearshift
Selecting neutral
Depress the clutch pedal. As soon as neutral is engaged, N is shown on the left in the gear indicator. Release the clutch pedal.
i Neutral position N can be selected from any gear when the gear lever and the half-gear rocker are in the basic position.
G
1
When you declutch or select transmission neutral, either engine braking or tractive power is interrupted. In certain circumstances the vehicle cannot be brought to a halt. Never select transmission neutral when the vehicle is in motion.
2
Risk of accident
3 4 5 6
Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle to a halt.
7
Press and hold neutral button 1.
8
N flashes on the right in the gear indica-
tor.
9
221
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 2
Pulling away If you wish to pull away from stationary with the transmission in neutral N, the Telligent® gearshift only permits selection of 1st to 4th gears or reverse gear.
3 Select the appropriate gear in which to pull away given
4 the load
uphill/downhill gradients
5 the traction i 6 7
Activate the differential locks ( page 253) and the starting-off aid ( page 296) if you encounter traction difficulties.
Direct gearshift
i If you move the gear lever with the function button forwards to drive away with the transmission in neutral, the Telligent® gearshift selects the second gear with fast splitter group. If you move the gear lever forwards or backwards to the end position when the vehicle is in motion, gear selection is with Telligent® driver's choice.
Risk of accident
G
If the clutch pedal is released before a gear is selected, the transmission remains in neutral. Depress clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.
8 9
222
Depress the clutch pedal. Press and hold function button 1, move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2 and hold in this position.
Controls in detail Gearshift The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. Wait until the selected gear is engaged. A selection sound can be heard in the central loudspeaker. The gear engaged flashes briefly on the left in the gear indicator. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator. Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. When doing this, observe the traffic situation. Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it comes safely to a halt.
Risk of accident
G
If the vehicle pulls to the left or right during the brake test or it does not come to a halt safely, there is a danger that the brakes could fail and you could cause an accident. If continuing your journey is not possible, park the vehicle and have it recovered by a breakdown service. If it is possible to continue your journey, drive at a suitable speed to a specialist workshop and have the brake system checked. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
i
1
If you choose the direct gearshift option, block changing with the vehicle in motion is limited to
2
a half-gear using the half-gear rocker and
3
a full gear using the gear lever in conjunction with the applied function button.
4
Shifting with preselection
5
Shifting a gear with preselection means that the gear you wish to select is preselected using the gear lever or the half-gear rocker and the gear change is initiated by depressing the clutch pedal.
6 7 8 9
223
Controls in detail Gearshift ® 1 The Telligent gearshift stores the prese-
lected gear
2
for two minutes when the vehicle is stationary
3
for ten seconds when the vehicle is in motion
4
Construction-site vehicles: When the differential locks are activated, the Telligent® gearshift stores the preselected gears for 30 seconds.
5
i
6
If you choose the preselect gearshift option, block changing is limited to two gears.
7
During the period allowed for preselection, the selected gear can be changed or deleted as required.
8 9
If the period for preselection has elapsed and no gear has been selected, the previously selected gear remains engaged.
224
Move gear lever and/or half-gear rocker in the direction of the gear change continually until a resistance can be felt and until the relevant gear flashes on the right in the gear indicator. Depress the clutch pedal. Wait until the selected gear is engaged. A selection sound can be heard in the central loudspeaker. The gear engaged flashes briefly on the left in the gear indicator. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
Changing preselection Select a different gear during the period allowed for preselection using the gear lever with function button or the half-gear rocker. The newly selected gear flashes on the right in the gear indicator. The period allowed for preselection starts again. Deleting preselection Press neutral button during period allowed for preselection. The preselected gear shown in the right of the gear indicator is deleted.
Controls in detail Gearshift
i
Changing gear ®
The Telligent gearshift offers 4 ways in which to change gear when the vehicle is in motion: Direct gearshift with Telligent® driver's choice ( page 227) Preselected gearshift with Telligent driver's choice and preselection ( page 227)
®
®
The Telligent gearshift monitors gear selection. If the driver chooses a gear that would lead to overrevving of the engine, a warning signal sounds. The Telligent® gearshift selects a "safe" gear. The warning buzzer turns off as soon as the gear lever or the half-gear rocker is in the basic position.
G
1
If the clutch pedal is released before a gear is selected, the Telligent® gearshift selects transmission neutral.
2
Risk of accident
Depress clutch pedal again within two seconds and wait until the gear is selected.
3 4
and
5
Direct gearshift ( page 222) Preselected gearshift ( page 223)
6 7 8 9
225
Controls in detail Gearshift ® 1 Telligent driver's choice
2 3 4 5
If you move the gear lever forwards to 1 or backwards to 2 when the vehicle is in motion without pressing the function button, Telligent® driver's choice is activated. The Telligent® gearshift selects the optimum gear.
i If the optimum gear is already engaged, the Telligent® gearshift selects the next half-gear up or down as appropriate.
6
The influencing factors which aid the Telligent® gearshift in determining the optimum gear are Road speed Accelerator pedal position Engine load Status of continuous brake Laden weight of vehicle
1 Shift up 2 Downshift
7 8 9
226
Controls in detail Gearshift Direct gearshift
Preselected gearshift
i
1
Depress the clutch pedal.
You decide whether gear change should be up or down by means of the gear lever. The Telligent® gearshift selects the optimum gear. The point of gear change is determined by actuation of the clutch pedal.
The preselected gear can be changed or deleted during the period allowed for preselection.
2
Move gear lever to change gear until a resistance can be felt. The optimum gear selected by the Telligent® gearshift flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. Wait until the selected gear is engaged. A selection sound can be heard in the central loudspeaker. The gear engaged is displayed on the left in the gear indicator. Release the gear lever. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
The Telligent® gearshift stores the preselected gear for two minutes when the vehicle is stationary for ten seconds when the vehicle is in motion Construction-site vehicles: When the differential locks are activated, the Telligent® gearshift stores the preselected gears for 30 seconds.
If the Telligent® gearshift finds, during the period allowed for preselection, that the preselected gear is no longer optimum due to a change in driving conditions, it modifies the gear preselected. If the period for preselection has elapsed and no gear has been selected, the previously selected gear remains engaged. Move gear lever to change gear until a resistance can be felt.
3 4 5 6 7
®
The gear selected by the Telligent gearshift flashes on the right in the gear indicator. Depress the clutch pedal.
8 9
227
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 Wait until the selected gear is engaged. Deleting preselection 2
A selection sound can be heard in the central loudspeaker. The gear engaged flashes briefly on the left in the gear indicator.
3 Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
4 Changing preselection 5 6 7
Select a different gear during the period allowed for preselection using the gear lever with function button or the half-gear rocker. The newly selected gear flashes on the right in the gear indicator. The period allowed for preselection starts again.
8 9
228
Press neutral button during period allowed for preselection. The preselected gear shown in the right of the gear indicator is deleted.
Stopping Brake the vehicle. If necessary, change down a gear. Depress the clutch pedal. Press the neutral button. N flashes on the right in the gear indica-
tor. The Telligent® gearshift selects neutral. Hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake. Release the clutch pedal.
Controls in detail Gearshift
Selecting reverse gear
Press and hold function button 1 and move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 2 and hold in this position. Vehicles with reversing horn: The reversing horn is activated. Depress the clutch pedal. Reverse gear is engaged when a selection sound is heard in the central loudspeaker. R can be seen on the left in the gear indicator. Release gear lever and function button.
i You can only select reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary and neutral N is selected.
To proceed, release parking brake. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
1
Construction-site mode Construction-site vehicles: When the differential locks are engaged ( page 253) the Telligent® gearshift selects construction-site mode. In construction-site mode, the Telligent® gearshift shortens the period between gear changes and thus minimises any interruption in traction.
2 3 4
i When construction-site mode is activated and you select a gear with Telligent® driver's choice, block changing is limited to:
5 6
Upshift: a maximum of one gear Downshift: a minimum of one gear
7 8
Reverse gear cannot be selected with the preselection feature ( page 223).
9
229
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 2
Rapid change of direction This procedure may be necessary to rock out a bogged-in vehicle for example.
i To rock out the vehicle, always start in reverse gear. If necessary, engage the differential locks ( page 253).
3
Engage reverse gear. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
4
Press function button 1 and move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2 to preselect a forwards gear.
5 6
As soon as you feel the vehicle driving backwards, depress the clutch pedal.
7 8 9
230
Watch the gear indicator, when a forwards gear has been engaged, release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal. Press function button 1 and move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 3 to preselect the reverse gear. As soon as you feel the vehicle driving forwards, depress the clutch pedal. Watch the gear indicator, when the reverse gear has been engaged, release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal. Repeat the gear change procedure until the vehicle is free.
Controls in detail Gearshift Telligent® automatic gearshift ®
The Telligent automatic gearshift (EPS III SA) is an electronic-pneumatic gear selection device with automated clutch actuation. To change gear, the gear lever or the half-gear rocker on the gearshift unit must be moved in the desired direction.
1
Gear indicator This gear indicator shows the following information in the multi-function display:
2
the engaged gear and the selected splitter group on the left 1 and
3
the recommended or preselected gear (flashes) with the appropriate splitter group on the right 2 x
High-range splitter group
y
Low-range splitter group
N
Transmission neutral position
R
Reverse gear
4 1 Engaged: 8th gear, fast splitter group 2 Preselected: 7th gear, slow splitter group
5 6 7 8 9
231
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 Modes of operation Telligent®
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The automatic gearshift can be used in two modes of operation.
Telligent® automatic gearshift unit The gearshift unit is located on a separate folding armrest on the driver's seat.
Automatic mode "A" ( page 239). You select a gear in which to pull away. The Telligent® automatic gearshift selects the gear depending on the
Gear lever 1
Function button
2
Shift up
3
Changing down/selecting reverse
4
Neutral button
Road speed
Half-gear rocker
Accelerator pedal position
5
Shift ½ gear up
Engine load
6
Shift ½ gear down
Status of continuous brake
7
Driving mode selector switch
M
Manual mode
A
Automatic mode
Laden weight of vehicle Manual mode "M" ( page 243). You select a gear in which to pull away and when the vehicle is in motion, you also determine the point and direction of gear change (up or down). The electronics system engages the optimum gear.
9
232
Gearshift unit
Controls in detail Gearshift Selecting operating mode Risk of accident
G
The automatic and manual operating modes can be selected using the operating mode selector switch on the gearshift unit.
When the vehicle is being driven off-road or with engaged differential locks in automatic operating mode A, Telligent automatic gearshift can lead to undesired interruptions in traction. The result of this could be dangerous driving situations. For such journeys, always select manual mode of operation M so that you can determine yourself when gears should be selected in accordance with the driving situation.
i
1
The driver information system shows the current mode of operation in the multi-function display following the function check of the instruments.
2
The mode of operation can be changed at any time when the ignition lock is in position 2. You can modify the gear chosen by the Telligent® automatic gearshift in both modes of operation. 1 Operating mode selector switch M Manual mode A Automatic mode
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
233
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 Selecting manual mode
Selecting automatic mode
If you change from manual to automatic mode
2
when the vehicle is stationary and with 4th gear selected
3
the Telligent® automatic gearshift selects 2nd gear with fast splitter group.
4 5 Press manual mode M on the operating mode selector switch.
6
i
Press automatic mode A on the operating mode selector switch.
The driver information system shows
The driver information system shows
man. in the multi-function display.
auto in the multi-function display.
7 8 9
234
Controls in detail Gearshift
Engaging forward gears In automatic mode you only need the gearshift unit to pull away to select reverse gear to select transmission neutral In manual mode you can determine the point and direction of gear change (up or down) for every gear using the gearshift unit.
i You can change the gear selected by the Telligent® automatic gearshift at any time.
Changing gear when the vehicle is in motion
Selecting a gear
1
Move gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt to change up or
2
backwards to change down.
3
The Telligent® automatic gearshift engages the optimum gear for the operating conditions.
4
Changing engaged gear
5
To change the gear engaged by the Telligent® automatic gearshift, you can change up 2 or down 3 a full gear using the gear lever or change up 4 or down 5 a half-gear using the half-gear rocker.
6 Press function button 1.
7
Move gear lever forwards 2 or backwards 3.
8 9
235
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 Selecting ½ gears
Selecting neutral
As soon as neutral is engaged, N is shown on the left in the gear indicator.
i
2
Neutral position N can be selected from any gear when the gear lever and the half-gear rocker are in the basic position.
3 4
Risk of accident
5 Move half-gear rocker upwards 4 or downwards 5.
6 7
i In the neutral position N and with reverse gear engaged, the transmission changes between slow and fast splitter groups or vice versa.
8
Apply the brakes and bring the vehicle to a halt. Press and hold the neutral button 1. N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.
9
236
G
When you select neutral, either engine braking or traction is interrupted. In certain circumstances the vehicle cannot be brought to a halt. Never select neutral when the vehicle is in motion.
Controls in detail Gearshift
Selecting reverse gear
Stop the vehicle.
i
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Reverse gear R can only be selected when
Press function button 1 and move gear lever backwards 2 until a resistance can be felt. Vehicles with reversing horn: The reversing horn is activated.
1
the engine is running the vehicle is stationary
2 3
neutral N is selected.
Reverse gear is engaged when
4
a selection sound can be heard in the central loudspeaker
5
R can be seen on the left in the gear indicator
6
To proceed, release the parking brake. Slowly depress the accelerator.
7 8 9
237
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 2
Rapid change of direction This procedure may be necessary to rock out a bogged-in vehicle for example.
i To rock out the vehicle, always start in reverse gear. If necessary, engage the differential locks ( page 253).
3
Select reverse gear and depress the accelerator.
4
As soon as you notice the vehicle driving backwards, press function button 1 and move the gear lever forwards 2 until a resistance can be felt.
5
The Telligent® automatic gearshift engages a forwards gear.
6 7 8 9
238
As soon as you notice the vehicle driving forwards, press function button 1 and move the gear lever backwards 3 until a resistance can be felt. The Telligent® automatic gearshift engages the reverse gear. Repeat the gear change procedure until the vehicle is free.
Controls in detail Gearshift
Automatic mode Pulling away
i If a gear is selected when the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Πis too low, a system fault occurs. The engine must be stopped and restarted. Press function button 1. Move gear lever in desired direction of travel 2.
Release the parking brake and slowly depress the accelerator. The vehicle starts to move. Immediately after pulling away, test the service and parking brakes. When doing this, observe the traffic situation. Ensure that the vehicle does not pull to the left or right and that it comes safely to a halt.
1 2 3 4
®
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a suitable gear. The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator and then changes to the left position.
5 6 7 8 9
239
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Risk of accident
G
If the vehicle pulls to the left or right during the brake test or it does not come to a halt safely, there is a danger that the brakes could fail and you could cause an accident. Bring the vehicle to a halt and have it recovered by a breakdown service. The brake system should be checked at a specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Changing the starting gear To block change up by two gears from the gear you have currently engaged, move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt. To change up by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt. To change down by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt. To change up one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker upwards until a resistance can be felt. To change down one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker downwards until a resistance can be felt.
8 9
240
Changing gear Risk of accident
G
If the engine speed drops below 550 rpm, the Telligent® automatic gearshift automatically disengages the gear. This could lead to critical driving situations when driving up or down hill. Do not allow the engine speed to drop below 550 rpm.
The influencing factors which aid the Telligent® automatic gearshift in determining the optimum gear are Road speed Accelerator pedal position Engine load Status of continuous brake Laden weight of vehicle
Controls in detail Gearshift Using the accelerator pedal you can actively influence the point of gear change and the target gear. Easy on the accelerator Heavy on the accelerator
Shift up early Shift up late
Accelerating Depress the accelerator pedal. When the maximum speed is reached for the driving situation and the gear engaged, Telligent® automatic gearshift selects the next highest optimum gear.
Kickdown
Decelerating
The kickdown function provides maximum acceleration for the vehicle.
Take your foot away from the accelerator pedal.
Depress the accelerator past the pressure point until stop.
Slowly depress the brake pedal. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down into an optimum gear.
®
The Telligent automatic gearshift engages a lower gear. Once the desired speed has been reached, ease back on the accelerator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift engages a higher gear.
1 2 3
or
4
Activate the continuous brake ( page 262). The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down into an optimum gear.
5 6 7
Manual gearshift To advance the point of gear change, move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt.
8
The Telligent® automatic gearshift engages the next highest optimum gear.
9
241
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 Shifting down manually 2
Move gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down into an optimum gear.
3 or Press function button.
i A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving of the engine, the Telligent® automatic gearshift only shifts down into a "safe" gear.
The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down a gear.
5 or
6 Move half-gear rocker downwards. 7
The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down a half-gear.
8 9
242
Risk of accident
H
Do not allow the engine to run unnecessarily
Brake the vehicle The Telligent® automatic gearshift disengages the gear just before idling speed is reached.
Stopping
4 Move gear lever backwards.
Environmental note
G
The vehicle could roll away with the engine running and a gear engaged. The Telligent® automatic gearshift disengages the gear when idling speed is reached. When you bring the vehicle to a halt, always hold it using the service/or parking brake.
When the vehicle is stationary, a pullaway gear is selected.
Controls in detail Gearshift
i
Manual mode
If the vehicle is left to stand for 60 seconds with a gear engaged, a warning signal sounds. N flashes on the right in the gear indicator.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you select manual mode if you intend driving the vehicle off-road to avoid undesired upshifting, for example.
After another 30 seconds, another warning signal sounds and the Telligent® automatic gearshift selects neutral.
Manual mode has the following differences compared to automatic mode:
To keep the transmission in the selected gear, briefly press the accelerator pedal or the function button within 90 seconds of the vehicle having been brought to a halt. The pull away gear remains engaged for another 90 seconds.
The pull away gear is 2nd gear in the high splitter group
The options for changing gear with the vehicle in motion are
1
using Telligent® automatic gearshift by moving the gear lever (Telligent® driver's choice) or
2
using the function button and gear lever for a full gear or via the halfgear rocker for a half-gear.
3 4
The driver must actuate gear change
5
The kickdown function is not available When the vehicle is brought to a halt, the Telligent® automatic gearshift does not select a pull away gear
6 7 8 9
243
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 Pulling away
Press function button 1.
i
Push the gear lever forwards 2.
If the gear you select with the Telligent® automatic gearshift is unsuitable, change the pull away gear.
The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift selects 2nd gear in the high splitter group. When the gear is engaged, the indicator shows the gear on the left.
2 3 4
Release the parking brake and slowly depress the accelerator.
5
The vehicle starts to move.
!
6 7 8
i If a gear is selected when the auxiliary consumer reservoir pressure Πis too low, a system fault could occur. The engine must be stopped and restarted.
9
244
When you stop with manual mode activated, the Telligent® automatic gearshift will not engage a pull away gear. Select a suitable gear in which to pull away.
Changing the pull away gear To change up by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt. To change down by one gear from the gear you have currently engaged, press the function button and move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt. To change up one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker upwards until a resistance can be felt. To change down one half-gear, move the half-gear rocker downwards until a resistance can be felt.
Controls in detail Gearshift Upshifting with Telligent® driver's choice
Changing gear Risk of accident
G
If the engine speed drops below 550 rpm, the Telligent® automatic gearshift automatically disengages the gear. The engine braking effect will be lost or traction will be interrupted. This could lead to dangerous driving situations. Do not allow the engine speed to drop below 550 rpm.
Move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 1. The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts into a higher optimum gear. It will shift up by at least a half-gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
245
Controls in detail Gearshift ® 1 Downshifting with Telligent driver's
choice
2 3
The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts into a lower optimum gear. It will shift down by at least a half-gear. The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.
Upshifting by one gear
i 4
A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, the Telligent® automatic gearshift will only shift down into a "safe" gear.
5 6 7 Move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 1.
8 9
246
Press and hold function button 1.
Controls in detail Gearshift Move the gear lever forwards until a resistance can be felt 2.
Downshifting by one gear
The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts up by one gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.
Move the gear lever backwards until a resistance can be felt 2. The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts up by one gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.
1 2 3 4
i A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, the Telligent® automatic gearshift will only shift down into a "safe" gear.
5 6
Press and hold function button 1.
7 8 9
247
Controls in detail Gearshift
1 Upshifting by one ½ gear
Downshifting by one ½ gear
A warning signal heard when changing down indicates that the target gear is too low. To avoid overrevving the engine, the Telligent® automatic gearshift will only shift down into a "safe" gear.
2 3 4 5 Move the half-gear rocker upwards un- Move the half-gear rocker downwards 6 7
i
til a resistance can be felt 1.
until a resistance can be felt 2.
The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts up by one half-gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.
The selected gear flashes briefly on the right in the gear indicator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift shifts down by one half-gear. When the gear is engaged, the indicator will show the gear on the left.
8 9
248
Controls in detail Gearshift Stopping Risk of accident
G
The vehicle could roll away with the engine running and a gear engaged. The Telligent® automatic gearshift will disengage the gear when idling speed is reached. Always hold the vehicle using the service brake or the parking brake when you stop.
Environmental note
H
Do not allow the engine to run unnecessarily
Brake the vehicle.
i
1
If necessary, change down a gear.
If the vehicle stands still for longer than 60 seconds, a warning signal will sound and N will flash on the right in the gear indicator.
2
®
The Telligent automatic gearshift will disengage the gear just before idling speed is reached.
! When you stop with manual mode activated, the Telligent® automatic gearshift will not engage a pull away gear. Select a suitable gear in which to pull away.
After another 30 seconds, another warning signal will sound and the Telligent® automatic gearshift selects neutral. To keep the transmission in the selected gear, briefly press the accelerator pedal or the function button within 90 seconds after the vehicle has been brought to a halt. The gear will remain engaged for another 90 seconds.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
249
Controls in detail Gearshift
1
Parking the vehicle
Risk of accident
G
If you do not use the parking brake to hold the vehicle, there is a risk of it rolling away. The Telligent® automatic gearshift always selects neutral when the engine has been switched off. You cannot park the vehicle with a gear engaged. Always hold the vehicle using the parking brake.
2 3 4
Stop the vehicle.
5
Apply the parking brake ( page 62). Select neutral 1.
6
Switch off the engine.
7 8 9
250
Controls in detail Driving Driving Tachograph
An event message is displayed in the multi-function display by the driver information system if there are any faults in the tachograph or its equipment.
Use the tachograph to record and comply with the legal requirements in respect of Driving time Working time Tachograph, SIEMENS VDO Automotive "KIENZLE"
Short breaks Long breaks Speed limits. Observe the separate Operating Instructions in the vehicle document wallet. Risk of injury
G Tachograph, TVI
When you enter and exit the vehicle or move about in the cab, there is a danger of you injuring yourself on the opened tachograph. Always keep the tachograph closed.
i A correctly filled out disc must always be inserted in the tachograph for any journey.
1 2
Tachograph discs with recorded information must be kept for at least 1 year.
3
Repair work and removal and installation of the tachograph may only be carried out by an authorised workshop.
4
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
5 6 7 8 9
251
Controls in detail Driving
1
Transfer case
!
2
You can only engage the transfer case when the vehicle is stationary and in neutral.
On vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift:
Selector positions of transfer case
Press operating mode selector switch M.
On-road selector position
The multi-function display shows man.
Turn transfer case switch to position 1. On-road operation is engaged.
3
Off-road selector position
4
Turn transfer case switch to position 2.
5
Off-road operation is engaged.
6 7 8
Switch for transfer case
1 On-road selector position 2 Off-road selector position
9
252
3 Operating mode selector switch A – Automatic mode M – Manual mode
Controls in detail Driving
i The transfer case off-road position is intended primarily for driving off-road or up steep slopes. In neutral position 0, there will be no drive from the transfer case to the driving axles. The neutral position 0 of the transfer case is only required for switching from position 1 to 2.
Differential locks If necessary, engage differential locks on slippery roads or for off-road use for example. Engaging differential locks
i
1
The individual differential locks can only be operated in sequence.
Risk of accident
G
Steering is impaired when a differential lock is engaged. Never drive on a surface with high grip when the differential locks are engaged.
!
3 4 5
Turn differential lock switch to position 1.
When the vehicle is in motion, the transfer case switch must always be in on-road 1 or off-road position 2.
2
The inter-axle lock/through-drive is engaged. 0 Off 1 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/throughdrive 2 Cross-axle lock, rear axle 3 Cross-axle lock, front axle
6 7 8 9
253
Controls in detail Driving
1 Turn differential lock switch to
!
position 2.
2 3 4 5
If the driving wheels slip, do not engage the differential locks. There is a danger of the differential locks becoming damaged.
The rear axle lateral lock is also engaged. Turn differential lock switch to position 3.
Engage only when the vehicle is stationary or creeping forwards slowly.
The front axle lateral lock is also engaged. The multi-function display shows the relevant status once the switch process has completed.
6
1 Cross-axle lock, front axle 2 Inter-axle lock, transfer case/throughdrive 3 Cross-axle lock, rear axle # Differential locks engaged + Differential locks disengaged
7 8 9
254
Pull away carefully. In certain circumstances, the locking function of the differential locks may not be fully engaged.
Controls in detail Driving Disengaging differential locks
Turn differential lock switch from 1 to position 0. The inter-axle lock/through-drive is disengaged.
Turn differential lock switch from 3 to position 2. The lateral lock of the front axle is disengaged. Turn differential lock switch from 2 to position 1.
1
Power take-offs The engine must run at a specified speed to drive auxiliary equipment (e.g. pumps).
The differential lock indicator in the multifunction display will be deactivated.
the accelerator pedal
If the indicator is not deactivated when the lateral lock is disengaged:
the multi-function lever on the steering column ( page 265)
Drive the vehicle backwards and forwards slightly. If the indicator does not go out when the inter-axle lock is disengaged:
2
The engine speed can be controlled with
3 4
an overspeed switch or automatically with the constant engine speed switch
5
depending on the equipment level.
Stop the vehicle and drive the vehicle backwards for a short distance.
6 7
The lateral lock of the rear axle is disengaged.
8 9
255
Controls in detail Driving
1
i Vehicles with engine speed governor:
2
When the power take-off is activated, it is possible to exceed the governed engine speed.
3 !
4 5
In the case of custom vehicle conversions, observe manufacturer's operating instructions. Do not switch on power take-off until the vehicle is stationary
6
the parking brake is applied neutral is selected
7 8 9
256
The multi-function display shows the Apply the parking brake ! event message.
If the J power take-off symbol flashes in the multi-function display, the power take-off cannot be engaged. The electronics system has not automatically recognised the vehicle's operating state (transmission in neutral, vehicle stationary, parking brake applied).
Apply the parking brake and repeat the selection process.
Check the vehicle's operating state and repeat the selection process.
Notes for vehicles with programmable special module (PSM) If the parking brake is released, the power take-off cannot be engaged.
i If the display flashes again, consult a workshop.
Controls in detail Driving Engaging transmission-dependent power take-off
Press the upper section of switch 1. The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol flash in the multi-function display. Note on power take-off symbol: # Power take-off engaged
1 Power take-off switch 1
i The transmission-dependent power take-off can only be engaged when: the vehicle is stationary the parking brake is applied
i
1
Transmission with electronic gear change inhibitor: When the power take-off is engaged, the transmission cannot be operated
+ Power take-off disengaged
Transmission without electronic gear change inhibitor:
Disengaging transmission-dependent power take-off
PTO can be operated with vehicle stationary
Press the upper section of switch 1.
PTO can be operated only if 1st, 2nd or 3rd gear is selected with vehicle in motion
The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol go out in the multi-function display.
2 3 4 5 6
! If the power take-off is engaged, do not change gear when the vehicle is in motion.
neutral is selected
7 8 9
257
Controls in detail Driving
power take-off with splitter group
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift
The power take-off can be run at 2 differ-
With the engine running at idling speed:
splitter group.
preselect fast or slow speed using the half-gear rocker on the control panel of the Telligent® gearshift.
1 Engaging transmission-dependent 2 ent speeds by selecting the low or high
3 Vehicles without Telligent® automatic gearshift
4 With the engine running at idling speed: 5 6
preselect fast or slow speed using the split-shift on the gear lever or the halfgear rocker on the control panel of the Telligent® gearshift. Up = fast Down = slow
7 Depress the clutch pedal fully. 8
After about ten seconds, press the upper section of the power take-off switch 1. The PTO will be engaged or disengaged.
9 Release the clutch pedal.
258
Engaging engine-dependent power take-off (NMW)
Press the upper section of power takeoff switch 1. The PTO will be engaged or disengaged.
i Clutch actuation is automatic with the Telligent® automatic gearshift.
1 Power take-off switch 1
i The engine-dependent power take-off can only be engaged when: the vehicle is stationary the parking brake is applied neutral is selected
Controls in detail Driving Press the upper section of switch 1 with the engine running at a maximum speed of 1,700 rpm. The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display flash. Power take-off display: # PTO engaged + PTO disengaged
Transmission with electronic gear change inhibitor:
1
The transmission cannot be operated when the power take-off is engaged.
2
Transmission without gear change inhibitor:
3
The power take-off can be engaged whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion.
Disengaging engine-dependent power take-off (NMW)
Engaging engine-resident power takeoff
Press the upper section of switch 1.
The engine-resident power take-off can only be engaged when:
The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display go out.
4 1 Power take-off switch 1 Press the upper section of switch 1. The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display flash.
the vehicle is stationary
Power take-off symbol:
the parking brake is applied
# PTO engaged
neutral is selected
+ PTO disengaged
5 6 7 8 9
259
Controls in detail Driving
1 Disengaging engine-resident power take-off
2 3
Press the upper section of switch 1. The indicator lamp in the switch and the J power take-off symbol in the multi-function display go out.
Switching on constant engine speed function The constant engine speed function can only be switched on when: the vehicle is stationary the parking brake is applied neutral is selected
Press the upper section of switch 1. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
i When the constant engine speed function is switched on, the working speed will remain constant regardless of the engine load.
4 Switching off constant engine speed function
5
Press the lower section of switch 1. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.
6 7 1 Constant engine speed switch
8 9
260
Controls in detail Driving
Continuous brake Risk of accident
G
Do not operate the engine brake or retarder on a slippery road surface. The wheels could lock. The vehicle could skid.
1 Green
Economical operating range
1
2 Yellow
Engine brake operating range
2
3 Red
Overrevving range
4 Green diode strip
Econometer
3
i
4
On long downhill stretches, downshift in good time and operate the engine brake to make use of the engine braking effect. Note the effective engine braking range (yellow section) marked on the rpm counter.
5 6 7 8 9
261
Controls in detail Driving Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift:
1 Operating the continuous brake 2 3 4
Pull multi-function lever, continuous brake (engine brake/retarder) from position 0 to position 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
If the d brake indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel when the continuous brake is operated, the speed of the vehicle is too high for a lower gear to be selected:
When the continuous brake is operated, the b indicator lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
i
5
When the lever is in position 1, the braking effect is at its least.
6
When the lever is in position 5 the braking effect is at its greatest.
7 8 9
262
Decelerate using the service brake. Multi-function lever, continuous brake (example)
i If the service brake is applied when the continuous brake is active, the transmission will shift down in accordance with the driving situation.
Controls in detail Driving Deactivating the continuous brake
Engine brake
Move multi-function lever to position 0.
The engine braking effect is dependent on the engine speed. High engine speed means high engine braking effect.
The continuous brake is deactivated and the b indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel. If the b indicator lamp does not go out: Have the continuous brake serviced or repaired as necessary.
1 2
i
3
At an engine speed of below 900 rpm, the engine brake is ineffective. The engine brake can only be used in a rev range between 900 rpm and approximately 2,300 rpm.
4
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
5 1 Optimum engine braking efficiency
6 7 8 9
263
Controls in detail Driving
1 Retarder 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Risk of accident
G
If the multi-function display shows a retarder event message F, it is possible to deactivate the retarder during ABS regulation or by depressing the accelerator. At the same time, the status indicator will light up red. Drive with particular care. Have the retarder serviced or repaired as necessary. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
9
264
The retarder's braking effect is reduced automatically depending on the coolant temperature. Adjust driving style. On long downhill stretches, in particular, downshift in good time to make use of the engine braking effect.
i If the retarder's braking effect is reduced automatically due to the coolant temperature, the multi-function display will show an event message G. If the retarder indicator lamp b lights up with the lever in position 0, do not operate the retarder. Have the retarder checked.
The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on cleaning and care of retarder ( page 416).
Controls in detail Driving
Idling speed After the engine has been started, the idling speed is regulated automatically according to the coolant temperature. It is possible to increase the engine speed using the multi-function lever on the steering column. In this way, it is possible to provide the necessary speed for auxiliary equipment, such as pumps.
Adjusting idling speed
1
Using the multi-function lever on the steering column it is possible to set the idling speed between approximately 550 rpm and a maximum of 750 rpm with the vehicle stationary.
2 3 4 Vehicles with ART
!
1 To increase idling speed 2 To reduce idling speed 3 To switch off increased idling speed
Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.
5 6
Vehicles without ART
7 8 9
265
Controls in detail Driving
1 Increase idling speed by approximately 2 3
20 rpm
Decrease idling speed by approximately 20 rpm
Move the multi-function lever to position 1 É.
Move the multi-function lever to position 2 Ê.
The idling speed will be increased in increments of approximately 20 rpm. Increase idling speed
4 Hold the multi-function lever in position 1 É.
5
The idling speed will be increased to a maximum of approximately 750 rpm
6 7 8 9
266
The idling speed will be decreased in increments of approximately 20 rpm. To reduce idling speed Hold the multi-function lever in position 2 Ê. The idling speed will be decreased to a maximum of approximately 550 rpm.
Deactivate increased idling speed Move the multi-function lever to position 3 5. The increased idling speed is deactivated.
i When the vehicle is in motion, the increased idling speed will switch off automatically at a speed of above approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
Controls in detail Driving systems Driving systems Switching between various driving systems You can switch between the following driving systems: Limiter Cruise control Telligent® distance control
i Switching between driving systems is immediate. The multi-function display is deactivated for approximately three seconds. During this period there is no indication of road speed or distance in the multi-function display.
Switching from limiter to cruise control and back
i You can switch between the limiter and cruise control:
1 2
whether these are active or inactive
3
with the vehicle stationary or in motion
4 5 6 7 8 9
267
Controls in detail Driving systems Switching from Telligent® distance control to limiter and back
1 2
The limiter is activated. The multi-function display shows c. Press button 1 briefly. The Telligent® distance control is activated. The multi-function display shows b.
3 4 Vehicles without ART
5 1 Changeover button Press button 1 briefly.
6
Press button 1 briefly.
Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows d.
7 Press button 1 briefly. The limiter activated. The multi-function display shows c.
8 9
268
Vehicles with ART
1 Changeover button
Controls in detail Driving systems Switching from Telligent® distance control to cruise control and back Switching between Telligent® distance control and cruise control is only possible when the vehicle is in motion and cruise control is activated.
Press rotary switch 1 briefly. Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows d. Press rotary switch 1 briefly. The Telligent® distance control is activated. The multi-function display shows b.
To maintain the set maximum speed on downhill stretches, the limiter will operate the continuous brake automatically at the set maximum speed +4 km/h. The limiter cannot be activated until the vehicle is moving faster than 2 km/h. Risk of accident
G
Limiter Using the limiter, you can limit the road speed above approximately 10 mph (15 km/h). You can accelerate using the accelerator pedal up to the set maximum speed.
The limiter is intended to assist the driver only. The driver is responsible at all times for the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an adequate distance to the vehicle in front.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 ART rotary switch
7 8 9
269
Controls in detail Driving systems
1
Increasing speed in increments of 0.5 km/h
2
Move multi-function lever to position 1 É.
3
Moving the multi-function lever, activates and stores the current speed.
4
Moving the lever again will have the effect of increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h. Multi-function lever (example)
5 Activating limiter 6
Press button 2 continually until c is shown in the multi-function display. The limiter is selected.
7 8 9
270
i If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
1 Selected driving system 2 Set maximum speed 3 Limiter symbol 4 Current distance from vehicle in front
Controls in detail Driving systems Increasing speed in increments of 5 km/h
i
Reverting to set speed limit
1
If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
2 3 4
Hold the multi-function lever in position 1 É. Holding the multi-function lever increases the speed in increments of 5 km/h. Releasing the multi-function lever stores the current speed after it has been increased.
Precondition: The limiter was previously deactivated.
5
Move the multi-function lever to position 2 Ê.
6
Moving the multi-function lever will select the previously stored speed. The multi-function display will show the previously stored speed.
7 8 9
271
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 2 3
i If the lever is moved again, the speed will be reduced by 0.5 km/h.
Decreasing the speed in steps of 0.5 km/h
If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
4 5
Precondition: The limiter is active. Move the multi-function lever to position 2 Ê.
6
Moving the lever will cause the speed to be reduced in steps of 0.5 km/h.
7 8 9
272
i If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
Controls in detail Driving systems Decreasing the speed in steps of 5 km/h
Hold the multi-function lever in position 2 Ê. Holding the multi-function lever decreases the speed in steps of 5 km/h. Releasing the multi-function lever stores the current speed after it has been reduced.
i
1
If the speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
273
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 Switching off limiter
i
Exceeding stored speed limit
2
Even after the engine has been switched off, the stored speed limit is still available.
If it is necessary to exceed the stored speed limit to overtake, for example:
3 4 5 Move the multi-function lever to position 3 5.
6
The limiter is deactivated. The c display in the multi-function display will be cancelled.
7 8 9
274
If you drive downhill and downshift without adjusting the speed, the limiter will set a temporary engine speed of approximately 2,200 rpm. The set maximum speed remains in the system and will be recalled as soon as this is possible in a higher gear.
Depress the accelerator briefly past the maximum speed point to the stop. As soon as the overtaking manoeuvre is over, release the accelerator pedal and depress it again. This will bring the set limiting speed back into effect.
i If at this time the vehicle is travelling faster than the stored maximum speed, the vehicle will be slowed down automatically with the continuous brake.
Controls in detail Driving systems
Cruise control (combined acceleration/braking control) Vehicles without Telligent® distance control (ART): Cruise control can store any road speed above 10 mph (15 km/h). Cruise control brakes the vehicle when the set speed is exceeded by 2.5 mph (4 km/h). Cruise control accelerates the vehicle on uphill climbs. On downhill stretches, the continuous brake brakes the vehicle (engine brake/ retarder).
Risk of accident
G
Do not operate the retarder on slippery road surfaces. The wheels could lock. The vehicle could skid. Cruise control is intended to assist the driver only. The driver is responsible at all times for the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an adequate distance to the vehicle in front. Use cruise control only when it is safe to maintain the vehicle's speed at a constant level in traffic situations. The cruise control system is not able to read the road and traffic conditions.
i
1
On uphill or downhill stretches, there is a possibility that the cruise control system may not be able to maintain the set speed
2
If you drive downhill and downshift without adjusting the speed, the limiter will set a temporary engine speed of approximately 2,200 rpm. The set maximum speed remains in the system and will be recalled as soon as this is possible in a higher gear. When cruise control is activated, there is no need to depress the accelerator.
3 4 5 6 7
! Do not exceed the maximum speed in each of the gears. Keep an eye on the rev counter ( page 144).
8 9
275
Controls in detail Driving systems
1
Activating cruise control/Increasing speed
Increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h
2
Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator to above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Move the multi-function lever to position 1 É.
3
On vehicles with all-wheel drive: Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator pedal to above 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h).
4 Vehicles without ART
5
Hold the multi-function lever in position 1 É. Cruise control is activated. The multifunction display shows Ñ. The vehicle will accelerate.
6
Release the multi-function lever. The current speed is stored in the memory.
7 8 9
276
Moving the multi-function lever, stores the current speed. Moving the lever again will have the effect of increasing the speed in increments of 0.5 km/h.
i When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will be cancelled.
Controls in detail Driving systems
i
1
If the lever is moved again, the speed will be reduced by 0.5 km/h. When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out. Decreasing speed in steps of 0.5 km/h 1 Selected driving system 2 Set speed 3 Cruise control symbol 4 Current distance from vehicle in front
Vehicles without ART
Precondition: Cruise control active.
Reverting to the set speed limit
Move the multi-function lever to position 2 Ê.
Precondition: Cruise control was previously deactivated. Move the multi-function lever to position 2 Ê.
2 3 4 5
Moving the multi-function lever decreases the speed in steps of 0.5 km/h.
6 7
Moving the multi-function lever will select the speed previously stored.
8
The cruise control system accelerates the vehicle to the speed previously set.
9
277
Controls in detail Driving systems
1
i
i
Automatic cruise control deactivation
2
When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
When the speed is changed, the multifunction display will show the current set speed limit. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
Cruise control is deactivated automatically:
3 Reducing speed 4 5 6
Hold the multi-function lever in position 2 Ê. Holding the multi-function lever decreases the speed. Releasing the multi-function lever stores the current speed.
Deactivating cruise control Move the multi-function lever to position 3 5. Cruise control is deactivated. The indicator Ñ in the multi-function display will be cancelled.
i Even after the engine has been switched off, the stored speed is still available.
7 8 9
278
if the vehicle is braked using the service brake when the cruise control system is currently accelerating the vehicle. A short warning signal will sound. The speed setting remains in the memory. if the speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), a short warning signal will sound. The speed setting remains in the memory.
Controls in detail Driving systems if you switch over to limiter. A short warning signal will sound. The speed setting remains in the memory.
Reverting to stored speed
if the clutch is kept depressed for longer than five seconds, e.g. during gear changing. A short warning signal will sound. If you depress the clutch for less than five seconds, cruise control will remain active. when the gearbox is left in neutral for longer than five seconds.
i
Multi-function lever (example)
1 Revert to stored speed To revert to the stored speed:
Move the multi-function lever to position 1 Ê.
1
The vehicle continues at the stored speed again.
2
Special note on using the cruise control system
3
To overtake a vehicle, you can accelerate past the stored speed using the accelerator pedal. As soon as the overtaking manoeuvre is completed and pressure is taken off the accelerator pedal, the cruise control system reverts to the stored speed.
On vehicles with all-wheel drive, the cruise control system is deactivated automatically when the speed drops below approximately 30 mph (45 km/h). A short warning signal will sound. The speed setting remains in the memory.
4 5 6 7 8 9
279
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 If the anti-lock braking system or the
acceleration skid control (ASR) is deactivated or defective:
2 3 4
the cruise control system will only store speeds above 30 mph (50 km/h) the cruise control system will be deactivated automatically when the speed drops below approximately 28 mph (45 km/h)
5 Additional braking with the continuous brake is possible. The cruise control system will remain active.
6 7 8 9
When the continuous brake is deactivated, the vehicle will accelerate to the last stored speed. If you brake the vehicle using the continuous brake, you can also use the service brakes. The cruise control system will remain active. Further information on the continuous brake ( page 261).
280
Telligent® distance control (ART) The Telligent® distance control (ART) is a convenience system that supplements the controlling function of the cruise control system (accelerating/braking control) with a distance control function. If the Telligent® distance control detects a slower vehicle ahead, it will slow your vehicle down automatically. Your vehicle will then be driven at the same speed as that of the vehicle ahead at a preset distance. The speed stored in the cruise control memory remains unaffected. As soon as the traffic situation permits, e.g. if the vehicle ahead changes lanes, your vehicle will accelerate up to the stored speed in the cruise control memory.
Telligent® distance control works like a conventional cruise control system when there is no vehicle driving in front. Risk of accident
G
Do not use ART on icy roads or in the fog, for example. The Telligent® distance control cannot automatically adapt the distance to the vehicle in front to changing road and visibility conditions. Telligent® distance control is merely a tool to assist the driver. The driver is responsible at all times for the speed of the vehicle and for maintaining an adequate distance to the vehicle in front.
Controls in detail Driving systems Telligent® distance control cannot be activated:
1
when the vehicle is stationary
2
during the electronics system self-diagnosis after the engine has been started
3
at a speed below 10 mph (approximately 15 km/h) if the clutch is depressed
4
if the service brake is applied
1 Unsuccessful attempt at activation
during ABS, ASR (acceleration skid control) or SR control (Telligent® stability control)
Activating Telligent® distance control
An unsuccessful attempt to activate the Telligent® distance control is shown in the multi-function display for approximately three seconds by ––,– km/h.
Telligent® distance control can only be activated when the vehicle is travelling at a speed above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Multi-function lever, cruise control with integrated ART
Accelerate the vehicle using the accelerator pedal to above 10 mph (15 km/h), Move the multi-function lever to position 1 É or 2 Ê briefly, The current speed is stored in the memory.
5 6 7 8 9
281
Controls in detail Driving systems Changing the specified distance to the vehicle in front
1
Using the ART rotary switch 3, you can change the specified distance to a vehicle travelling ahead. The minimum specified distance to a vehicle in front is approximately 15 m.
2 3
Turn ART rotary switch 3 to position 1 or 2 and select desired distance specification. Release ART rotary switch. The specified distance is stored in the memory.
i When changes are made to the distance specification, the multi-function display shows information about the specified distance h.
4 5 6 7
If ART is activated, the multi-function display shows: 1 Current distance from vehicle in front 2 Telligent® distance control symbol 3 Current set speed 1 Î To reduce specified distance 2 Ï To increase specified distance 3 ART rotary switch
8 9
282
Controls in detail Driving systems Increasing the set speed
i When the set speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
Increasing speed in increments of 0.5 km/h
1
Move the multi-function lever to position 1 É.
2
The current set speed increases in increments of 0.5 km/h. Release lever. The current set speed is stored.
3 4
i When the set speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
Hold the multi-function lever in position 1 É. The set speed is increased to the next highest speed in increments of 5 (e.g. 62 km/h to 65 km/h and then 70 km/h and so on). Release the multi-function lever. The current set speed is stored.
1 Set speed 2 ART symbol 3 Current distance from vehicle in front
5 6 7 8 9
283
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 Reducing the set speed
i
2
When the set speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
3
Decreasing the speed in steps of 0.5 km/h Move the multi-function lever to position 2 Ê.
4 5 Hold the multi-function lever in position 2 Ê.
6 7
Deactivating Telligent® distance control
The set speed is reduced to the next lowest speed in steps of 5 (e.g. 62 km/h to 60 km/h and then 55 km/h and so on). Release the multi-function lever. The current set speed is stored.
8 9
284
The current set speed decreases in steps of 0.5 km/h. Release the multi-function lever. The current set speed is stored.
i When the set speed is changed, the multi-function display will show the current set speed. After about five seconds, the display will go out.
Move the multi-function lever to position 3 5. Telligent® distance control is deactivated. The stored speed and the specified distance remain in the memory. The indicators in the multi-function display will be cancelled ( page 282).
Controls in detail Driving systems Switching from Telligent® distance control to cruise control
Automatic deactivation of Telligent® distance control Telligent® distance control is deactivated automatically when the speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h) when cruise control accelerates the vehicle and the service brake is applied at the same time
Move ART rotary switch briefly in direction 1. The multi-function display shows the symbol Ñ for the activated cruise control function and the current specified distance to the vehicle ahead.
when the chassis on vehicles with pneumatic suspension is not in the standard position
if the clutch is kept depressed for longer than five seconds, e.g. during gear changing If you depress the clutch for less than five seconds, the Telligent® distance control remains active if the transmission is set at R or N
1 2 3
!
4
If the distance control is automatically switched off, the warning buzzer will give a single signal.
5
if a fault develops in the ART electronics system
6 7 8 9
285
Controls in detail Driving systems
1
The multi-function display shows
i ®
2 3 4 5
After Telligent distance control has been switched off automatically, the cruise control function can still be activated. If Telligent® distance control cannot be activated, e.g. if there is a fault in the system, the warning buzzer will sound once. The control function of the cruise control system is automatically activated.
1
Current distance from vehicle in front
2
Symbol for activated cruise control function
3
Current set speed
Driving with Telligent® distance control Telligent® distance control is designed for use on motorways or expressways. Risk of accident
6
G
If a stationary obstacle is encountered, the vehicle will not be braked automatically. Do not use ART on B roads, for example, or in built up areas.
7 8 9
286
Telligent® distance control function only works in interaction with vehicles travelling ahead. It does not respond to stationary obstacles on the road (e.g. broken down vehicles or a traffic congestion). Telligent® distance control slows the vehicle down automatically to maintain the set distance to the vehicle travelling in front. Telligent® distance control will be activated if the vehicle in front changes lanes, for example. It is absolutely essential to brake the vehicle using the service brake in addition to the automatic braking function of the vehicle if: the warning symbol l lights up in the multi-function display the warning buzzer sounds twice in succession.
Controls in detail Driving systems
Risk of accident
G
If a stationary obstacle is encountered, the vehicle will not be braked automatically. If Telligent® distance control detects a stationary obstacle, only a distance warning is activated: The multi-function display shows warning symbol l, The warning buzzer sounds twice in addition. Decrease driving speed using the service brakes. Switch Telligent® distance control (ART) off before leaving motorways or expressways. If the system cannot detect an obstacle ahead (e.g. vehicle travelling in front), the vehicle will accelerate to the stored set speed.
i ®
Telligent distance control cannot detect oncoming traffic. The acoustic warning from Telligent® distance control (ART) can be switched on or off under Cruise Control acoustic in the Configuration submenu of the Settings menu ( page 184).
Telligent® distance control distance sensor Unfavourable weather conditions (e.g. snow, slush) or heavy soiling of the sensor cover can impair the Telligent® distance control function.
2 3 4
The retarder and/or engine brake can be switched on even when ART is active. If the vehicle is slowed down by the cruise control system with the continuous brake (engine brake/retarder) and you depress the brake pedal, the cruise control system will not be deactivated.
1
5 6 1 ART distance sensor cover Keep the sensor cover in the front bumper clean.
7 8 9
287
Controls in detail Driving systems ® 1 Telligent distance control distance
warning
This function is also active even when
2 Telligent® distance control is switched off. If there is a danger of colliding with a mov-
3 ing obstacle in your lane, a distance warning will be activated. Telligent® distance control cannot detect
4 oncoming traffic. There will be no distance warning.
5 6 7 8 9
288
Distance warning The multi-function display shows the l distance warning. The warning buzzer sounds twice in addition. Risk of accident
G
There is no automatic distance control (automatic braking), i.e. the driver must slow the vehicle down using the brakes. The system cannot always detect complex driving situations clearly. This may lead to missing or incorrect distance warnings.
If a distance warning is activated when the vehicle is in motion: Pay particular attention to the traffic situation, If necessary, avoid the vehicle ahead, If necessary, brake the vehicle using the brakes.
Controls in detail Driving systems Special driving situations with Telligent® distance control Cornering, entering and exiting corners
Risk of accident
G
When cornering, or entering and exiting corners, the system may have difficulty in detecting oncoming traffic. Your own vehicle may then brake unexpectedly or late.
Problems may occur in detecting oncoming traffic:
1
on slip roads, whether joining or leaving the main road
2
if there are moving vehicles on the verge (e.g. breakdown recovery vehicles)
3
G
4
Problems may occur in detecting oncoming traffic:
5
Slip roads, verges Risk of accident
When cornering, or entering and exiting corners, the system may have difficulty in detecting oncoming traffic.
on slip roads, whether joining or leaving the main road, if there are moving vehicles on the verge (e.g. breakdown recovery vehicles). Your own vehicle may then brake unexpectedly or late.
6 7 8 9
289
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 Offset driving style, lane change
Cutting in
Telligent® level control Pneumatic suspension
2
The chassis can be lowered or raised using the control panel to pickup or offload demountable rack systems, containers or semitrailers. To use the control panel outside the cab,
3 4
remove the control panel from its bracket.
5 An offset driving style to the vehicle ahead 6 7
can cause problems in detection. Telligent® distance control may have trouble detecting the vehicle ahead if it is offset (i.e. not inline with your vehicle). The distance to the offset vehicle ahead is too short. The driver must brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the vehicle ahead.
Vehicles that cut into your lane without keeping a safe distance will only be detected by Telligent® distance control when the sensors can pick up the vehicle. The distance to the vehicle cutting in is too short. The driver must brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the cutting in vehicle ahead.
8 Control panel next to driver's seat
9
290
Controls in detail Driving systems
i ®
If Telligent level control is active, this will be shown automatically in the multi-function display, e.g. chassis frame below normal position B or chassis frame above normal position A. The level control display is deactivated when the vehicle leaves the factory. The level control can be switched on or off permanently in the Configuration submenu of the Settings menu in the driver information system ( page 186). When the key in the ignition lock is turned to position 2, the height of the chassis will be adjusted automatically.
Risk of injury
G
If you do not replace the control panel in the bracket designed for this purpose, there is a danger of tripping on the cable, as you get out of the cab. Always replace the control panel in the bracket designed for this purpose to ensure that the cable is routed towards the cab rear.
! Lower the chassis frame completely before offloading demountable platforms or containers. Otherwise the chassis could rebound suddenly when the exchange body is offloaded. This could damage the shock absorbers.
i
1
If the reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is insufficient, leave the engine running to build up the pressure in the compressed-air system.
2
When coupling to semitrailers or picking up demountable platforms or containers, leave the engine running. This ensures that there is always sufficient reservoir pressure in the compressedair system. The multi-function display will indicate Telligent® level regulation by means of the K system abbreviation/symbol in the driver information system.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
291
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 Storing the chassis height
1 Operation indicator Front chassis, raise/lower
Saving chassis height:
3
2 Operation indicator Rear chassis, raise/lower
Press preselect button 3 or 4. 1 or 2 will light up.
4
3 On/off Front chassis preselection, raise/lower
2
The chassis height can be stored and recalled using buttons "M1" 5 and "M2" 6.
4 On/off Rear chassis preselection, raise/lower
5 6
Control panel
5 M1 chassis height memory 1 6 M2 chassis height memory 2 7 Travel position
7
8 Raise 9 Lower
8
a STOP (raising/lowering)
9
292
Apply the parking brake. Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. 1 or 2 will light up. The multi-function display shows chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B. Once the required height is achieved, press and hold STOP button a and then press button M1 5 or M2 6. The chassis height is stored.
Controls in detail Driving systems Loading and unloading the vehicle
Turn key in ignition lock to position 0.
When you load and unload the vehicle and wish to maintain a constant chassis height, this height can be stored.
Release STOP button a.
Apply the parking brake. Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the trailing axle. If necessary use buttons 8 or 9 on the control panel to set the desired height of the chassis. Run the engine until the pressure regulator cuts out. Press and hold STOP button a.
i The key can be removed and the cab can be locked.
Using buttons 8 or 9 on the control panel, the desired height of the chassis can be set.
1
Run the engine until the pressure regulator cuts out.
2
Press and hold STOP button a.
3
Standby switch
Turn key in ignition lock to position 0.
If the reservoir pressure in the compressed-air circuit is sufficient, the stored chassis height will be kept constant for approximately 5 hours.
Release STOP button a.
4
The chassis height set will remain constant.
5
Apply the parking brake. Vehicles with trailing axle: lower the trailing axle.
6 7 8 9
293
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 Raising or lowering the chassis Apply the parking brake.
2 Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. 3 4 5 6
Press preselect button 3 or 4. 1 or 2 will light up. To raise the front and rear of the chassis equally, press preselect button 3 and 4. 1 and 2 will light up. Press raise 8 or lower 9 button. The multi-function display shows chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B. Once the required height is achieved, press the STOP button a.
7 8
If there is a stored chassis height: Press button M1 5 or M2 6. The chassis frame will be raised or lowered automatically to the stored height. Driving position Press the driving position button 7. The operating lamp will go out. The chassis will be raised or lowered automatically to the stored height.
i When the normal position is achieved (driving position), the indicator for chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B will go out in the multi-function display.
Risk of accident
G
If the chassis is above the normal position and you do not observe maximum headroom notices when driving through underpasses, there is a danger of the vehicle becoming damaged. Ensure that the vehicle is not higher than the permitted maximum headroom when it is being driven. In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply with national legislation in other countries (also when the vehicle is used for international transport work). The driving and braking properties of the vehicle can be affected if chassis above normal position A or chassis below normal position B is shown in the multi-function display. Only drive the vehicle when the chassis is in the normal position (driving position) S.
9
294
Controls in detail Driving systems Vehicles for high-volume goods transport – raised driving position To improve ride comfort, the chassis can be raised while the vehicle is being driven.
Raising the chassis Press upper section of switch 1. The multi-function display shows raised driving position C. Lowering the chassis Press the lower section of switch 1. The C raised driving position indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled when the driving position is reached.
G
1
If the chassis is in the raised position and you do not observe maximum headroom notices when driving through underpasses, there is a danger of the vehicle becoming damaged. Make sure that the permissible height limit is not exceeded when the suspension is raised. In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). Comply with national legislation in other countries (also when the vehicle is used for international transport work).
2
Risk of accident
1 Raised driving position switch
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
295
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 2
Starting-off aid, three-axle vehicles If the driving wheels slip on snowy or icy road surfaces, activate the starting-off aid.
3
i The starting-off aid with speed limiter is switched off automatically when the speed exceeds approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Not until the speed drops below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) can the starting-off aid be activated again. The starting-off aid without gear selection lock is switched off automatically after 120 seconds and can be switched on again immediately thereafter.
4 5
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension and vehicles with steered leading axle Activating the starting-off aid on 6x2 vehicles Press upper section of starting-off aid switch 1. 2 will flash in the multi-function display as long as the starting-off aid is active.
6 1 Starting-off aid switch 7 8 6x2 vehicles
2 Starting-off aid/trailing axle display
9
296
Controls in detail Driving systems Activating the starting-off aid for 6x2/4 vehicles Press upper section of starting-off aid switch 1. 3 will flash in the multi-function display as long as the starting-off aid is active.
Hendrickson leading axle
i Raise leading axle before pulling away. If reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is too low, run the engine.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2,
1
Press upper section of leading axle switch 1. The multi-function display shows raise leading axle 2.
2 3
Raising leading axle
4 5 6 2 "Raise leading axle" indicator
7 6x2/4 vehicles
3 Starting-off aid/leading axle display
1 Leading axle switch
8 9
297
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 Lowering the leading axle
Trailing axle Raise the trailing axle of an unladen or only partially laden vehicle before starting.
2 3
If reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system is too low, run the engine.
4
Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane:
5 1 Leading axle switch
Study the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer before raising the trailing axle.
6
Press upper section of leading axle switch 1. The indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.
7
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension Raising the trailing axle
1 Trailing axle switch High-volume transport vehicles:
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
The trailing axle cannot be raised.
Press upper section of trailing axle switch 1. The multi-function display shows raise trailing axle/starting-off aid 2.
8 9
298
Controls in detail Driving systems Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle
Raising Nummek trailing axle
1
Press upper section of Nummek trailing axle switch 1. The multi-function display shows trailing axle/starting-off aid 2.
2 3 4
2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display To lower the trailing axle
1 Nummek trailing axle switch
5
Press upper section of trailing axle switch 1. The indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.
6 2 Trailing axle/starting-off aid display
7
Before loading or unloading the vehicle: lower the trailing axle.
8 9
299
Controls in detail Driving systems
1 Lowering the Nummek trailing axle 2 3 4 5 1 Nummek trailing axle switch 6 7
Press the upper section of Nummek trailing axle switch 1. The trailing axle/starting-off aid indicator in the multi-function display will be cancelled.
8 9
300
Telligent® trailing axle The Telligent® trailing axle is a speed-dependent, hydraulically steered trailing axle. It reduces the turning circle of the vehicle and has a positive effect on tyre wear in corners. When the road speed exceeds 30 mph (45 km/h) or when the trailing axle is raised ( page 298), the electronics system locks the wheels in the straightahead position and disengage the trailing axle steering function. When you lower the trailing axle, the Telligent® trailing axle will begin steering the next time the front axle is turned from the straight-ahead position.
Risk of accident
G
When you drive up to kerb stones or drive through tight passages, there is a danger of the tyres or obstacles on the edge of the road becoming damaged. In this case, lock the Telligent® trailing axle steering function.
When you turn the steering lock to position 2, the j indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up. When the indicator lamp goes out, the Telligent® trailing axle is ready for operation. If the indicator lamp does not go out or comes on when the vehicle is in motion and the ZL system abbreviation is shown in the multi-function display, have the trailing axle checked.
Controls in detail Driving systems The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Locking the trailing axle steering function
Releasing the trailing axle steering function
1
Press upper section of trailing axle steering lock switch 1.
2
The electronics system releases the steering lock of the trailing axle. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.
3 4 5
1 Trailing axle steering lock switch Press upper section of trailing axle steering lock switch 1.
6
The electronics system sets the wheels in the straight-ahead position and locks the steering function of the trailing axle. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
7 8 9
301
Controls in detail Good visibility Good visibility
1 2
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
The vehicle is equipped with the following exterior mirror types:
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
electrical, heated exterior mirror on driver's and co-driver's side
Select the exterior mirror by pressing button 1 or 2.
3 manual, heated wide-view mirror on co-
Adjust the exterior mirror in the required direction by pressing button 3.
driver's side
4 manual down-view mirror on co-driver's side
5 The switch unit for adjusting the exterior
mirrors and for the heating function is located in the driver's door.
6 1 To select the left-hand exterior mirror 2 To select the right-hand exterior mirror 3 To adjust the mirrors
7 8 9
302
Controls in detail Good visibility Mirror heating
Switching on mirror heating
With the mirror heating function you can keep the exterior mirrors free of mist and ice in damp and cold weather conditions. The switch and indicator lamp are located in the switch unit of the driver's door.
Press button 2.
1
Indicator lamp 1 lights up.
2
Switching off mirror heating
3
Press button 2.
The 1 indicator lamp shows that the mirror heating is active.
Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
4 5 6
1 Mirror heating indicator lamp 2 To switch mirror heating on/off
7
i The down-view mirror is not heated.
8 9
303
Controls in detail Good visibility
1 2
Windscreen wipers Further information about the use of windscreen wipers can be found in the "Getting started" section ( page 61).
3 Intermittent wipe The intermittent wipe action can be adjusted infinitely from 2 – 20 seconds.
4
Setting the wipe action interval
i
Turn rotary switch to position 5 and wait for 1st wiping action.
If the rotary switch is left in the Ä position for more than 20 seconds, the electronics system will set the interval time to two seconds.
Turn rotary switch to position Ä. Wait period required for interval. Turn rotary switch to position 5 once again. The electronics system stores the time between switching on and off as a new wipe interval.
5 6 7 8 9
304
Controls in detail Good visibility Construction-site vehicles
Windscreen cleaning platform Vehicles with plastic bumper: The steps and the platform for cleaning the windscreen are in the bumper. Risk of accident
G
1
Construction-site vehicles have folding steps to increase the ground clearance.
2
Fold the step down to clean the windscreen.
3
Dirty or loose steps do not provide a secure foothold. You could slip and fall. Keep the steps clean. Secure folding steps before use.
4 5 Construction-site vehicles (example)
6
1 Pin 2 Step
7 8 9
305
Controls in detail Good visibility
1 Folding the step down 2 3
Remove safety clip and withdraw pin 1. Fold step 2 down. Insert the pin and secure.
4 5 6 7 8 9
306
!
Folding the step up
If you drive the vehicle with the step down, the step could become damaged. Always fold the step up before starting the vehicle.
Remove safety clip and withdraw pin 1. Fold step 2 up. Insert the pin and secure.
Controls in detail Climate control Climate control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
307
Controls in detail Climate control
1 2 3 4 5
Function
The vehicle can be equipped with the following air-conditioning systems:
1
Demister vents
2
Swivelling side vents
3
Side vent airflow thumbwheel
Heating, heater air conditioning
309
4
Air conditioning and auxiliary heating switch unit
Automatic air conditioning
315
Auxiliary air-conditioning
323
5
Air-conditioning control panel
Auxiliary heating
327
6
Swivelling centre vents
7
Centre vent airflow thumbwheel
8
Footwell vents
6 7 8 9
308
Page
The systems were designed as combined fresh and recirculating air systems. A particulate filter or reusable construction-site filter is fitted to clean the fresh air, depending on the equipment level.
Heating/heater air conditioning The heating and heater air conditioning are operational when the engine is running. When the engine is warm, the air temperature can be regulated infinitely.
i On vehicles with heater air conditioning, there is an air conditioning system integrated in the heating with manual regulation.
! Switch on the air conditioning at least once a month for about ten minutes to avoid corrosive damage to the refrigerant compressor.
Controls in detail Climate control Control panel for heating/heater-air conditioning
1
Airflow
Air conditioning
1
Switching on the air conditioning system affects the airflow as follows
2
Air distribution, air recirculation
3
Temperature
4
Air-recirculation mode indicator lamp
5
Switches the air conditioning on/ off
6
Switches the auxiliary heating on/off
4
7
Auxiliary heating quick-start menu
5
the air temperature is reduced the air is dehumidified
2 3
the air is additionally filtered
6 7 8 9
309
Controls in detail Climate control To switch off
Warmer Turn the rotary switch 2 to the right.
2
Press air conditioning switch 1 p to switch the air conditioning system off.
3
The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.
1
Regulating temperature
Colder Turn the rotary switch 2 to the left. Colder air will flow out of the heater vents.
4 To switch on
If necessary, press the upper section of the air conditioning switch 1 p.
5 Press air conditioning switch 1 p 6
Warmer air will flow out of the heater vents.
to switch the air conditioning system on.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
7 To regulate the temperature, turn the rotary switch 2 to the relevant position.
8 9
310
Controls in detail Climate control If the cab is too hot before commencing a journey:
Open the side window. Press air conditioning switch 5 p to switch the air conditioning system on. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
Once the hot air has been expelled from the cab: Close the side window. Press rotary switch for air distribution 2 to switch on the air-recirculation mode.
Turn rotary switch for airflow 1 to P.
Once the air in the cab has been cooled sufficiently:
Turn rotary switch for air distribution 2 to Ò.
Press rotary switch for air distribution 2 to switch off the air-recirculation mode.
Turn rotary switch for temperature 3 fully to the left.
Turn rotary switch for airflow 1 to position 1 or 2. Set the temperature using rotary switch 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
311
Controls in detail Climate control
1 Regulating airflow 2
To regulate the airflow, turn rotary switch 1 to the relevant position.
3
i
Higher
When the rotary switch for airflow is at position 0, a small amount of air will still flow out of the vents when the vehicle is in motion.
Turn the rotary switch 1 to the right.
To temporarily prevent outside air from entering the cab, activate the air-recirculation mode ( page 313).
Lower
The flow of air from the heater vents will increase.
Turn the rotary switch 1 to the left. The flow of air from the heater vents will decrease.
4 5 6 7 8 9
312
Controls in detail Climate control Regulating air distribution Rotary switch 1, may be used to adjust the air distribution to different areas of the cab as required.
The following settings are available: P
Air to front and side windows
h
Air to centre vents
Ò
Air to full cab interior
Ó
Air to footwell vents
i Two additional stages between the switch settings allow individual fine adjustment of air distribution.
Air-recirculation mode
1
If unpleasant odours are encountered or a high level of contaminated air, e.g. in traffic or in a tunnel, switch on the air-recirculation mode. In air-recirculation mode, the system will recirculate the air in the cab only. Risk of accident
G
At ambient temperatures below 5 °C, only switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly. Condensation could build up on the windows and impair your vision. You would be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
313
Controls in detail Climate control
1 To switch on
To switch off Press rotary switch 1. The indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode in the control panel 2 will go out.
2 3
Demisting
4
Risk of accident
5 Press rotary switch 1. 6
The indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode in the control panel 2 lights up.
G
Icy windows impair your vision. You could be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.
3 Thumbwheel 4 Side vents If the windows are icy or misted over: Open side vents fully using the thumbwheel 3. Direct swivelling side vents 4 onto the side windows.
7 8 9
314
Controls in detail Climate control Turn rotary switches 1, 2 and 3 in the control panel to position P. A large quantity of fully heated air will flow onto the windscreen and the side windows. In addition on vehicles with heating-heater air conditioning: Press upper section of air conditioning switch 5 p. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. Maintain the setting until the windscreen and the side windows are clear.
1
Automatic air conditioning Automatic air conditioning is ready for operation when the engine is running. It regulates the airflow and air distribution and maintains the set temperature automatically. The system heats or cools the air depending on the temperature setting and the ambient temperature. On vehicles with auxiliary heating, automatic air conditioning switches the auxiliary heating on when the engine is cold.
2 3 4 5 6
i The air conditioning system dehumidifies the air. Misted over windows will be cleared more quickly.
7 8 9
315
Controls in detail Climate control
1 If there are high levels of air contamina-
Automatic air-conditioning control panel
1
Airflow in automatic mode
2
Air distribution in automatic mode
3
Airflow
4
Air distribution, air recirculation
5
Temperature
6
Switches off the air conditioning
7
Charges the auxiliary air conditioning
5
8
Switches the auxiliary heating on/off
6
9
Switches the refrigerator on/off
2
tion, e.g. in traffic congestion or in tunnels, automatic air conditioning switches to airrecirculation mode.
3
The automatic air conditioning system can be supplemented by an auxiliary air conditioning system ( page 323).
4
Warning and indicator lamps
7 8 9
316
a
Air-recirculation mode
b
Air conditioning off
c
Auxiliary air conditioning charging
Controls in detail Climate control Automatic mode
Manual mode
1
Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to position U 1.
In manual mode, all of the automatic air conditioning functions can be regulated manually. The air conditioning system is activated automatically when a lower temperature is selected.
2
Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to position U 2. Set desired temperature using rotary switch 5.
i Automatic mode is activated as soon as the rotary switch for air flow 3 or air distribution 4 is at U. Mercedes-Benz recommends a temperature between 20 – 23 °C for optimum comfort. If you leave the vehicle frequently on hot days, set the temperature to approximately 25 °C.
If you wish to operate the automatic air conditioning in manual mode, the rotary switch for airflow 3 and air distribution 4 should not be at the U position. Vehicles with auxiliary heating:
3 4 5
The automatic air conditioning activates the auxiliary heating if the coolant temperature is too low one of the rotary switches for either airflow or air distribution is on U
6 7 8 9
317
Controls in detail Climate control
1 the rotary switch for temperature is not fully on cold
2 3 4 5
in order to heat up the cab.
i Manual mode is best: on warm days to quickly set the cab temperature before commencing your journey when windows are icy or misted over to quickly clear your vision
AC OFF switch
To switch air conditioning off
If use of the air conditioning system is not desired or not necessary, you can switch it off completely. Environmental note
H
Switching the air conditioning off will not just save you fuel, it is also environmentally friendly.
Press upper section of AC OFF switch 1. The right-hand indicator lamp 2 lights up in the switch.
6
To switch air conditioning on
7
Set AC OFF switch 1 to centre position.
8
The indicator lamps 2 in the AC OFF switch go out.
9
318
Controls in detail Climate control Regulating the temperature
Warmer
Colder
To regulate the temperature in automatic and manual mode, turn the rotary switch for temperature 5 to the relevant position.
Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 to the right.
Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 to the left.
The automatic air conditioning regulates the temperature to the prescribed level.
The automatic air conditioning regulates the temperature to the prescribed level.
i Vehicles with auxiliary heating: If necessary, the automatic air conditioning system will also activate the auxiliary heating so that the set temperature can be achieved.
1
If the cab is too hot before commencing a journey: Open the side window,
2 3 4
Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to level 4,
5
Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to Ò,
6
Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 fully to the left.
7 8 9
319
Controls in detail Climate control
1 Once the hot air has been expelled from the cab:
2 3 4 5 6 7
Close the side window. Press the rotary switch for air distribution 4 to activate air-recirculation mode. Once the air in the cab has been cooled sufficiently: Press the rotary switch for air distribution 4 to deactivate air-recirculation mode. Turn rotary switch for airflow 3 to U 1. Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to U 2. Set desired temperature using rotary switch 5.
8 9
320
Airflow
i The airflow is regulated automatically in automatic mode. To regulate the airflow in manual mode, turn rotary switch 3 to the relevant position.
Higher Turn the rotary switch 3 to the right. The flow of air from the vents will increase. Lower Turn the rotary switch 3 to the left. The flow of air from the vents will decrease.
Controls in detail Climate control Adjusting air distribution
The following settings are available:
i
P
Air to front and side windows
Air distribution is regulated automatically in automatic mode.
Ô
Air to windscreen and side windows and to centre vents
h
Air to centre vents
Ò
Air to full cab interior
Ó
Air to footwell vents
U
Automatic mode
i Additional stages between the switch settings allow individual fine adjustment of air distribution. Rotary switch 1 may be used to adjust the air distribution in manual mode to different areas of the cab according to requirements.
Air-recirculation mode Risk of accident
1
G
At ambient temperatures below 5 °C, only switch the air-recirculation mode on briefly. Condensation could build up on the windows and impair your vision. You would be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.
2 3 4 5
In air-recirculation mode, the system will recirculate the air in the cab only. Automatic air conditioning features a manual and an automatic air-recirculation mode.
6 7 8 9
321
Controls in detail Climate control
1 The automatic mode is always active and 2
detects carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide concentrations in the outside air. When contaminated air is detected, automatic air conditioning will activate the air-recirculation mode.
3 You can also select air-recirculation mode at any time manually.
4
To select air-recirculation mode
5
Press rotary switch for air distribution 1. The 2 indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode lights up in the control panel. To deactivate air-recirculation mode Press rotary switch for air distribution 1. The 2 indicator lamp for air-recirculation mode goes out.
If the windows are icy or misted over:
Demisting
6 Risk of accident
7
G
Icy windows impair your vision. You could be putting yourself and other road users at risk. Do not start the vehicle if the windows are icy or misted over.
8 9
322
1 Thumbwheel 2 Side vents Open side vents fully using the thumbwheel 1. Direct swivelling side vents 2 onto the side windows.
Controls in detail Climate control Turn the rotary switch for airflow 3 to level 4. Turn rotary switch for air distribution 4 to P. Turn rotary switch for temperature 5 fully to the right. A large quantity of fully heated air will flow onto the windscreen and the side windows. Maintain the setting until the windscreen and the side windows are clear.
1
Auxiliary air conditioning Vehicles with automatic air conditioning: Auxiliary air conditioning can be used to cool the cab interior prior to a journey or it can maintain a comfortable temperature in the cab interior during short or long breaks. In addition, auxiliary air conditioning dehumidifies the flow of air in the cab. When the refrigerant accumulator is full, the maximum operating time is approximately eight hours.
2 3 4 5
i Auxiliary air conditioning is ready for operation when the refrigerant accumulator is charged.
6 7 8 9
323
Controls in detail Climate control
1 DaimlerChrysler recommends that the re2
frigerant accumulator should be kept charged during hot weather or for journeys in subtropical and tropical climates. Charging the refrigerant accumulator
3 Approximately four hours is necessary to fully charge the refrigerant accumulator.
i The refrigerant accumulator can only be charged when the engine is running. To prevent freezing of the refrigerant accumulator, the electronics system switches the auxiliary air conditioning off when the engine is started.
4 With the engine running: Press switch 1 u.
5
The left-hand indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up.
6 7 8 9
324
Controls in detail Climate control Auxiliary air conditioning switch The control panel for the auxiliary air conditioning system is in the head area of the lower berth. The rotary switch has 4 positions.
Auxiliary air conditioning off
i
1
1
Night use, cooling duration approximately eight hours
2
2
Day use, cooling duration approximately three hours
If the curtains are closed, heat will not be able to penetrate into the cab and the auxiliary air conditioning will be more effective.
3
To cool cab before starting a journey
4
Rotary switch
AUS
If the berth is being used, efficiency can be improved more by pulling the curtains closed in front of the berth.
3 4
To switch off auxiliary air conditioning To switch on auxiliary air conditioning Turn rotary switch to relevant position. The u indicator lamp for the auxiliary air conditioning in the instrument panel lights up. The auxiliary air conditioning blower blows refrigerated air out of the openings in the cab rear.
Turn rotary switch to position OFF. The u indicator lamp for the auxiliary air conditioning in the instrument panel goes out.
5 6 7 8 9
325
Controls in detail Climate control
1
Construction-site filter
Fresh air filter
For construction-site vehicles, a construction-site filter is available. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Particulate filter
2 The vehicle heating is equipped with a par3
ticulate filter. It filters particles out of the outside air, such as fine dust
4 pollen and spores,
5 before it enters the interior. 6 7
The filter element should be replaced annually at a specialist workshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required.
8 9
326
1 Particulate filter for vehicle heating behind maintenance flap
The filter is designed to filter out large particles found typically on a construction site. The filter can be reused. When the filter becomes soiled, it can be cleaned at a specialist workshop or Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required.
Controls in detail Climate control Auxiliary air conditioning particulate filter
Auxiliary heating
The auxiliary air conditioning has its own air intake. The particulate filter in the air intake filters out particles in the air, such as
Risk of fire and poisoning
dust pollen and spores The filter element should be replaced annually at a specialist workshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required.
G
Operation of the auxiliary heating creates hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of fire and poisoning. Do not operate the auxiliary heating at filling stations in enclosed spaces, such as garages. Vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods: Comply with relevant safety regulations.
The auxiliary heating is designed as either a hot air heater or warm water heater. The hot air heater heats the air flowing into the cab exclusively. The warm water heater heats the coolant which also preheats the engine. Vehicles with automatic air conditioning and auxiliary heating: Automatic air conditioning activates the auxiliary heating even when the vehicle is in motion if the coolant temperature is insufficient to heat the cab.
1 2 3 4 5 6
You can heat up the cab before commencing the journey
7
when the vehicle is in motion when the engine is switched off
8
with the auxiliary heating.
9
327
Controls in detail Climate control
1 The auxiliary heating has the following
To switch on continuous heating
modes of operation:
Page
2 3
Continuous heating
328
Timed heating
332
Preselected heating
334
4 5 6
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
Press upper section of auxiliary heating switch 1 ö.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 1 or
7 8
Continuous heating, hot air heater
1 Auxiliary heating 2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp
1 Auxiliary heating 2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp 3 Auxiliary heating shortcut menu
9
328
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up in the switch. The multi-function display shows the operating data. The auxiliary heating is switched on.
Controls in detail Climate control
i
To set run-on time
Continuous heating operation is possible at any time when the vehicle is in motion.
The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heating.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set runon time.
The auxiliary heating switches to runon mode when, during continuous operation, you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 remove the key from the ignition lock without switching the auxiliary heating off. If you turn the steering lock to position 1 or 2 while the heater is in run-on mode, the auxiliary heating switches to continuous heating.
Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch 1 è.
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. 1 Auxiliary heating switch
Run-on time increases in increments of five minutes. Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. Run-on time decreases in steps of five minutes.
Run-on mode is adjustable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
329
Controls in detail Climate control Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch 1 è.
1 Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.
The multi-function display shows Auxi-
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.
2
liary heat.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set temperature.
3 Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.
4 5
To set the temperature Setting range:
6
from +10 °C to +45 °C or
7
from +50 °F to +110 °F Changing temperature units ( page 205).
8 9
330
1 Auxiliary heating switch
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The temperature increases in 1° increments. Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. The temperature decreases in 1° steps.
Controls in detail Climate control Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set heating time.
i To accelerate the setting procedure, press and hold down the button on the multi-function steering wheel. Vehicles with warm water heater/ automatic air conditioning: You can only set the heating temperature using the rotary switch for temperature in the heater control panel ( page 316). To set the heating time
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 2 3
The heating time increases in increments of five minutes. Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 hrs Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch 1 è. The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heat.
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
4
The heating decreases in steps of five minutes.
5
i
6
To accelerate the setting procedure, press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7 8 9
1 Auxiliary heating switch
331
Controls in detail Climate control
1 Timed heating 2
To switch on heating timer
The heating timer allows operation of the auxiliary heating when the key is not in the steering lock. The auxiliary heating will operate for the period specifies.
3
i
4
The procedure for setting the temperature and the heating duration is the same as for continuous heating. Setting temperature ( page 330).
5
1 Auxiliary heating 2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp
6
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
7
Press upper section of auxiliary heating switch 1 ö. Indicator lamp 2 in the switch will light up. The multi-function display shows the operating data. The auxiliary heating is switched on.
8 9
332
15 minutes operating time remaining (example)
i In timer mode, the heating time previously set determines the time the auxiliary heating switches on. The remaining period of operation is the same as the auxiliary heating's remaining operating time. It can be changed during operation.
Controls in detail Climate control To change remaining time Setting range: 0:05 h to 2:00 h
The auxiliary heating is in timer or preselect heating mode: Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch 1 è. The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heat.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set remaining time. 1 Auxiliary heating switch
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.
1
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.
2
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
3
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.
4
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
5
The remaining time increases in increments of five minutes.
6
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7
The remaining time decreases in steps of five minutes.
8 9
333
Controls in detail Climate control
1 Preselected heating 2 3
Risk of fire and poisoning
G
Operation of the auxiliary heating creates hot and poisonous gases. There is a risk of fire and poisoning. Do not operate the auxiliary heating
4
at filling stations in enclosed spaces, such as garages.
5
Vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods: Comply with relevant safety regulations.
6 7
With the preselected heating mode, the auxiliary heating can be switched on in the absence of the driver: at the programmed time
8 for the set period of heating operation 9
334
This allows the cab to be warmed up before the journey starts. Two memory slots are available for preselected heating operation ( page 335).
i Vehicles transporting hazardous goods: Preselected heating operation is not possible.
i In preselect mode, the heating time previously set determines the switchon time of the auxiliary heating. The remaining period of operation is the same as the auxiliary heating's remaining heating time. It can be changed during operation. The procedure for setting the temperature and the heating time is the same as for continuous heating. Setting heating time ( page 331). Setting temperature ( page 330). The procedure for setting the remaining time is the same as for timed heating. Changing remaining time ( page 333).
Controls in detail Climate control Activating/programming preselect heating mode
1
i
2
Programming is not possible when the auxiliary heating is in operation.
3
Programming is still possible when the key has been removed from the steering lock. A programmed pre-setting will activate the auxiliary heating only once. For repeated activation, the preselection should be reprogrammed or reactivated.
4 1 Auxiliary heating switch Press the lower section of auxiliary heating switch 1 è. The multi-function display shows Auxiliary heat.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set memory.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Timer: 1 or Timer: 2. Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the setting and to progress to setting the day.
5 6 7 8 9
335
Controls in detail Climate control
1 Press the æ or ç button on the 2 3 4 5
multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the day required.
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the setting and to progress to setting the hour.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the desired minutes.
i The Timer: --, switches the auxiliary heating on at the preset time regardless of the day of the week.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel.
To accelerate the setting procedure, press and hold down the button.
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.
6
To set the hours
7
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the desired hour.
8 9
336
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel to accept the setting and to progress to setting the minutes.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.
Controls in detail Climate control Deactivating preselect function
Switching off auxiliary heating
Call up the auxiliary heating menu ( page 335).
The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. The multi-function display shows
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Set memory. Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Timer: off. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next menu.
Press the upper section of auxiliary heating switch 1.
Auxiliary heating has been switched off.
1 2 3 4
All modes of operation
5
1 Auxiliary heating 2 Auxiliary heating indicator lamp 3 Auxiliary heating menu shortcut
6 7
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
8
The driver information system accepts the selected settings and continues onto the next function.
9
337
Controls in detail Open-air Open-air
1
Opening and closing the side windows
Risk of injury
The side windows open and close electri-
Always keep an eye on the closing operation of the side windows to see that no-one becomes caught. Release the switch if danger threatens.
2 cally. Switches for the driver's and co-driv3
G
er's door are located in the driver's doors. A switch for the co-driver's door is located in the co-driver's door.
4
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just a short period.
5
Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could injure themselves.
6
1 To close left-hand side window 2 To open left-hand side window 3 To close right-hand side window 4 To open right-hand side window
7 8 9
338
Controls in detail Open-air Opening left-hand/right-hand side window Press switch 2 or 4 for approximately one second. The left or right-hand side window will open fully.
i Pressing the switch briefly will interrupt the motion of the window. Opening left-hand/right-hand window partially Press switch 2 or 4 briefly.
Closing left-hand/right-hand window
i
Vehicles with central locking:
Pressing the switch briefly will interrupt the motion of the window.
Press and hold switch 1 or 3 until the window is at the required height.
1
Closing left-hand/right-hand window fully
Protection against entrapment stops the closing procedure of the window concerned if an obstacle prevents complete closure.
Vehicles with enhanced central locking system:
A locking procedure closes any opened windows.
Press switch 1 or 3 for approximately one second.
2 3 4 5
The left or right-hand window will close fully.
6
The left or right-hand window will open while the switch is being pressed.
7 8 9
339
Controls in detail Open-air
1
Opening and closing the sliding/ tilting sunroof The sliding/tilting sunroof opens and clos-
2 es electrically. The switches are located in 3 4
the switch unit above the windscreen and in the switch unit of the lower berth. The sliding/tilting sunroof can be darkened for breaks. A screen prevents insects from entering the cab if required.
Risk of injury
G
When closing the sliding/tilting sunroof, ensure that nobody becomes trapped in it. Release the switch if danger threatens. Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for just a short period. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could injure themselves.
5 To raise Press switch 1 briefly.
6
The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into the raised position.
7
To open
8 1 To open 2 To close
9
Press switch 1 and then release. The sliding/tilting sunroof moves into the raised position. Press and hold switch 1 until the roof is opened to the required position.
340
To close Press and hold switch 2 until the roof is closed to the required position. To close sliding/tilting sunroof fully Press switch 2 briefly. The sliding/tilting sunroof will close fully.
Controls in detail Open-air Disabling the sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock
i Pressing the switch briefly will interrupt the motion of the sunroof.
Press switch 1. The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. The lock is deactivated.
Protection against entrapment stops the closing procedure of the sunroof if an obstacle prevents complete closure.
To switch on sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock Vehicles with enhanced central locking system: The lock switch prevents automatic closing of the sliding/tilting sunroof by the enhanced central locking system. This is wise e.g. to maintain air circulation in the cab when it is locked up.
2 3
Vehicles with enhanced central locking system: A locking procedure will close the sliding/tilting sunroof if it is open.
1
4 1 Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock Press switch 1.
5
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up. The next time the vehicle is locked, the sliding/tilting sunroof will remain open.
6
i
7
Once enabled, the closure lock is active for just one locking procedure with the key removed from the ignition lock.
8 9
341
Controls in detail Open-air
1 Insect screen and tinting 2
The insect screen is located in the front of the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening. The tinting screen is located in the rear of the sliding/tilting sunroof in the opening.
Pull the tinting or insect screen to the other side of the opening and hook in place.
Opening and closing the tilting roof The tilting roof opens and closes electrically. The switches are located in the switch unit above the windscreen and in the switch unit of the lower berth.
To close
3
Unhook tinting or insect screen. A retractor will draw the tinting or insect screen back.
4 5
To open
1 Insect screen 2 Tinting screen
6 1 To open 2 To close
7 8 9
342
Controls in detail Open-air To open
Opening and closing the roof hatch
To open
1
Press and hold switch 1 until the tilting roof is opened to the required height.
The roof hatch can be opened to three different positions: Tilted at the front
Apply pressure to the roof hatch and push it to the desired position.
2
To close
Completely raised
To close
Press and hold switch 2 until the tilting roof is closed.
Tilted at the rear
3
Grab hold of both handles 1.
The 3 positions allow different levels of ventilation.
Pull roof hatch downwards until the locking mechanism audibly engages.
Grab hold of both handles 1.
4 5 6 7 8
1 Handles
9
343
Controls in detail Features Features
1
Ashtray
To remove insert
Cigarette lighter
Lift up insert on one side and remove from retainer.
2
To fit insert Place insert in retainer.
3
To close the ashtray
4
Hold cover plate by grip and close.
5 1 Cover plate 2 Insert
6 To open ashtray Hold cover plate at grip and open.
7 8 9
344
1 Cigarette lighter
i The socket for the cigarette lighter can also be used as a power source for electrical equipment up to a maximum of 240 W. Other sockets ( page 356).
Controls in detail Features
Risk of injury, fire and accident G You could burn yourself on a hot cigarette lighter. Only hold the cigarette lighter by its handle. If children are travelling with you, remove the cigarette lighter from its socket. They could injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire. The priority is to focus your attention on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter if the traffic situation permits.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Push cigarette lighter button until it engages. When the spiral is glowing, the button will spring out automatically.
1
Cab stowage compartments (interior) Risk of injury
G
2
Do not carry heavy objects, e.g. bottles, in the stowage compartments.
3
To ensure that occupants are not injured by falling objects in the cab as a result of sudden deceleration:
4
all stowage compartments must be closed and locked when the vehicle is in motion,
5
the load in each stowage compartment should not exceed
6
8 kg above the windscreen with cover 4 kg above the windscreen without cover 2 kg above the doors
7 8 9
345
Controls in detail Features
interior are located:
Stowage compartment above windscreen
above the windscreen
L cab/MEGASPACE cab:
1 Cab stowage compartments in the vehicle 2
above the driver's and co-driver's doors
5
Spring pressure will hold the cover in the open position.
behind the driver's and co-driver's seats beneath the berths ( page 348)
To close stowage compartment
in the side trim behind the driver's and co-driver's seats
Swing the cover down until it audibly engages.
in the instrument panel
6
i
7
Drinks holders for the driver and codriver are located in the instrument panel.
8 9
346
Press together both release buttons on the catch in the direction of the arrows. Lift stowage compartment cover upwards.
3 in the driver's and co-driver's doors 4
To open stowage compartment
Stowage compartment above windscreen (example)
1 Catch
Controls in detail Features Engine tunnel compartment
To fold out table
Cool box for mounting on engine tunnel
1
Pull table 1 upwards and fold out. To fold table away
2
Fold up table 1 and push it in downwards.
3
To open drawer
4
Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and pull out drawer. 1 Table 2 Upper drawer handle 3 Lower drawer handle
! Do not place more than 12 kg on the table
To close drawer Pull handle 2 or 3 upwards and push drawer in to the stop.
1 Cool box lid
5
To open cool box Pull handle of sliding compartment upwards and pull out.
6
Fold out cool box lid.
7
30 kg in the drawers
8
Read also the manufacturer's operating instructions.
9
347
Controls in detail Features
1 To close cool box Fold away cool box lid.
2 Pull sliding compartment handle upwards and push in to the stop.
3 4 5 6
i Please comply with the manufacturer's operating, care and maintenance instructions for the cool box.
! Switch the cool box off before tilting the cab back and wait for ten minutes after the cab has been tilted back before switching it on.
7 8 9
348
Cab stowage compartments (exterior) L cab The stowage compartments are on the sides of the cab, above the wheel arches. Both stowage compartments can be accessed from the outside via the exterior flap and from the inside via the stowage compartment flaps beneath the berth. The stowage compartment lighting will be switched on whether the stowage compartments are opened from the outside or from the inside.
1 Release lever in entrance To open stowage compartment Pull release lever 1 once and release. The exterior flap will open until restrained by the retaining hook.
Controls in detail Features Pull release lever 1 once more and release. The exterior flap is released. Open exterior flap by swinging it towards the entrance until the flap engages on the limit stop. To close stowage compartment Close exterior flap until it audibly engages. MEGASPACE cab Upper stowage compartments
Lower exterior stowage compartments
1
The two stowage compartments are at the sides of the cab, above the wheel arches.
2
The two lower stowage compartments can be accessed only via the exterior flap.
3
When the stowage compartments are opened, the stowage compartment lighting will be switched on.
4 MEGASPACE cab stowage compartment
1 Lower exterior stowage compartment release lever 2 Lower exterior flap
5 6
The two upper stowage compartments are opened and closed in the same way as the those in the L cab ( page 348).
7 8 9
349
Controls in detail Features
1 Opening exterior stowage compartment To close exterior stowage compartment Open the driver's or co-driver's door.
2 Pull release lever 1 once and release. 3 4
The exterior flap will open until restrained by the retaining hook. Pull release lever 1 once more and release. The exterior flap is released. Swing exterior flap 2 upwards.
5 Press the hinge joint up. 6
Swing the exterior flap down. The hinge joint will engage.
Swing exterior flap 2 upwards. The hinge joint will disengage. Swing exterior flap 2 down until you hear it engage in the lock.
Telephone The telephone bracket for the hands-free equipment is located above the windscreen on the right of the audio unit. If you wish to use the hands-free device, the bracket must be fitted with a phone holder compatible with your mobile telephone. For further information contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. A detailed description of how to assemble the phone holder and the mobile telephone is included with the phone holder.
! Bank cards, credit cards or other cards with magnetic strips should not be brought in the vicinity of the telephone bracket. The magnet installed in the bracket could otherwise delete or alter the information stored on the cards.
7 8 9
350
Controls in detail Features You can operate your telephone using the ì and í buttons on the multi-function steering wheel once it is fitted in the phone holder.
i
Empty telephone bracket
1
When you remove the key from the steering lock, the telephone will remain on for approximately 60 minutes.
2
If you make or receive a call within this time, the telephone switches off 60 minutes from the end of use.
3
The hands-free capability is not guaranteed, if you use a commercially available phone holder.
4 1 Connector 2 Telephone bracket
1 Telephone bracket 2 Connector 3 Microphone
5
If no phone holder is fitted:
6
Insert connector 1 in telephone bracket 2.
7 8 9
351
Controls in detail Features
1 Making/receiving calls with the hands-
When the telephone is switched off, the multi-function display will show Telephone off.
free device
2 3 4 5 6
Risk of accident
G
When the telephone is switched on but the PIN has not yet been entered, the multi-function display will show Enter telephone PIN.
Operating mobile telephones that have an aerial inside the vehicle can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic systems. As a result, the operating reliability and road safety is at considerable risk. Only use the telephone with a permanently installed hands-free system and if the traffic conditions allow it. Attention would otherwise be drawn away too much.
Enter PIN using the mobile telephone keypad and confirm. 1 Network operator logo 2 Network signal display
The telephone will search for a cellular network.
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied
When the network logo 1 and network reception bar 2 are shown in the multi-function display, the mobile telephone is ready for operation.
Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. Press the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7
The multi-function display switches to the telephone menu.
8 9
352
Controls in detail Features To dial a new number Enter the telephone number on the telephone keypad. Press the í button on the multifunction steering wheel to dial the number. To receive a call
Press the í button on the multifunction steering wheel to take the call. The multi-function display will show: The number or call or the entry from your personal telephone book the call duration
If the phones rings, the multi-function display will show:
To finish a call
1
Press the ì button to finish the call. The driver information system returns to the basic menu screen for the telephone.
3 To reject a call It is possible to reject a call. Press the ì button to reject a call. The driver information system returns to the menu that was active before the call was made, e.g. Monitoring info menu.
Call Telephone number of caller (as long as this has not been suppressed)
2
4 5 6 7
Taken call
8 9
353
Controls in detail Features
1 To select a number from the telephone book
The mobile telephone must be ready for
2 operation. 3
i New numbers should be entered using the telephone keypad.
When the Please wait event message goes out, the transfer of data is complete. Press button j or k on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the required entry.
The driver information system selects the relevant number. When a connection is made, the name and number of the person you are calling is shown in the display as well as the duration of the call.
4 Press the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
5
The driver information system changes to the telephone menu.
6 Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
7 8
The driver information system imports the telephone book entries that are stored on the SIM card or in the telephone. This can take up to 30 seconds. The multi-function display shows Please wait.
9
354
Duration of call Telephone book entry
Press the í button on the multifunction steering wheel.
If no connection is made, the driver information system stores the selected number in the redial memory.
Controls in detail Features Telephone book quick find function
Last number redial
Press the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The driver information system stores the most recently dialled numbers in the order they were entered in the redial memory.
The driver information system changes to the telephone menu.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the entry required. Press the í button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Press and hold button j or k on the multi-function steering wheel.
1 2 3
The driver information system selects the relevant number.
The driver information system switches from one initial letter to the next.
4
When the display shows the initial letter you are looking for, release the button.
5
The display will show the first entry beginning with the letter you have chosen. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows the entry required.
Redial memory entry
6
Press the í button on the multifunction steering wheel.
7
The driver information system selects the first entry in the redial memory.
8 9
355
Controls in detail Features
1 2
Sockets The vehicle can be equipped with up to 4 sockets. Page 24 V/0 A socket in ashtray
356
24 V/10 A socket in dashboard
356
24 V/10 A socket in battery tray
358
5
12 V/15 A socket in dashboard
357
6
Voltage transformer
3 4
7
12 V/8 A
358
12 V/15 A
358
8 9
356
24 V/10 A socket in ashtray
24 V/10 A socket in dashboard
The housing for the cigarette lighter in the ashtray is also a socket. The socket is designed for equipment with a maximum power draw of 240 W.
The socket is located in the stowage compartment above the ashtray. The socket is designed for equipment with a maximum power draw of 240 W.
1 24 V/10 A socket
2 24 V/10 A socket
Controls in detail Features 12 V/15 A socket in dashboard
To switch on the 12 V socket
To switch off the 12 V socket
The socket is located in the dashboard on the co-driver's side. It can be switched on and off. Power is supplied through a 12 V/ 15 A voltage transformer.
Press the upper section of the 12 V switch.
Press the lower section of the 12 V switch.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
1
The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.
It is designed for the use of equipment with a maximum power draw of 180 W.
2 3 4 5 6 7
3 12 V/15 A socket
8 9
357
Controls in detail Features
1 24 V/10 A socket in battery tray All vehicles except tractor units:
Voltage transformer 12 V/8 A voltage transformer
2 The socket is designed for the use of an in- The vehicle features a 12 V/8 A voltage spection lamp. It is located on the righthand side in the battery tray.
3 It is designed for the use of equipment with a maximum power draw of 240 W.
transformer as standard for the use of
i
CB radio equipment
The voltage transformer is intended to supply power to the socket only. The connection of further equipment to the 12 V source is not permitted. Further information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
12 V audio equipment
5
!
6 7 4 24 V/10 A socket (example)
8 9
358
The voltage transformer supplies the 12 V/15 A socket with power. It is switched on or off with the 12 V switch ( page 22).
Radio equipment Telephone/fax machine
4
12 V/15 A voltage transformer
The voltage transformer is intended for the operation of this equipment only. The connection of further equipment to the 12 V source is not permitted. Further information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Controls in detail Features To switch the audio equipment on/off
Operating audio equipment
You can switch the audio equipment on or off using switch 2 in the berth switch unit.
The buttons on the multi-function steering wheel 1 and the audio equipment switch in the berth switch unit 2 may be used to operate the basic functions of the following audio equipment
Press and hold switch 2 y for approximately three seconds.
Truckline CC30 Truckline CC70 Truckline CD70 You must select the Audio menu to choose a radio station ( page 361)
1 Multi-function steering wheel buttons 2 Audio equipment switches in the berth switch unit
operate the CD player ( page 363)
i
operate the cassette player ( page 364)
Commercially available audio equipment cannot be operated using the buttons in the multi-function steering wheel or the audio equipment switches in the berth switch unit. For further information contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
using the buttons of the multi-function steering wheel.
1 2
If the radio is switched off, it will be switched on.
3
If the radio is switched on, it will be switched off.
4
i
5
When you are seated in the driver's seat, you can only switch the equipment on or off at the radio. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
6 7 8 9
359
Controls in detail Features
1 To adjust the volume 2
You can adjust the volume of the audio equipment with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel and the audio equipment switch in the berth switch unit.
3 With multi-function steering wheel buttons
4 Press the æ button. The volume will increase
5 Press button ç. The volume will decrease.
i You can still adjust the volume of the audio equipment even if the audio menu is not shown in the multi-function display. If the driver information system shows the ? symbol in the multi-function display, you can use the æ and ç buttons on the multi-function steering wheel to make a selection or adjustment. The volume control then no longer works.
With the audio equipment switch in the berth switch unit
Press switch $ briefly. The volume will increase
6
Press switch y briefly. The volume will decrease.
7 8 9
360
Controls in detail Features Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
To select a radio station When you have selected the audio menu, use the arrow buttons to
If the radio station search function is active, the audio equipment will search for the next or previous station in the selected frequency band.
activate the station search function change between stored radio stations
i The arrow button function in radio mode can be adjusted in the Configuration sub menu of the Settings menu ( page 362). You can only store new radio stations at the audio equipment. The audio equipment can also be used in the normal way.
If the store function is active, the audio equipment will change to the next or previous stored radio station. 1 Frequency and stored station number 2 Radio traffic information1 3 Frequency or station name1
1 2 3 4 5
Switch on the audio equipment. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
6
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Audio.
7 8 9
1. On RDS only
361
Controls in detail Features
1 To set the function of the arrow buttons
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Configuration.
2
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Arrow buttons in radio mode.
in radio mode
3
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight is on Station search.
4 5 6
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Settings.
7 8 9
362
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight is on Memory.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the next menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu.
Controls in detail Features Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
To operate the CD player Audio equipment: Truckline CD70
The CD player selects the next track.
Switch on the audio equipment and select the CD player. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
Press the k button on the multifunction steering wheel. The CD player selects the previous track.
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Audio.
1 2 3 4
1 Current CD – CD changer operation 2 Radio traffic information1 3 Current track
5 6 7 8 9
1. On RDS only
363
Controls in detail Features
2 Once you have selected the audio menu,
Switch on the audio equipment and select the cassette player. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
3 to fast forward or reverse the cassette
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Audio.
1 To operate the cassette player Audio equipment: Truckline CC30 or CC70 you can operate the cassette player using the arrow buttons
4
to the next or previous track in cassette search mode. to fast forward or reverse the cassette in wind/rewind mode
5
1 Cassette operation 2 Radio traffic information1 3 Cassette side
6 7 8 9 1. On RDS only
364
Controls in detail Features Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. If the rewind/wind function is active, the cassette player will rewind 8 or wind 9 the cassette. If the track search function is active, the cassette player will rewind 0 to the start of the current track or fast forward to the beginning of the next track ß.
To set the function of the arrow buttons in cassette mode
Press button è or ÿ on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Settings.
1 2
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is on Configuration. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until the multi-function display shows Arrow buttons in cassette mode.
3 4
i
5
The audio equipment will stop the winding function when
6
the end of the cassette, the start of the current track or the next track is detected
7
you press the arrow button again
8 9
365
Controls in detail Features
1 Press the æ button on the multi-
function steering wheel. The highlight is on Track search.
2 Press the ç button on the multi3
function steering wheel. The highlight is on Fast forward and Rewind.
4 5 6 7 8 9
366
Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the setting and to move on to the next menu. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the settings and to move on to the next function in the configuration menu.
Operation Driving tips Refuelling Trailer/semitrailer 1 Wind deflector Tippers Tyres and wheels
2 3
Winter operation Care 4 Maintenance
5 6 7 8 9
367
Operation Driving tips Driving tips
1 The "Operation" section contains detailed information about operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
Risk of accident
G
Distribute the load on the vehicle uniformly. Avoid excessive loads on one side. The vehicle's driving, braking and steering characteristics vary with the type of load, the weight and the centre of gravity of the load. Secure loads if necessary.
2 3 4
Excessive loading at the rear will have a particularly adverse effect on the vehicle's handling characteristics. For this reason, greater care and attention are called for when driving with a load at the rear.
5 6
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads, the wheel loads (½ axle load) or the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight. There is otherwise the risk of damage to tyres, the chassis frame and axles.
7 8 9
368
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: The Telligent® automatic gearshift switches off automatically at idling speed (approximately 550 rpm). On uphill or downhill slopes, do not allow the engine speed to drop to idling speed (approximately 550 rpm).
! When driving the vehicle on rough terrain, ensure that the drive wheels always have sufficient grip. Vehicles without ASR: Do not allow the drive wheels to spin. There is otherwise a risk of damage to the differential. Switch on the differential locks. During the journey, check the instrument readings periodically.
Operation Driving tips
Environmental note
H
Regular vehicle maintenance is one of the preconditions for moderate fuel consumption.
Fuel consumption Fuel consumption depends on the vehicle design the driving style the operating conditions the type of fuel used (diesel fuel, FAME fuel)
i Fuel consumption values can be called up in the Trip computer menu in the driver's information system ( page 166).
Vehicle design
Operating conditions
Tyre size, tyre tread, tyre pressures, tyre condition
trailer towing and tipper operation
Body, wind deflector
dense urban traffic and frequent short journeys
Gear ratios in the drive train Additional equipment (air conditioning, auxiliary heating, PTO, viscous fan clutch)
1
mountainous terrain
2
vehicle load operation when stationary
4
frequent cold starts
Driving style
i
To keep fuel consumption low,
As a result of the numerous superstructure variants, it is impossible to provide a precise fuel consumption value in these Operating Instructions.
avoid frequent acceleration and braking anticipate road and traffic conditions
3
maintain an economical engine speed range
5 6 7 8 9
369
Operation Driving tips
1 2 3
Engine oil consumption When the engine is run in, oil consumption may reach 0.5% of the fuel consumption recorded in actual operating circumstances. A longer distance covered and more arduous operating conditions could lead to certain vehicles exceeding this value.
4
The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km) Running the vehicle in It is of decisive importance for the engine not to be subjected to its full rated load during the running-in period. Run the vehicle in gently. Drive at varying road and engine speeds. Avoid high engine speeds. Do not drive any more than ¾ of the maximum road speed for each gear.
5
Change gear in good time. Do not shift down to brake the vehicle.
6 7 8 9
370
After a distance of 1,250 miles (2,000 km), you can gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speed. Wheel nuts Risk of accident
G
On new vehicles there is the risk that the wheel nuts could work loose if they are not tightened. The wheel nuts must be tightened after driving 30 miles (50 km). Observe the notes on page 392 and torques on page 577.
Operation Driving tips After dark, the vehicle must have its parking lamps on if it is standing on the public After driving on a wet surface, particuhighway. In urban areas, it is also possible larly if road salt has been spread, apply to attach reflective overnight parking the brakes firmly before parking the veboards. Observe the legal requirements. hicle. The heat generated will help to dry the brake discs. The prevents corrosion Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: If in an emergency it is necessary to of the brake discs. park the vehicle without the parking brake applied, engage a gear. Chock the vehiParking cle's wheels additionally to prevent it from Always stop the engine with the parking rolling away. brakes applied. For notes on applying the parking brake ( page 130). ! When parking the vehicle, do not allow When the vehicle is parked, it must be prethe wheels to mount the kerb. This vented from rolling away by chocking at could damage the tyres or steering least one wheel. Carrying a wheel chock in components. an easily accessible position on the vehicle is a legal requirement.
i
Brakes ®
The vehicle is equipped with a Telligent brake system. For notes on braking with anti-lock protection ( page 84).
Activate the continuous brake to make full use of the engine braking effect on long downhill sections ( page 261). Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: If the continuous brake is selected, the transmission will automatically shift down to the next appropriate gear, depending on the road and engine speed.
! Do not park the vehicle immediately after the brakes have been subjected to severe loads, such as driving through valleys. Drive on a short distance to allow the airflow to cool the brakes down.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
371
Operation Refuelling Refuelling
1 2 3 4
Risk of injury/explosion
G
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when fuel is being handled. Switch off the auxiliary heating when refuelling to prevent fuel vapours from igniting in the auxiliary heating exhaust system. Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
5 6
Your health is at risk: if your skin or eyes come into direct contact with fuel if you inhale fuel vapours
Clean affected areas of skin with soap and water. If fuel comes into contact with the eyes, wash them thoroughly with clean water and consult a doctor. Change out of soiled clothing without delay. If fuel is swallowed, a doctor should be consulted immediately. Keep fuel away from children.
Refuelling the vehicle from drums or canisters could introduce impurities into the fuel system. This can lead to fuel system malfunctions. Filter the fuel before filling the tank.
7
! Do not add bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel), petrol or fuel additives to diesel fuel.
8 9
372
You will find information about fuel in the "Technical data" section ( page 562).
i Check the fuel prefilter with heated water separator regularly for condensation.
Environmental note
H
Unless they are handled properly, fuels constitute a risk both for people and for the environment. Fuels must not be allowed to get into the sewage system, surface waters, the ground water or the ground itself.
Operation Trailer/semitrailer Trailer/semitrailer Trailer/semitrailer coupling
Coupling up
The trailer tow hitch or semitrailer coupling is one of the vehicle components with particular importance for road safety. Please comply precisely with the manufacturer's operating, care and maintenance instructions. For further information, also see page 416. Risk of accident and injury
G
Risk of trailer breaking away. Check longitudinal play in the trailer tow hitch every day. To do this, move the towbar body of the hitch firmly forwards and back. Do not hold the coupling jaws. No longitudinal play is permitted. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it eliminated at once.
Towing semitrailers Before coupling (if "one-man operation" is possible) make sure that the semitrailer plate is at least 50 mm lower than the upper edge of the coupling plate. Reverse and couple up the semitrailer. After coupling up a semitrailer, lock the levers to prevent unauthorised operation which could lead to the coupling becoming detached. Connect cables and compressed-air lines ( page 375).
!
1
Driving could cause the centre of the mudguard to come into contact with the tyres. In order to prevent damage during operation with a semitrailer, DaimlerChrysler recommends that the middle mudguard is removed, provided this is legally permitted.
2 3 4
Risk of accident and injury
G
Objects thrown up by the road surface could injure or endanger other road users. For this reason, make sure that the rear wheels are protected by mudguards when the semitrailer tractor vehicle is driven without a trailer. If various semitrailers are towed, too much play could be present between the kingpin and the coupling plate. This is not permissible. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
5 6 7 8 9
373
Operation Trailer/semitrailer
1 Truck/trailer combination 2
Before coupling to a trailer, apply the parking brake and release the service brake.
3
Chock the trailer's rear wheels to prevent it from rolling away.
4
Check that the coupling tracer of the trailer coupling is secured correctly in the appropriate locating pin or safety knob.
7
G
Caution should be taken when guiding the rail since there is a risk drawbar impact as a result of an uncontrolled movement.
Reverse and couple up the trailer.
8
Nobody should be present between the vehicle and the trailer as the vehicle is reversed towards the trailer.
Do not uncouple trailers with overrun brakes when the brakes have been applied by the overrun mechanism.
Position the towbar at the height of the trailer coupling.
5 6
G
Do not allow the trailer to run onto the tractor vehicle when coupling.
The unbraked front axle of the trailer must be able to turn.
Risk of accident and injury
Risk of accident and injury
Trailer tow hitch (example)
1 Locating pin for coupling pin Connect cables and compressed-air lines ( page 375).
There is a risk that the trailer may break away. Check the trailer coupling regularly for longitudinal play. To do this, move the towbar body of the hitch firmly forwards and back. Do not hold the coupling jaws. No longitudinal play is permitted. If any longitudinal play is detected, have it eliminated at once. Check the tightness of the trailer coupling securing bolts at the end cross-member of the vehicle's frame regularly, and retighten if necessary.
9
374
Operation Trailer/semitrailer
Risk of accident and injury
G
There is a risk that the trailer may break away. Clean the trailer coupling regularly as stated in the manufacturer's instructions. Check the towbar mountings and end nut.
2
Connecting cables, compressed-air and hydraulic lines
3
Vehicles intended to carry containers or demountable bodies: Objects thrown up by the road surface could injure or endanger other road users. For this reason, make sure that the front and rear wheels are protected by mudguards when the vehicle is driven without a trailer. Vehicles with centre-axle trailer: No load is to be carried on trailers of this type if there is no load on the towing vehicle.
1
Vehicles with rear-mounted loading crane: Centre-axle trailers are not to be towed.
4 Connections for semitrailer (example)
Connections for semitrailer (example)
1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow) 2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red) 3 Blank socket 4 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin 5 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin
5 6 7 8 9
375
Operation Trailer/semitrailer
1 On semitrailer tractor vehicles with sidemounted wind deflectors:
2 3
Before connecting or disconnecting the compressed-air lines and cables, swing the right-hand wind deflector inwards ( page 381).
!
4 5 6
Semitrailer tractor vehicles may only tow semitrailers with a 24 V lighting system. Connecting the cable brake system When driving with the semitrailer tractor vehicle
Route cables, compressed-air and hydraulic lines so that they can yield when the vehicle is cornered without incurring tension, kinking or abrasion.
without a semitrailer
Before connecting electrical cables, check that the voltage rating of the consumer equipment on the trailer/ semitrailer is correct.
with a semitrailer without ABS:
with a semitrailer not equipped with an electronically controlled brake system or Insert the connector cable into the "blank" socket. Check the function checks of the Telligent® brake system in the multifunction display after connecting the connector cable ( page 77).
7 8 9
376
When driving with the semitrailer tractor vehicle with a semitrailer with ABS or an electronic brake system: Remove the connector cable from the "blank" socket and insert it in the trailer's connector. Connecting the cable voltage supply to the trailer/semitrailer Remove the connector cable from the "blank" socket and insert it in the trailer's connector. Check that the lighting on the trailer/ semitrailer, including turn signals and brake lamps, is clean and in working order.
Operation Trailer/semitrailer Connecting the compressed-air lines
Disconnecting the compressed-air lines
Connect the brake line coupling head (yellow).
Risk of accident and injury
Connect the reservoir line coupling head (red).
After connecting the compressed-air lines to the trailer, adjust the brake pressure regulator (if installed). After pulling away, check the operation of the trailer/semitrailer brake system.
G
2
Always keep to this order of work when detaching the coupling heads, otherwise the trailer brake will be released and the unbraked trailer could be inadvertently set in motion.
i The shutoff valves in the coupling heads open automatically when the connection is made.
1
3 4
Connections for trailer (example)
1 Brake line hose coupling (yellow) 2 Reservoir line hose coupling (red) 3 24 V (12 V) connector, 15-pin 4 ABS/BS connector, 7-pin 5 Duomatic coupling Reservoir line and brake line
Secure the towing vehicle by applying the parking brake ( page 62).
5
Apply the parking brake on the trailer/ semitrailer. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
6
Detach the reservoir line (red).
7
The brakes of the trailer/semitrailer will be applied automatically.
8 9
377
Operation Trailer/semitrailer
1 In addition, apply the mechanical park2 3
ing brake on the trailer/semitrailer. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
Detach the brake line coupling head (yellow).
4
Trailer/semitrailer monitoring Trailer or semitrailer with telematics complying with ISO 11992 and corresponding sensor system:
Minimum and maximum values for the load monitoring can be programmed in the "Settings" menu ( page 189).
Depending on the equipment fitted, the trailer/semitrailer monitoring system is able to monitor the following functions on a maximum of 5 trailers/semitrailers simultaneously:
The current load data and the identification number (VIN) of the trailer/semitrailer can be called up in the "Monitoring info" menu ( page 161).
Load temperature
5
Load pressure Load liquid quantity
6
Automatic bulb check.
i 7
Observe the legal requirements regarding the permissible number of trailers in all countries concerned.
8 9
378
Load monitoring
The driver information system in the multifunction display shows an event message if the set values are too low or are exceeded.
Operation Trailer/semitrailer The driver information system checks the bulbs on the trailer in connection with the instrument panel function check.
i An event message appears if the driver information system detects a faulty bulb.
Falling short of/exceeding the load temperature specified value
1 Symbol for trailer 1 2 Status indicator
Replace faulty bulbs before starting a journey.
1
Loading platform approach aid Trailer or semitrailer with telematics complying with ISO 11992 and corresponding sensor system: Risk of accident
G
The loading platform approach aid does not relieve the driver of his duty to make sure that there are no persons/obstacles in the danger area behind the truck/trailer combination. If necessary, a second person should assist during manoeuvring.
2 3 4 5 6
Automatic bulb check Trailer or semitrailer with telematics complying with ISO 11992 and corresponding sensor system:
7 8 9
379
Operation Trailer/semitrailer
1 The loading platform approach aid is acti-
i
vated when reverse gear is engaged.
2 3
The warning buzzer will also sound at distances less than 50 cm.
When reversing, the distance between the trailer/semitrailer and a fixed obstacle is indicated by the driver information system in the multifunction display as a numerical value and a bar chart.
When the ramp is reached, the loading platform approach aid activates the brake system to stop the truck/trailer combination.
4 Distances less than 100 cm
5 6 7 8
Distance in centimetres
1 Loading platform approach aid symbol Distances less than 50 cm
9
380
Operation Wind deflector Wind deflector Wind deflector on cab Risk of accident
G
Two persons are needed to adjust the wind deflector. Make sure that the working surface is suitable, firm and anti-slip.
Adjust the wind deflector according to the size and shape of the vehicle's body or semitrailer. Take the wind deflector adjustment values from the instruction plate on the inside of the driver's door.
!
1
When adjusting the wind deflector, do not exceed the vehicle's maximum permitted height. In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in).
2
Observe the relevant national and international regulations if the vehicle is used for cross-border transport.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
381
Operation Wind deflector
1 Adjusting the wind deflector
Read off the wind deflector adjustment values on the instruction plate on the inside of the driver's door.
2
Loosen the securing bolts on the adjustment rails and hold the wind deflector.
3
Environmental note
4 5 1 Securing bolts
2 Adjustment rails
6
Measure the height difference (H) and separation (S) between the cab and the body/semitrailer ( page 383).
7 8 9
382
H
A correctly set wind deflector reduces both fuel consumption and environment impact.
Select and adjust to the best possible retaining point on the adjustment rails. Make sure that the right and left-hand adjustment heights are the same. Tighten the securing bolts on the adjustment rails.
Operation Wind deflector Adjustment diagram (example)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Adjustment example: Vehicles with long cab and high roof H – Height difference between the cab roof and the upper edge of the body/trailer = 1,250 mm
9
S – Height difference between the back wall of the cab and the body/trailer = 150 mm A – Number of adjustment detents (1 – 14) = Adjustment detents 12
383
Operation Wind deflector
1
Side wind deflector on the cab Semitrailer tractor vehicle:
2 The right wind deflector can be swung in3 4
wards to maintain accessibility to the compressed-air lines and cables during coupling/uncoupling. Swing the wind deflector inwards by applying pressure to the rear of the side wing via the turning point of the pressurised gas spring.
5 Swing the wind deflector to the drive 6
position by pulling the side wing via the turning point of the pressurised gas spring.
7 8 9
384
1 Side wing 2 Gas spring
Operation Tippers Tippers Tipper operation Risk of accident and injury
1
Ensure that no persons are
G
When tipping the load, there is a risk that the vehicle could overturn. When tipping, ensure that the vehicle is standing firmly and remains horizontal. The wheels subjected to extra load as the tipper operates must be on a firm surface. Three-way tipper: insert the pins into the pivots on the side at which the load is to be tipped.
in the slewing range of the gate in the tipping area or under the raised tipper body
2
under the container
3
under the tipping body or interchangeable platforms. When working underneath the raised tipper body (e.g. to access the spare wheel) support the tipper body with the tipper body support.
4 1 Tipper body support (example)
5 6
Comply with safety regulations and the operating instructions issued by the tipper manufacturer.
7
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension: before tipping, lower the chassis frame to the stop.
8 9
385
Operation Tippers
1 Loading 2 3
Tipping
Three-way tipper:
Load the tipper body so that the centre of gravity is as central as possible.
Insert the pins into the pivots on the side at which the load is to be tipped.
Load large rocks or pieces of rubble carefully and do not drop them into the body from a great height.
Switch the tipper pump (power takeoff) on.
1 Tipper body indicator lamp
4 Before tipping Apply the parking brake.
5
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension: Lower the chassis frame to the stop.
6
The multi-function display shows the chassis in its normal position B.
7
For how to lower the chassis, see ( page 294).
8 9
386
The indicator lamp in the switch lights up and J is shown in the multi-function display.
Operation Tippers After tipping
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:
Before driving off:
Raise the chassis to its normal (travel) position.
Lower the tipper body fully. Close the gate. Lock the gate.
Multi-function display
1 Display showing chassis in its normal position for vehicles with pneumatic suspension 2 Power take-off display
The B chassis in normal position display in the multi-function display must go out.
1 2 3
Switch the tipper pump (power takeoff) off. Engage the tipper valve level in the driving position.
4
Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.
5
The c tipper body indicator lamp on the instrument panel and the J power take-off display in the multifunction display must go out.
6 7 8 9
387
Operation Tippers
1 Demountable tipper 2
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake applied and the engine running:
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension and automatic chassis lowering feature: Risk of accident and injury
Engage the power take-off ( page 255).
G
3 When connecting/removing
4
Containers Tipping bodies Interchangeable platforms
5
ensure that the vehicle is standing firmly and remains horizontal.
6
Comply with safety regulations and the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.
7 8 9
388
Multi-function display
1 Display showing chassis in its normal position for vehicles with pneumatic suspension 2 Power take-off display
The J symbol appears in the multifunction display to indicate that the power take-off is engaged. The chassis frame lowers automatically to the lowest position. The multi-function display shows the chassis in its normal position B.
Operation Tippers After picking up/setting down a container/tipper body Switch the power take-off off. The J power take-off display in the multi-function display goes out. To raise the chassis frame to the normal (driving) position, see "Telligent® level control", raising/lowering the chassis ( page 290). The B symbol for chassis in normal position in the multi-function display goes out.
!
1
When picking up or setting down a container, the wheels on the front axle must not be allowed to lift clear of the ground. Risk of damage to the chassis frame.
2 3
Run the engine when coupling to a semitrailer or picking up demountable bodies or containers.
4
Observe the operating instructions issued by the body manufacturer.
5
If a chassis height has been stored: Press memory button M1 ( page 292).
6
The chassis raises to the stored height.
7 8 9
389
Operation Tyres and wheels Tyres and wheels
1 2 3 4
Checking the tyres Tyre damage is one of the most frequent causes of the failure of commercial vehicles. Risk of fire and accident
G
6 7 8
External tyre damage
Tyres age from the influence of sunlight and the environment. The rubber of the tyre gradually loses its elasticity. Tyres become harder and more brittle and they begin to split through age.
Sufficient tread depth
is prejudicial to operating safety
Foreign objects between the twin tyres
Check tyre pressures regularly before starting a journey and correct as necessary.
Environmental note
H
Tyre pressures which are too low may result in increased fuel consumption.
9
390
G
Risk of accident
Foreign objects in the tyre tread
leads to overheating of the tyres up to the point of ignition
Determining the age of the tyres
Correct tyre pressures ( page 579)
Insufficient tyre pressure damages or destroys tyres
5
Before starting a journey, check the tyres on the trailer/semitrailer for:
i Observe the legal requirements regarding the minimum tread depth in all countries concerned. In Germany, the minimum tread depth is 1.6 mm.
Tyres more than six years old are no longer safe for use. Replace the tyres, irrespective of wear, after six years at the latest. This also applies to the spare wheel.
Operation Tyres and wheels You can establish the age of the tyre using the four digit DOT code number on the side wall of the tyre.
!
Changing the tyre size
G
The braking characteristics of a vehicle with a Telligent® brake system could be affected if a non-approved tyre size is used.
Comply also with the required tyre load capacity and the speed index for your vehicle.
5
After fitting another tyre size the Telligent® brake system, the tachograph and the speedometer must be reprogrammed.
i
6
i Details about tyre and wheel rim size, tyre load capacity and speed index can be found in the vehicle's certificate.
Risk of accident 1 DOT code number 2 Calendar week 3 Year of production
1
Use only wheels and tyres of a size approved for this type of vehicle. Comply in particular with the permissible tyre specifications for each country. These specifications may specify a certain type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit the use of certain types of tyres which may be permissible in other countries.
You can obtain information about how to program the Telligent® brake system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
2 3 4
7 8 9
391
Operation Tyres and wheels
1
Tightening wheel nuts
i 2 3 4 5
Check wheel nuts regularly for tightness. Tighten if necessary. On light-alloy wheels, the wheel nuts are not flush with the wheel bolts when tightened. Replace damaged cover caps and wheel nut covers.
Wheel nut cover caps (front axle)
Observe the wheel nut tightening torques ( page 577).
1 To release 2 To tighten
6 7 8 9
392
1 Wheel nut cover
Operation Tyres and wheels Loosen wheel nut cover caps with the wheel nut wrench (in vehicle tool kit) and remove them.
Risk of accident
Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern.
Tighten the wheel nuts of a newly changed wheel after driving 30 miles (50 km).
Place the wheel covers on the wheel nuts and tighten hand-tight with the wheel stud wrench.
If new or repainted wheels are fitted, the wheel nuts must be retightened again after approximately 600 to 3,000 miles (1,000 to 5,000 km) have been covered. Observe the wheel nut tightening torques ( page 577).
1
G
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
393
Operation Winter operation Winter operation
1 Before the onset of winter, make sure that 2
the coolant contains sufficient antifreeze ( page 561) the fuel used is winterproof ( page 562)
3 when using single-grade engine oils the 4 5 6
changeover is completed in good time ( page 557) the windscreen washer/headlamp cleaning system contains sufficient antifreeze ( page 574) tyres with a high grip tread pattern, if possible M+S tyres, are fitted snow chains are fitted to the vehicle
7 8 9
394
Winter driving Adapt your driving style to suit road conditions.
! Vehicles without acceleration skid control (ASR): a rapid change from smooth to rough road surfaces and spinning of the drive wheels at the same time may result in damage to the axle differential. Avoid wheelspin at the drive wheels.
i In snow and slush and on icy roads, fit snow chains to the drive wheels in good time. All-wheel-drive vehicles: Activate inter-axle locks on the transfer case ( page 253). Vehicles with Telligent® stability control (SR): In wintry road conditions, the optimum effectiveness of the Telligent® stability control system is only achieved when M+S tyres are fitted.
Operation Winter operation Snow chains increase traction in wintry road conditions.
Snow chains Risk of accident
G
Driving too fast with snow chains fitted may result in the chains tearing, injury to other road users or damage to the vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speeds for operation with snow chains. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. In Germany, the legally permissible maximum speeds when using snow chains is 50 km/h.
! You should only use snow chains that have been approved by MercedesBenz. There is a risk when fitting to the front axles that the snow chains could damage the steering linkage components. After fitting, make sure that the snow chains have adequate clearance from steering linkage components ( page 396).
i
1
The law specifies that snow chains should be removed as soon as possible once road surfaces are clear of snow. The driving and braking characteristics are worsened by driving with snow chains fitted on roads clear of snow. Vehicles with Telligent® stability control (SR): If traction problems occur when driving with snow chains, deactivate stability control ( page 90).
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
395
Operation Winter operation
1 Checking the tyre clearance When fitting snow chains on the front axle:
Start the engine.
2
Turn the steering wheel towards the front-passenger side to the stop.
3
With the steering on full lock, there must be a clearance of at least 30 mm between the snow chain and the steering pushrod.
4 5 6 7
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied:
Clearance between snow chain and steering pushrod
Fit snow chains in accordance with the fitting instructions of the chain manufacturer.
8 9
396
! If the distance is less than 30 mm, there is a risk that the snow chains could damage the steering linkage components. Remove the snow chains and have the steering geometry checked at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Operation Care Care Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if impurities or damage cannot be removed or repaired by care products. Risk of accident
G
Always keep care products sealed and out of the reach of children. Always follow the instructions for using the care products. Fuels must not be used as cleaning agents. Fuels are highly flammable and constitute a health hazard.
Environmental note
H
Wash the vehicle only at a properly equipped wash bay. Dispose of empty containers, used cleaning materials and polishing wads in an environmentally responsible manner.
High-pressure cleaners Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer.
Keep the water jet constantly moving while cleaning. To prevent damage do not point the water jet directly at
1
Door joints
2
Air spring bellows
3
Brake hoses Electrical components
4
Connectors or Seals
G
Minimum distance between high-pressure nozzle and item being cleaned:
Risk of accident
approximately 70 cm for round-spray jets
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or airspring bellows. The water jet could damage the tyres or air spring bellows. Replace damaged wheels or air spring bellows.
approximately 30 cm for flat-spray jets and concentrated power jets
5 6 7 8 9
397
Operation Care
1
Caring for the exterior of your vehicle
2
Dirt
Care product
Care
Tree resin, bird droppings
Stain remover
Remove the stain using a damp cloth, and buff up the area using a dry cloth.
Grease stains
Cleaning petroleum
Carefully remove using a soft cloth and a dab of cleaning petroleum.
Do not use petroleum for vehicles.
Insect remains
Insect remover
Spray the insect remains and leave for a while for the insect remover to take effect.
Remove insect remains before using an automatic car wash.
Wash off the insect remains with water.
Do not allow insect remover to dry in the sun.
3 4 5
Dry with a soft cloth.
6 7 8 9
398
Notes
Operation Care
Dirt
Care product
Corrosion
Tar stains
Tar remover
Care
Notes
1
Remove corrosion on the chassis components and underbody of the cab. Protect the exposed areas with primer, paint, PVC underseal or wax as appropriate.
Corrosion results from damage caused by stone impact, chippings or salt residue.
2
In the winter, wash the vehicle more frequently in order to remove salt residue.
3
Spray soiled areas. Leave for one minute for the tar remover to take effect. Wipe the tar off with a soft cloth.
Remove tar stains as soon as possible. Tar stains which have been present for a long time are difficult to remove.
4 5 6 7 8 9
399
Operation Care
1 2
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
Notes
Aluminium gates
Car shampoo
Brush down with water.
Do not use abrasive cleaners.
Clean with water.
Do not use paint, spray or lubricating products, petroleum ether, benzene, kerosene or mineral oil. Do not point the water jet on the high-pressure cleaner directly at the compressed-air lines.
Compressed-air lines
3 4
Vehicle exterior
Car shampoo
Wash the vehicle down with plenty of wa- Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunter. light. Wash the sponge out regularly.
5
Rinse off with clean water.
Clean the air inlet for the ventilation carefully.
6
In the winter, remove salt residue as quickly as possible and thoroughly.
7
Do not forget the wheel arches when you are washing the underside of the vehicle. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with round-spray jets for cleaning tyres or air-spring bellows.
8 9
400
Operation Care
1
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
Paintwork and painted attachments
Gloss preserver
Protects the paint and maintains its shine. Do not use any care products in direct sunlight or if the bonnet is warm. For heavy dirt and to remove minor
2
Polish
scratches on varnished wooden components.
3
Paintwork cleaner Polishing wad
Cleans ageing or weathered paintwork.
Touch-up stick Spray can Polishing paste Light-alloy wheels
Car shampoo Cleaning agent for light-alloy wheels
Notes
Keep care products away from unpainted attachments (e.g. door handles or seals). This will prevent stains.
Have the vehicle checked regularly for minor paintwork damage at a specialist For temporary touching up of minor paintworkshop or a Mercedes-Benz Service work damage. Centre. Polishes very dirty or weathered paintwork and polishes out minor scratches. Clean light-alloy wheels weekly using a soft sponge and warm water. Remove stubborn dirt (grease, oil, brake dust) using a soft cloth and petroleum ether.
Only use cleaning agents. Acidic or alkaline cleaning agents may cause the wheel bolts or the retainer springs of the balance weights to rust. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
4 5 6 7 8 9
401
Operation Care
1
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
Notes
2
Engine cleaning
Preservative agent
Have the engine preserved.
Protect the belt drive system from wax. When using high-pressure or steam spray cleaners, do not point the spray directly onto electrical components and electric cables.
3 4 5
Spare wheel retaining bolts
Rust solvent
Retarder (Telma)
Remove dirt rust. Spray using rust solvent. Regular cleaning using high-pressure cleaner.
Retarder must be cold. High-pressure cleaning without solvent. Take particular care when cleaning the stator and any electrical connections.
6 Windows
Car window cleaner with anti-misting agent
Use a cleaning agent regularly. It is also suitable for the plastic panes on the headlamps.
Windows
Intensive car window cleaner
Use this cleaning product on stubborn or oily dirt. It is not suitable for the plastic panes of the headlamps.
7 8 9
402
Do not use this cleaning product for the headlamps.
Operation Care
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
1
Notes
Window guides, win- Talcum dow and door weatherstrips
Rub talcum into clean, dry window guides and door/window seals.
Windscreen wiper blade
Clean the wiper rubber with a cloth and a washing solution.
Replace the wiper rubbers once or twice a year.
3
Clean using a soft sponge and plenty of warm water.
Do not scrub or scratch the plastic panes of the headlamps. Avoid applying lots of pressure.
4
Suitable for all locks.
5
Headlamps, rear lamps, additional turn signals
Car shampoo
Door lock
Door lock de-icer
2
6 7 8 9
403
Operation Care
1
Caring for the interior of your vehicle Care product
2
Vehicle components Floor covering
Car shampoo
Care
Use antistatic spray to prevent electrostatic charges from building up in the vehicle.
Antistatic spray
3
Notes
Cockpit
Cockpit care agent
Distribute the care product evenly using a soft cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
Do not spray the care product on the dashboard or its cover.
Roof lining
Car shampoo as a washing solution
Always brush or vacuum dust away first.
Do not allow the roof lining to become damp.
4
Clean heavy soiling with dry foam. Dry foam fabric upholWash the roof lining using a cloth and car stery cleaner shampoo as a washing solution or stain reStain remover mover if necessary.
5 6 Floormats
7
Car shampoo Antistatic spray
8 9
404
Use antistatic spray to prevent electrostatic charges from building up in the vehicle.
Operation Care
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
Notes
1
Cup holder
Upholstery cleaning foam
Apply the cleaning product and wipe off with a damp cloth.
Do not use any other product.
2
Car shampoo as a washing solution Rubber parts
Car shampoo as a washing solution
3 Do not use any other care agents. Do not oil or wax parts.
4
Cockpit care agent Plastics care agent Plastic parts
Car shampoo as a washing solution
5 Do not use any other care agents. Do not oil or wax parts.
6
Cockpit care agent Plastics care agent
7 8 9
405
Operation Care
1
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
2
Leather upholstery
Leather care foam
Remove stains immediately.
Steering wheel
Car shampoo as a washing solution
Wipe the steering wheel with a soft cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
Car shampoo as a washing solution
Wipe the gear lever with a soft cloth.
Car shampoo as a washing solution
Only clean the seat belts with these clean- Do not dry the seat belts in direct suning products or soap and clean, lukewarm light or at temperatures above 80 °C. water. Do not bleach or dye the seat belts. This could adversely affect the seat belt's performance.
3 4 5
Gear lever Seat belts
6
Upholstery cleaning foam
7 8 9
406
Notes
Avoid making the perforated leather exWipe leather upholstery down with a damp cessively damp. cloth and wipe dry. Dry if necessary. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
Dry if necessary.
Operation Care
Vehicle components
Care product
Care
Notes
1
Fabric upholstery
Car shampoo as a washing solution
Remove stains immediately.
Seat covers or articles of clothing which are not colourfast may discolour the upholstery. Such stains cannot be removed. Therefore use a suitable underlay on the upholstery.
2
Fabric upholstery cleaner Upholstery cleaning foam Stain remover
Curtains
Mild-action detergent
Always brush or vacuum dust away first. Clean heavy soiling with dry foam. Only use stain remover on stubborn stains.
Do not use a stain remover or solvent.
Remove beer, wine and juice stains with a clean cloth moistened with washing solution. Dab the affected areas with a clean cloth moistened with washing solution. Then clean the surface with a clean cloth and clean water. Then dry. Wash at 30 °C.
3 4 5 6
The curtains are suitable for driers.
7 8 9
407
Operation Maintenance Maintenance
1
Telligent® maintenance system ®
2
The Telligent maintenance system calculates service due dates for oil change in mechanical assemblies and
3 general service work, 4 5 6 7 8
depending on the vehicle's operating conditions. The "Maintenance" menu of the driver information system provides a constant overview of the service due dates required for the vehicle and assemblies ( page 171). An initial warning that service work is required appears 14 days before the service due date. Additional messages are displayed if the service due date is reached or exceeded ( page 172).
9
408
i
i
The initial service warning can be programmed to appear from 0 – 30 days before the work is due. Further information is available from any MercedesBenz Service Centre.
If the work is carried out at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the fact that the work has been carried out professionally will be confirmed in both the driver information system and the Maintenance Booklet.
Any service work carried out should be confirmed in the Maintenance menu. For notes on confirming service due dates, see ( page 174).
! If you confirm service work but do not have the work carried out, this can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle and assemblies. Only confirm service due dates if the service work has been carried out.
Operation Maintenance
Risk of injury
G
Before having maintenance or repair work carried out, it is essential that you read the authoritative sections of the technical documentation relating to maintenance and repair measures e.g. Operating Instructions and workshop information. Also familiarise yourself in particular with the legal regulations, e.g. work safety and accident prevention regulations. Otherwise you may not recognise dangers and could injure yourself or others.
Use only operationally-safe support blocks to raise the vehicle for work on the vehicle underside. Do not use the vehicle's jack for this purpose. The vehicle's jack should only be used to raise the vehicle for a short period of time.
i Mercedes-Benz original parts undergo rigorous quality control checks. Each part has been specifically developed and manufactured or selected and adapted to the requirements of Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The function, safety and value of your vehicle are thus maintained. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation and attachment if they comply with legal requirements.
Mercedes-Benz original parts satisfy this requirement. If other parts are used, this could lead to reduced safety standards. The vehicle's warranty and its operating permit could be invalidated. Every Mercedes-Benz Service Centre maintains a stock of MercedesBenz original parts required for maintenance and repair work.
1 2 3 4
Clean the chassis before extensive maintenance work is carried out.
5 Reconditioned components/ reconditioned parts
6
To ensure economical repairs, MercedesBenz also offers reconditioned parts and assemblies. These are of the same quality and have the same warranty as new parts. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to provide further information.
7 8 9
409
Operation Maintenance
1
High-pressure grease guns
!
2 3 4 5 6
If the grease gun has no safety device, it may damage bearing points, seals, etc. If a high-pressure grease gun is used, its delivery pressure must not exceed 400 bar. Before lubricating, clean lubricating nipples thoroughly. If a special-purpose body or special equipment is fitted, comply with the manufacturer's instructions when using the high-pressure grease gun.
!
Regular checks Checking the clutch mechanism fluid level Risk of fatal accident
G
Brake fluid is highly toxic. If you inadvertently swallow brake fluid, consult a doctor immediately. Do not allow brake fluid to come into contact with the eyes. In the event of contact with the eyes when the eyelids are open, rinse thoroughly with clean water. Consult a doctor if you experience any pain. When renewing brake fluid, always wear eye protection.
7
Store brake fluid only in the sealed original container and out of the reach of children. Comply with safety regulations when handling brake fluid.
8 9
410
Brake fluid damages paintwork. If brake fluid comes into contact with paintwork, rinse it off with lots of clean water.
Operation Maintenance !
i
If the hydraulic system loses brake fluid, it is not sufficiently sealed. Have the hydraulic system checked.
The hydraulic system is a closed circuit.
Maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The reservoir must be filled sufficiently, although not above the maximum mark.
Open the maintenance flap ( page 417).
1
Use only tested and approved brands. Observe the boiling point (DOT 4 plus) ( page 569).
2
Environmental note
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
H
Brake fluid must not be allowed to get into the sewage system, surface waters or ground water. Dispose of brake fluid in an environmentally responsible manner.
3 4 5 6
Clutch reservoir
7
1 Max. mark 2 Min. mark
8 9
411
Operation Maintenance
1 Checking vehicle assemblies 2 3 4 5 6 7
Checking compressed-air lines
Thoroughly check the assemblies, e.g. engine and transmission, each week or whenever you refuel.
Examine the compressed-air lines regularly to ensure that they are in perfect condition.
If assemblies are leaking, have these checked immediately. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have compressed-air lines replaced if they show
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a specialist workshop.
8 9
412
buckling chafe marks dents or other external damage The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Check the compressed-air brake system for tightness. Checking compressed-air brake system for leaks Before checking the compressed-air brake system, the compressed-air lines should be checked.
Operation Maintenance
Risk of accident
G
Checking with the parking brake applied
A leaking compressed-air system jeopardises vehicle and road safety. Have leaking compressed-air systems repaired. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 1 2 Reservoir pressure, brake circuit 2 With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied: Uncouple the compressed-air lines from the trailer/semitrailer ( page 377).
Start the engine.
1
Press the è or ÿ button until Monitoring Info appears in the multifunction display.
2
Press the j or k button until Pressure stored appears in the display.
3
Run the engine until the pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2 is 10 bar.
4
Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
5
Then turn the key back to position 2 in the ignition lock. The compressed-air system is free from leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2 after three minutes.
This prevents any leakage from the compressed-air system on the trailer/ semitrailer.
6 7 8 9
413
Operation Maintenance
1 Checking with the parking brake released or partially applied
2 3
i The check provides information on leaks in the reservoirs, valves and brake cylinders on the tractor vehicle.
4
Use chocks to safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
5
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake released:
6
Uncouple the compressed-air lines from the trailer/semitrailer ( page 377).
7
This prevents any leakage from the compressed-air system on the trailer/ semitrailer.
8 9
414
Run the engine until the pressure stored in brake circuits 1 and 2 is 10 bar. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. Turn the key back to position 2 in the ignition lock. Depress the brake pedal enough for a partial brake application (half pedal travel). Do not change the pedal position. The compressed-air system is free from leaks if there is no visible drop in pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2 after holding the pedal in the same position for three minutes.
Checking the seat belts Pull the seat belt from the inertia reel towards the rear. The inertia reel locks the seat belt. Pull out the seat belt completely from the inertia reel. Check the seat belt strap for visible damage, such as tears or fraying. Release the fully-extended seat belt. The inertia reel must roll up the belt completely.
Operation Maintenance
Risk of injury
G
Replace the following items seat belts belt tensioners airbags if these have been subjected to a load in an accident. These systems, particularly seat belt anchorages, should be checked and replaced if necessary if they have been subjected to a load or damaged in an accident. The maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Checking anticorrosion protection The cab is fitted as standard with body cavity protection and underbody protection.
! Note that road salt has a corrosive effect. In the winter, wash the vehicle more frequently in order to remove salt residue.
Frequently examine the vehicle for signs of corrosion damage. Pay particular attention to
1 2
compressed-air lines hydraulic lines. As a precautionary measure, spray the underside of the vehicle with a waxbased protective agent. Repair any damage to the anticorrosion protection provided by the works.
3 4 5
i No anti-corrosion protection is necessary for the transmission housing. Changes in the colour of the transmission casing do not limit the operation or durability of the transmission.
6 7 8 9
415
Operation Maintenance
1 2 3 4
Scope of maintenance Axle-load compensation joints of all-wheel-drive vehicles 930.083/930.182/930.183/ 932.072/932.073/932.083/ 932.182/932.183/932.325/ 932.336/934.082/934.182
Lubricate every four weeks with multi-purpose grease ( page 569).
Steering swivel
Lubricate more frequently with multi-purpose grease under arduous operating conditions ( page 569).
Trailer tow hitch
See the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions in the vehicle's documentation wallet.
All-wheel-drive vehicle universal joints
Grease more frequently depending on operating conditions ( page 569).
Retarder (Telma)
Check the distances between the rotor and the terminal plates of the stator.
5 6
Specific specialist knowledge is necessary for this. You are therefore advised to have these checks carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or specialist workshop.
7 Semitrailer coupling
8
See the corresponding manufacturer's operating/maintenance instructions in the vehicle's documentation wallet. Observe the type of coupling (standard or low maintenance).
9
Special-purpose bodies and special equipment
416
Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when lubricating.
Operation Maintenance
Environmental note
H
1
Maintenance flap Opening
When maintenance work is complete, dispose of service products empty containers cleaning materials parts which came into contact with service products (e.g. filters) used semitrailer coupling sliders in an environmentally responsible manner.
2 Risk of injury
G 3
The maintenance flap opens automatically and could injure persons standing its slewing range. Ensure that nobody is standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap.
4 1 Release lever Press the two release levers to the right in the direction of the arrow. Lift up the maintenance flap gently.
5 6
The maintenance flap opens automatically as far as the safety catch stop.
7 8 9
417
Operation Maintenance
1 Closing 2
Risk of injury
Engine oil level
G
3
When you close the maintenance flap, persons standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap could be injured.
4
Ensure that nobody is standing in the slewing range of the maintenance flap.
5
Swing the maintenance flap down and make sure that it audibly engages in its retaining catches.
6 7 8 9
418
Checking the engine oil level The engine oil level can only be called up in the driver information system. Calling up the engine oil level ( page 163). Topping up the engine oil If the engine oil level is too low or too high, an event message will appear in the multifunction display.
i Only add the amount of oil required after the event message with system abbreviation/symbol N has been displayed. Then add the complete quantity recommended. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you add the amount of oil displayed in the Monitoring Info menu before embarking on long journeys.
Operation Maintenance ! Use only approved engine oils in the specified SAE viscosity classes ( page 557). Drain or siphon off excess oil. Unscrew the oil filler cap, check for tightness and leakage, Maintenance flap opened (example)
1 Oil filler cap Open the maintenance flap ( page 417), Unscrew the oil filler cap, Top up the oil
Close the maintenance flap ( page 418).
Topping up the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system
1
G
2
Windscreen washer/antifreeze concentrate is highly flammable.
3
Avoid fire and naked flame and refrain from smoking when handling windscreen washer/antifreeze concentrate.
4
Risk of fire and explosion
Add a commercially-available windscreen washer concentrate for summer or winter to the water. DaimlerChrysler recommends Mercedes-Benz windscreen washer concentrate S for summer or W for Winter.
5 6 7 8 9
419
Operation Maintenance
1 Use windscreen washer concentrate
Open the maintenance flap ( page 417),
marked with S at temperatures above freezing.
Unscrew the cap,
2 Use antifreeze concentrate marked
Refill the reservoir,
with W when driving in icy conditions.
3
i
4
The windscreen washer concentrate containers are marked with S for summer or W for winter. Observe the correct mixing ratio.
5 6 7 8 9
420
Replace the cap on the reservoir and turn it firmly as far as the stop, Close the maintenance flap ( page 418). 1 Cap on the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system reservoir
Operation Maintenance
Coolant level Only check the coolant level with the vehicle standing on a level surface, with the engine switched off and a coolant temperature below 50 °C.
Risk of injury/poisoning
G
When opening the cooling system, there is a risk of scalding due to hot coolant spraying out. The cooling system and the coolant expansion tank are pressurised when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
!
1
Check the cooling and heating systems regularly for leaks. If considerable coolant loss from the coolant pump leak-off hole occurs, have the pump replaced or repaired at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or specialist workshop.
Wear gloves and eye protection.
2 3 4
Only open the expansion tank when the coolant is at a temperature below 90 °C.
5
Coolant contains glycol and is toxic. Do not swallow coolant.
6 7 8 9
421
Operation Maintenance
1 Checking the coolant level 2
Open the maintenance flap ( page 417).
Undo the coolant expansion tank cap completely. The coolant in the expansion tank must be at the lower marking on the filler neck.
3 4
Adding coolant
!
5 6
To dump any excess pressure, slowly turn the coolant expansion tank cap anti-clockwise through a ½ turn.
Maintenance flap opened
1 Coolant expansion tank cap
7 8 9
422
Observe the correct coolant mixture ratio and the required water quality ( page 561).
Set the heating temperature selector to full heat output. For heating systems with automatic temperature control, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. Add coolant up to the lower marking on the filler neck. Replace the coolant expansion tank cap and screw it on tight. Run the engine briefly with varying engine speeds. Check coolant level and top up if necessary. Close the maintenance flap ( page 418).
Operation Maintenance
Batteries The batteries are located on the left-hand side of the chassis tractor frame or, on semitrailers, between the longitudinal members, depending on the rear design. To achieve a long service life, the batteries should always be fully charged. The charge status of the batteries should be checked more frequently if the vehicle is used mainly for short journeys or is left unused for long periods of time. The batteries should be charged when the vehicle is left unused for long periods of time in order to ensure that the vehicle always starts.
Risk of injury/explosion
G
Risk of explosion Explosive oxy-hydrogen is produced when the batteries are charged. Only charge the batteries in a wellventilated area. As a result of the risk of explosion, avoid the creation of sparks through fire, naked flames or smoking. Battery acid is caustic. Battery acid must not come into contact with the skin, eyes, clothing or the vehicle's paintwork.
The fluid may spray into your eyes when mixing water and acids.
1
For this reason, wear eye protection.
2
Children are unable to recognise the dangers posed by handling batteries. For this reason, keep children away. Observe the safety notes, safety measures and recommendations contained in these Operating Instructions.
3 4 5 6
Rinse off acid splashes immediately with tap water. If necessary, consult a doctor.
7 8 9
423
Operation Maintenance
1
Environmental note
2
Batteries contain lead. Do not dispose of used batteries with the household rubbish.
3
Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.
4
Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or a collection point for used batteries.
5
Transport and store full batteries in an upright position. Secure batteries against tipping over during transport.
6 7
Disconnecting the batteries
H
Risk of injury
There is a risk of short circuit. Do not place metal objects or tools on the batteries.
Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end of the vehicle
Semitrailer tractors with batteries in the rear end of the vehicle between the longitudinal members: The batteries are only accessible with an unsaddled trailer.
8 Removable battery support frame on side of chassis frame
9
424
G
When disconnecting the batteries, always disconnect the negative terminal first and then the positive terminal. There is a risk of short circuit if the positive terminal on the connected battery comes into contact with the vehicle components.
Operation Maintenance Remove the key from the ignition lock. Switch off all electrical consumers. Open and remove the battery cover. Disconnect the negative terminal. Disconnect the positive terminal. Disconnecting the batteries Remove the key from the ignition lock. All electrical consumers must be switched off.
Risk of injury
G
There is a risk of short circuit. Do not place metal objects or tools on the batteries. When connecting the batteries, always connect the positive terminal first and then the negative terminal. There is a risk of short circuit if the positive terminal on the connected battery comes into contact with the vehicle components.
Disconnect the positive terminal.
!
Disconnect the negative terminal.
Do not loosen or disconnect the battery terminals when the engine is running.
Do not interchange the battery terminal clamps. Fit the battery cover.
Retrofitting additional electrical consumers or electronic equipment requires specialised knowledge. Maintenance work should always be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only tow start a vehicle with the battery connected.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
425
Operation Maintenance
1 Following a circuit break (e.g. when recon- Checking the battery fluid level necting the batteries), the following work i should be carried out: The fluid level in each battery cell must 2 set the clock ( page 197), 3
deactivate the anti-theft system for the audio equipment (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
be approximately 15 mm above the top of the plate. Observe the "Min./Max." mark on the battery casing.
Take off the battery cover.
4 5
9
426
Secure the battery support frame by bolting. Connect the battery ( page 425).
Fit the battery cover.
Feed water lowers the battery power output. Add only distilled or deionised water. Do not use a metal funnel when adding distilled water. There is a risk of short circuit.
Undo securing bolt on the battery support frame.
8
Slide the battery support frame back.
!
Disconnect the battery ( page 424).
7
Check the battery fluid level.
Check the battery fluid level.
Vehicles with removable battery support frame:
6
Remove the battery support frame and batteries.
Fit the battery cover.
Operation Maintenance Battery care
! Petrol, benzene, kerosene or similar products attack the battery casing. Do not therefore use any of these products to clean the batteries. Stickers or imprints on the batteries could be removed or become illegible.
Grease the terminals, especially the undersides, with acid protection grease.
1
Recharge batteries which are out of use with an open-circuit voltage of < 12.4 V.
2 3 4
Clean batteries only when their stoppers are inserted. The vent holes in the stoppers must be open and the cell vent tubes must not be blocked.
Removable battery support frame on side of chassis frame
5 6
Semitrailer tractor batteries in the rear end of the vehicle
7 8 9
427
Operation Maintenance Unscrew the stopper from the batteries.
1 Charging the batteries 2 3 4 5
Risk of explosion
G
Gas emitted from the battery may explode if ignited. Avoid creating sparks. Avoid naked flames and do not smoke when handling the batteries. Remove the battery terminal clamps from the battery charger only when the battery charger is switched off and no more gas is escaping from the batteries. Ensure that the area is well-ventilated when charging the batteries.
6
i
7
Do not detach the connecting cables between the batteries.
8 9
428
Disconnect the battery terminals. Follow the operating instructions for the battery charger. Connect the battery charger to the batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Environmental note
H
Batteries contain lead. Do not dispose of used batteries with the household rubbish. Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.
!
Take a faulty battery to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or a collection point for used batteries.
Make sure that the charging voltage is correct. Use a commercially-available battery charger to charge the batteries.
Transport and store full batteries in an upright position. Secure batteries against tipping over during transport.
Do not fast charge new batteries.
Practical advice Where will I find...? Troubleshooting Cab 1 Engine Fuel system Transmission
2 3
Brake system Compressed-air system 4 Pneumatic suspension Trailing axle 5 Steering system/Telligent® steering system Wheels and tyres Electrical system
6 7
Unlocking and locking in an emergency Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing 8
9
429
Practical advice Where will I find...? Where will I find...?
1
Vehicle tool kit and emergency equipment
2 3 4 5
S-Cab
Stowage compartment on cab rear wall
On right near co-driver's seat
Stowage compartCab rear wall ment on cab rear wall
M-Cab
Stowage compartment behind co-driver's seat
Stowage compartment behind co-driver's seat
Stowage compartment behind co-driver's seat
Cab rear wall: 6 kg
6 L-Cab
Exterior stowage compartment, right
7 8
Stowage compartment behind driver's seat: 2 kg
Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage compartment, right partment, left partment, left 2 kg Exterior stowage compartment, right 6 kg
MEGASPACE cab
2-section Pump lever in outside stowage compartment, bottom right
9
Wheelbrace in exterior stowage compartment, bottom left
430
Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage com- Exterior stowage partment, bottom partment, top left compartment, botright tom left
Practical advice Where will I find...?
Vehicle tool kit pocket
1 2
S-Cab
Stowage compartment in driver's door
Stowage compartment on cab rear wall
Stowage compartment on cab rear wall
3
M-Cab
Stowage compartment in driver's door
Stowage compartment be- Stowage compartment be- Stowage compartment behind co-driver's seat hind co-driver's seat hind co-driver's seat
4
L-Cab
Exterior stowage compartment, left
Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compartment, left ment, left ment, right
5
Stowage compartment in driver's door
Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compart- Exterior stowage compartment, bottom left ment, bottom left ment, bottom right
6
MEGASPACE cab
Stowage compartment on cab rear wall
7 8 9
431
Practical advice Where will I find...?
1 2
Special tools
i
(depending on vehicle equipment)
Recommended to supplement vehicle tool kit:
Vehicle tool kit 1 Fitting sleeve for changing a wheel ( page 494) 2 Spacer for spare wheel holder ( page 494) 3 Installation lever for poly-V-belt ( page 462)
3 4 5
Vehicle document wallet Allen key: 4 Sliding/tilting sunroof emergency operation ( page 535) 5 Hexagon bolts (4 bolts): for fan clutch lock-up ( page 467).
6 7 8 9
432
Hexagon bolts M 8 x 120 mm (specialist dealer), for removal of rear axle (HL 7, HD 7) drive shaft ( page 548).
Practical advice Where will I find...? Pump lever
To assemble the pump lever
The pump lever is used to operate
Engage the retaining pin 3 in the cutout 5.
the jack
1 2
the wheelbrace the spare wheel winch the cab tilt pump
3
Pump lever (2-section)
1 Cutout for operating lowering screw on jack 2 Mounting for wheelbrace (tilting cab or unscrewing/tightening wheel nuts) 3 Retaining pin 4 Cutout for operating winch 5 Cutout for retaining pin 6 Retaining sleeve for hand crank (operation of spare wheel winch).
4 5 6 7 8 9
433
Practical advice Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
1 2
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) Problem
Possible cause
Transmission has problems with gearshifts
Risk of accident Loss of hydraulic fluid
3
Suggested solutions
G
Tilt the cab. Check fluid level in HPS reservoir. If necessary, top up with DOT 4 brake fluid.
4
Select 1st, 2nd, 7th and 8th gears several times to bleed the hydraulics. If this is unsuccessful, select gears manually at the transmission ( page 470).
5 6 7 8 9
434
Practical advice Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
1
Have gearshift examined. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
2
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
435
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Problem
Possible cause
Gearshift does not operate
Risk of accident
2
Suggested solutions
G
Select gears manually at the transmission ( page 470). Have gearshift examined. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
Leak in gearshift hydraulics
3
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
4 5 6 7
Risk of accident Transmission damage
8 9
436
G Tow vehicle away ( page 542).
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Electronic-pneumatic gearshift (EPS III S/EPS III SA) Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Gearshift no longer operates
Risk of accident
Activate transmission control back-up mode ( page 473).
Event message:
Malfunction or failure of the transmission electronics drive control the sensor unit the transmission data cable
G
2
Tow the vehicle away ( page 542). Have gearshift examined. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
437
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Problem
Possible cause
Event message:
Risk of accident
2
Suggested solutions
G
Charge pressure too low in auxiliary consumer circuit
3 4
Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions permitting). Apply the parking brake. Wait until sufficient charge pressure is available in auxiliary consumer. Charge pressure event message goes out. Switch off engine.
5
After waiting approximately ten seconds, re-start engine.
6
If multi-function display still shows event message Clutch: failed, carry out a "short teach-in procedure" ( page 478).
7
If short teach-in process is unsuccessful, carry out a "long teach-in procedure" ( page 479).
8 9
438
Practical advice Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Event message:
Risk of accident
1
Suggested solutions
G
Stop the vehicle (traffic conditions permitting). Apply the parking brake. Switch off the engine. Carry out a "long teach-in procedure" ( page 479).
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
439
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1 2
Opening and closing the vehicle Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the radio remote control
Batteries of the radio remote control are discharged.
Open doors with the key ( page 103). Check batteries of the radio remote control. If the radio remote control batteries needs to be replaced, an event message appears in the multifunction display.
3 4
Replace batteries in good time ( page 534). Batteries are obtainable from any specialist workshop or from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
5 6 You have pressed the radio remote control too often outside the range of vehicle.
7 8 9
440
Press the Πbutton on the radio remote control twice and start the engine within 60 seconds. The radio remote control will then function normally again.
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
You receive feedback from the turn signal lamps when you prime anti-theft alarm system.
One of the monitored components/ entrances is not in the normal position.
Deactivate anti-theft alarm system ( page 103)
2
Check whether all monitored components/entrances, such as:
3
both doors the maintenance flap
4
the stowage box on driver and codriver's side
5
the cab tilt lock all contacts or sensors of optional body attachments are in the normal position.
6
7 8 9
441
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions Repeat priming procedure ( page 111).
2
If this is unsuccessful, have the anti-theft alarm system examined. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
3
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
4 5 6 7 8 9
442
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Problem
Possible cause
Vehicles with enhanced central locking system:
Faulty travel detection by door electronics. Hold down the q button in the control panel until the side window is completely open.
The side windows no longer close automatically.
Suggested solutions
2
Hold down the H button in the control panel until the side window is completely closed.
3
If this is unsuccessful, have the power window mechanism examined.
4
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
5 6 7 8 9
443
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1 2 3
Engine Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Engine cannot be started with vehicle's own key and multi-function display shows CODE.
Immobiliser has not recognised the key.
Turn key slowly and hold it for a short period (approximately 0.5 seconds) between ignition lock positions 2 and 3 ( page 125).
You have not held key between ignition lock After four unsuccessful attempts at positions 2 and 3 for the required period. starting, use spare key for further starting attempts. You have used an invalid key.
4
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you carry a spare key at all times, for emergency use.
5 6 7 8 9
444
Practical advice Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
1
If this is unsuccessful, have cause of the fault traced and rectified. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
2
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
445
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Engine does not start.
Engine electronics are faulty.
Before next starting attempt, turn key back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
Multi-function display shows the event message with short symbol A.
Starter batteries are discharged.
After approximately ten seconds, repeat starting procedure ( page 462).
2 3
Note that starting attempts lasting too long will discharge the batteries. Have your vehicle jump-started from another vehicle ( page 537).
4 Fuel supply is faulty.
5
Check the fuel tank. If fuel tank level has fallen to 14% of total capacity, an event message appears in the multi-function display.
6
Check fuel system for leaks. Bleed fuel system ( page 468).
7 8 9
446
Practical advice Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Engine fails to start up when ambient tem- The flows properties of the diesel fuel are perature is low. inadequate due to paraffin separation.
1
Suggested solutions Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be corrected by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking in a heated area. Add flow improver or petroleum to the fuel ( page 563). If this is unsuccessful and the engine cannot be started after several attempts, have the cause traced and rectified. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
447
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting system
2
Problem
Possible cause
Cab cannot be tilted.
Valve lever of mechanical-hydraulic cab tilt- Position valve lever of the mechanicaling pump is positioned in the direction of hydraulic cab tilting pump in the directhe vehicle chassis. tion of the entrance ( page 453).
3
Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics.
4
Suggested solutions
Have tilting hydraulics overhauled. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
5 6 7 8 9
448
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Cab cannot be tilted.
Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting system is not switched on.
Press the main switch of the electrohydraulic cab tilting system upwards ( page 457).
Valve lever of electro-hydraulic tilting pump Position valve lever of electro-hydrauis positioned to the right, in the direction of lic tilting pump to the left, in the directhe driving position. tion of the tilting position ( page 457). Fuse for electro-hydraulic tilting pump has blown.
Replace fuse F2 in module A2 of electrical compartment ( page 522, 526 and 531)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
449
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Problem
2
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
Failure or leaking of tilting hydraulics.
Have tilting hydraulics overhauled. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
450
Practical advice Troubleshooting
STOP lamp
Risk of accident
G
If the STOP lamp does not go out, or lights up while vehicle is being driven, safe operation of the engine is endangered. If road and traffic conditions permit, stop the engine at once and determine the cause.
the charge pressure in the tractor vehicle's spring-loaded parking brake release circuit drops below 5.5 bar the charge pressure in the trailer/ semitrailer brake circuit drops below 5.5 bar (e.g. if air consumption is too high while manoeuvring trailer).
1 STOP lamp Turn key in ignition lock to position 2. The STOP lamp goes out after not more than 10 seconds or when the engine is started. The STOP lamp lights up if
1 2 3 4
The STOP lamp lights up and additionally the multi-function display shows a system code/symbol, when:
5
the charge pressure in brake circuit 1 or 2 of the tractor vehicle drops below 6.8 bar
6
the engine oil pressure is too low the engine oil level is too low.
7 8 9
451
Practical advice Troubleshooting
1
Risk of accident
The operating and driving safety of the vehicle is endangered when an event message with a red status display is present. Observe the traffic situation and immediately stop the vehicle.
2 3 4 5
G
1 Status indicator (red) 2 Charge pressure, brake system 3 Fault location
6 7 8 9
452
The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change. Check the brake system and have it overhauled. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If air consumption is high, e.g. when manoeuvring a trailer, do not drive any further until the STOP lamp has gone out.
Practical advice Cab Cab Before tilting the cab:
Tilting the cab
Apply the parking brake. Additionally secure the vehicle with wheel chocks. Select neutral N at the transmission. Switch off engine and turn key in the ignition lock back to position 0. Switch off auxiliary air conditioning or auxiliary heating. Risk of injury
G
As the cab is tilted it can suddenly fall forwards to end position. Persons remaining within cab tilting area can be injured.
Close all doors, stowage compartments inside cab, and outside flaps making sure that they audibly engage.
Vehicles with refrigerator: Switch off and empty refrigerator.
1
For safety reasons, keep area in front of gear lever and in front of cab unobstructed.
2
The front coupling pin must be properly inserted.
3
MEGASPACE, car transporter, LowLiner and vehicles with electrohydraulic cab tilting system: Open maintenance flap ( page 417) and swing it fully upwards.
4 5 6
Remove all loose objects (e.g. cans, bottles, tools, bags, etc.) from cab and stowage pockets in the doors.
7
Only tilt the cab when the tilting area is clear.
8 9
453
Practical advice Cab
i
1
Always tilt the cab fully, as far as its limit of travel.
2
Have tilting hydraulics examined if failure occurs or leaks are present.
3
The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
4 System graphic, cab tilting
5 1 Open maintenance flap 2 Tilt the cab
6 7 8 9
454
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice Cab Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting system
To tilt forwards
1
Open the flap in the entrance, and swing it up.
2
Position valve on tilting pump towards entrance 1.
3
Fit pump lever with wheelbrace (vehicle tool kit) onto tilting pump 2. Operate tilting pump until cab is fully tilted to end position.
i Tilting pump (example)
1 Flap 2 Tilting pump
The cab is unlocked automatically.
4 Graphic, tilting pump valve lever position (example)
5
1 To tilt forwards 2 To tilt back and travel position
6
Tilting pump is located on co-driver side.
7 8 9
455
Practical advice Cab Swing the flap in the entrance down and listen for it to engage.
1 To tilt back to driving position 2 3 4 5
Risk of accident
G
If the valve lever is pushed forwards the entrance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt. Make sure that the valve lever is positioned in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2 when the vehicle is being driven.
Close the maintenance flap ( page 418). Vehicles with refrigerator: Ten minutes after the cab has been tilted back to the driving position, switch on the refrigerator. Observe the operating instructions issued by the manufacturer. Risk of accident
6
Position valve on tilting pump in the direction of vehicle chassis 2.
7
Operate tilting pump until cab has reached the driving position. The lock must audibly engage.
8
i The cab locks automatically.
9
456
G
If indicator lamp Ÿ does not go out after the engine is started, then cab is not locked. There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards if the vehicle is subjected to a heavy jolt. Ensure that cab lock indicator lamp Ÿ goes out when the engine is started.
i Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a failure occurs or if leaks are present. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice Cab Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system
Press the upper section of switch 1. The cab tilting system is ready for operation. The indicator lamp in the switch lights up.
To tilt forwards
1 2
i The electric tilting pump is located:
3
for road and construction site vehicles, on co-driver side, in entrance
1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting system Turn key in the ignition lock to position 2.
4
for car transporters and LowLiner vehicles, on right behind cab Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab tilting pump (example)
5
1 To tilt forwards 2 To tilt back and driving position
6 7 8 9
457
Practical advice Cab
1 Open the flap in entrance, and swing it
To tilt back to driving position
up.
G
2
Position valve lever on electric cab tilting pump to left 1.
Risk of accident
3
Remove switch for the electric tilting pump from mounting on the co-driver side under the maintenance flap.
4
Hold switch pressed down until cab is tilted fully to end position.
If the valve lever is pushed forwards the entrance 1 as the vehicle is being driven, the cab tilt lock can open automatically. The cab can tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt.
5 6
i The cab is unlocked automatically. The cab has reached its limit of travel when the pump noise becomes louder.
7 8 9
458
Make sure that the valve lever is positioned in the direction of the vehicle chassis 2 when the vehicle is being driven.
Graphic, valve lever position of electric cab tilting pump (example)
Position valve lever on the electric cab tilting pump to the right 2.
Practical advice Cab Swing flap in the entrance down and listen for it to engage. Insert switch of electric tilting pump into the mounting. Close the maintenance flap ( page 418). Press the lower section of switch 1. 1 Main switch of electro-hydraulic cab tilting system Hold switch of electric tilting pump pressed down until cab is tilted into driving position and is locked.
G
1
If indicator lamp Ÿ does not go out after the engine is started, the cab is not locked. There is a risk that the cab may tilt forwards if the vehicle suffers a heavy jolt. Make sure that cab lock indicator lamp Ÿ goes out when engine is started.
2
Risk of accident
The cab tilting system is switched off. The indicator lamp in the switch will go out. Cab tilt lock indicator lamp Ÿ in the instrument panel must go out once engine has been started.
3 4 5 6
The cab locks automatically.
7 8 9
459
Practical advice Cab
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i If a loud pumping noise can be heard when the tilting pump is operated: Check that the valve lever on electric tilting pump is set to desired tilting direction. Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a failure occurs or if leaks are present. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
9
460
Cab tilting system – checking oil level/ topping up
i Cab tilting system is filled for the life of the vehicle. A need for topping up with oil is not envisaged. Have the tilting hydraulics checked if a failure occurs or if leaks are present. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Environmental note
H
Hydraulic oil is an environmental hazard. Collect any oil which may have spilled and clean the tilting pump.
Practical advice Cab
Starting and stopping the engine with the cab tilted Risk of injury
G
When the cab is tilted and the engine is running, there is a risk of injury from hot or moving parts of the engine, e.g. exhaust manifold, poly-V-belts, fan, etc.
Tilt the cab ( page 453).
To start the engine
To stop the engine
Press starter button 1 at the engine until the engine starts.
Press shutoff button 2 on the engine.
i If a gear is selected, the starter button on the engine will not operate. To increase the engine speed With the engine running, press starter button 1 again and hold it pressed until the desired engine speed is reached.
1
To turn the engine over without starting up
2
Press and hold down both starter button 1 and shutoff button 2 on the engine simultaneously.
3
The starter will turn over the engine without the engine starting up.
4 5
i 6
It is possible to increase the engine speed until the governed speed is reached.
7 8
1 Starter button 2 Shutoff button
9
461
Practical advice Engine Engine
1 2 3
Engine emergency running mode Activate engine emergency running mode when the multi-function display shows the event message with code/symbol A the accelerator pedal does not function
4 or the engine runs at a constant speed of approximately 1,300 rpm
5
Activate engine emergency running mode Observe the traffic conditions and stop the vehicle.
To check the condition of the poly-V-belt
Apply the parking brake.
Poly-V-belts must not show longitudinal tears in the running surfaces. Damaged, oily or glazed poly-V-belts must be replaced without delay.
Switch off engine. After approximately ten seconds, restart the engine.
i In engine emergency running mode, the engine speed is limited to about 1,300 rpm.
6 7 8 9
462
Poly-V-belt
Practical advice Engine
i
To remove and refit poly-V-belts
1
Small lateral cracks appear in the polyV-belts after approximately 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km) of normal use. It is not necessary to replace poly-V-belts that show small lateral cracks.
2 3
Specialist technical knowledge is required to replace the poly-V-belts. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
4 Special tool (vehicle tool kit)
1 Screwdriver 2 Assembly lever
5
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
6 7 8 9
463
Practical advice Engine
1 To remove the poly-V-belt 2 3 4
Insert the special tool with assembly lever into tensioning mechanism. Turn tensioning mechanism anti-clockwise and upwards, and insert a screwdriver in the retainer hole provided. Risk of injury
G
The tensioning mechanism is spring-loaded.
5 6
Remove the poly-V-belt. Check tensioning mechanism, tension pulley, return pulley and main pulleys for perfect condition.
7 8 9
464
i
Fitting the poly-V-belts
Have worn bearings in tensioning mechanism, tension pulley or return pulleys replaced and also replace worn main pulleys.
Place new poly-V-belt in position on all the pulleys.
The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Observe the illustration showing correct routing of the poly-V-belt ( page 465).
Practical advice Engine Pivot tensioning mechanism anti-clockwise and remove screwdriver from the retainer hole. Swing tensioning mechanism back into place.
2
Remove special tool with assembly lever and check that the poly-V-belt is seated correctly on the pulleys.
3 4
Poly-V-belt routing: Vehicles without air conditioning
Vehicles with refrigerator block
1
1 Crankshaft 2 Coolant pump 3 Alternator 4 Tensioning pulley 5 Air-conditioning compressor 6 Refrigerator block
5 6 7 8
Vehicles with air conditioning
Vehicles with air conditioning and refrigerator block
9
465
Practical advice Engine
1 Vehicles with belt-driven fan i In order to replace the poly-V-belt, it is 2 3 4 5 6 7
necessary to remove the fan. This work requires specialist technical knowledge. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
8 9
466
Vehicles with belt-driven fan
Vehicles with belt-driven fan and air conditioning
Poly-V-belt routing: 1 Crankshaft 2 Coolant pump 3 Alternator 4 Tensioning pulley 5 Air-conditioning compressor 6 Radiator fan
Practical advice Engine
i
Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up
1
The fastening tabs and threaded holes are directly opposite each other.
When there is a fault with the electromagnetic fan clutch, e.g. recognisable by elevated coolant temperature, it is possible to lock-up the clutch mechanism. The fan has a rigid connection to the belt pulley.
2
!
Electromagnetic fan clutch
1 Fastening tabs 2 Hexagon bolts Turn the fastening tabs over the threaded holes on the fan. Screw in and tighten M 6 x 10 four hexagon bolts (vehicle document wallet).
Replace the fan clutch as soon as possible.
3
The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
4
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
5 6 7 8 9
467
Practical advice Fuel system Fuel system
1 2
Bleeding the fuel system The hand pump is located either between the chassis and the fuel tank or next to the air cleaner housing.
Remove the fuel tank filler cap by turning it anti-clockwise. Turn hand pump lever anti-clockwise to release it. Operate hand pump until definite resistance is felt.
3
i Operate hand pump for approximately 100 strokes until definite resistance is felt.
4 5 6
Secure the hand pump lever again by turning it clockwise. 1 Hand pump (example)
7 8 9
468
Replace the cap on the fuel tank and turn it clockwise to tighten.
Vehicles with fuel prefilter:
i The fuel prefilter with heated water separator is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle behind the cab. Before bleeding the fuel system, operate the fuel prefilter hand pump and completely fill the filter housing.
Practical advice Fuel system Operate the hand pump and catch the water/fuel mixture.
Fuel prefilter, water drainage
i
Tighten the drain plug.
The fuel prefilter with heated water separator is located on right-hand side of the vehicle behind the cab.
1 2
Check the fuel system for leaks.
H
3
Dispose of the fuel/water mixture in an environmentally responsible manner.
4
Environmental note
Fuel prefilter (example)
1 Inspection glass 2 Drain plug 3 Hand pump
5
Place collector under the drain plug.
6
Unscrew the drain plug.
7 8 9
469
Practical advice Transmission Transmission
1 2 3
Hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS) In the case of a defective HPS, you can select 3rd, 4th or reverse gears manually using the shift and selector levers at the transmission. Using fourth gear, you can drive the vehicle to reach a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
G
4
Risk of injury and accident
5
If you select gears manually at the transmission, the vehicle can roll away. Only select gears manually at the transmission with
6
a stationary vehicle applied parking brake
7
ignition lock in position 0
8 9
470
i
Tools
You cannot change the selected gear while driving if it was selected manually.
The required tools can be found in vehicle tool kit pocket ( page 431).
Depending on vehicle type and equipment, it may be necessary to tilt the cab in order to reach the shift and selector levers. Tilt the cab ( page 453).
Gear
Tool
3, 4
Open-ended spanner 34 mm across flats or adjustable pliers
R
Second open-ended spanner 34 mm across flats or second pair of adjustable pliers
Practical advice Transmission To select 3rd or 4th gear
Move the shift lever into position 4 to select 3rd gear.
1
Move the shift lever into position 6 to select 4th gear.
2
The gear is selected when the selector shaft can be felt to engage in the corresponding position.
3 4
Shift lever on right of transmission Selector lever on left of transmission
Turn key in the ignition lock to position 0. Apply the parking brake. If necessary, tilt the cab ( page 453).
If a gear is selected, move the shift lever on the right of the transmission into neutral 5.
5
If 5th to 8th gear was selected, move the selector lever on the left of the transmission to the front, to position 2.
6 7 8 9
471
Practical advice Transmission
1 To engage reverse gear i A second person is required to select 2
2nd person: Move shift lever 1 on the right of the transmission to the rear to position 4. The gear is selected when the shift lever can be felt to engage in position 4.
reverse gear.
3 Pulling away
i
4 Shift lever on right of transmission
If a gear is selected, move the shift lever on the right of the transmission into neutral 5.
5 6
When you stop the vehicle, you must hold the clutch pedal depressed with your foot.
1st person: Selector lever on left of transmission
7 Turn key in the ignition lock to position 0.
8
You cannot change the selected gear while driving.
Apply the parking brake. If necessary, tilt the cab ( page 453).
9
472
Push the selector lever on the left of the transmission forwards 1 to the stop and hold it there.
Depress the clutch pedal. Start the engine. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
Practical advice Transmission
Transmission control back-up mode ®
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift: Using the transmission control back-up mode you can select 2nd, 5th, reverse gear or neutral ( page 474) shift the transmission into towing mode if the vehicle has to be towed ( page 473). In the back-up function, the gears are changed with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You are guided through displays from the driver information system in the multi-function display via the control unit ( page 475 + 476).
i The GS back-up function can also be activated when no fault is present in the transmission control. You may familiarise yourself with the transmission control (GS) back-up function so that you can react quickly in an emergency situation. GS back-up function menu
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied, press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until Settings appears in the multi-function display. Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on Configuration. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel until Enable transmission control back-up mode appears in the multi-function dis-
play.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
In order to activate the back-up function you must enable the GS back-up function menu ( page 474).
8 9
473
Practical advice Transmission
1 To enable 2 3
Activate GS back-up function
Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The GS back-up function is now activated. The driver information system displays Please select gear in the multifunction display.
The highlight is positioned at ON. Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to confirm the setting and go to next menu.
4 To lock 5
Press the ç button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight is positioned on OFF.
6 Press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel to confirm the setting and go to next menu.
7 8 9
474
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
With the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied, press the è or ÿ button on the multi-function steering wheel until Transmission control back-up mode appears in the multi-function display.
Practical advice Transmission
i When the GS back-up function is activated, the GS back-up function menu is permanently displayed in the multifunction display. The transmission electronics monitor the driving operations and give you instructions, or prompt you to confirm certain actions.
Telligent® gearshift Pulling away
Please apply clutch appears in the multi-function display.
1 2
Depress the clutch pedal. Press the æ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The highlight is positioned on YES. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
! If you do not observe the instructions in the multi-function display, transmission damage may result.
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
Activate back-up function ( page 474). The multi-function display shows Please select gear.
Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on the gear desired.
The transmission control selects the chosen gear.
3 4 5
Slowly release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
6
The multi-function display shows
7
Driving in emergency running mode – restricted gear selection only possible.
8 9
475
Practical advice Transmission
1 To stop the vehicle or change gear
Select neutral or a new gear using the æ or ç button.
Telligent® automatic gearshift To pull away
2
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
3
Transmission control selects neutral or the gear chosen.
4 5 Depress the clutch pedal. 6 7
Brake the vehicle to a standstill by applying the foot brake. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. The multi-function display shows Please select gear.
8 9
476
Activate back-up function. The multi-function display shows Please select gear.
Practical advice Transmission Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on the gear desired.
To stop the vehicle or change gear
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
Select neutral or a new gear using the æ or ç button.
1
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel.
2
The transmission control selects neutral or the gear chosen.
3
The transmission control selects the chosen gear.
To deactivate the GS back-up function
The multi-function display shows
Stop the vehicle.
Driving in transmission control back-up mode – manual gear selection only possible for N.
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly. The vehicle will start moving.
Brake vehicle to a standstill by applying the foot brake. Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. The multi-function display shows Please select gear.
4
Press the ÿ or è button on the multi-function steering wheel. The driver information system goes to next menu. Transmission control terminates the GS back-up function. Lock GS back-up function menu ( page 474).
5 6 7 8 9
477
Practical advice Transmission
1 2 3
Teach-in procedure Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift or Telligent® automatic gearshift: The short/long teach-in procedure is necessary to teach-in vehicle-specific data into the automatic transmission control (GS) electronics system.
If the teach-in procedure is interrupted, the splitter group indicators will stop flashing and an event message appears in the multi-function display.
Short teach-in procedure The short teach-in procedure is required if the sensors on the transmission or clutch have been replaced.
If transmission control (GS) interrupts the teach-in procedure, turn key in the ignition lock to position 0.
To program the transmission control (GS)
i
The lights in the gear display go out.
Apply the parking brake.
4
Wait at least five seconds before repeating the teach-in procedure.
Turn key in the ignition lock to position 0.
5
The charge pressure in the auxiliary consumer compressed-air circuit must be sufficient. The multi-function display must not be showing "Charge pressure, auxiliary consumer" Œ.
6 7
During the whole teach-in procedure, the indicators for the high f and the low splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display.
8 9
478
Vehicles with Telligent® automatic gearshift: the clutch control (KS) automatically disengages and engages during the teach-in procedure.
Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep it depressed. Press the neutral button on gear lever and hold it pressed.
Practical advice Transmission Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. The indicators for the fast f and the slow splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display. Release the clutch pedal. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. Depress the clutch pedal fully. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. If neutral N appears in the gears display, release the clutch pedal.
i
Long teach-in procedure:
When the warning buzzer sounds, you must push down or release the clutch pedal within three seconds.
The long teach-in procedure is required if: the GS control unit or the engine has been replaced
2
You must hold the neutral button on gearshift pressed down for the whole period of the teach-in procedure.
the multi-function display shows an event message with error code "a 21011".
3
If the multi-function display shows the event message again after the short teach-in procedure, carry out the long teach-in procedure.
1
After the display has appeared, turn key fully back in the ignition lock and then after a further approximately five seconds, turn it back to the drive position. The multi-function display shows an event message with error code "a 28093".
4 5 6 7
Release the neutral button on the gear lever.
8 9
479
Practical advice Transmission
1 Programming the transmission control (GS)
2 3 4 5
i Construction site vehicles with Telligent® gearshift: When you carry out the long teach-in procedure, the transmission control deletes the function for construction site mode ( page 229). A MercedesBenz Service Centre can reactivate construction site mode again. Apply the parking brake.
6 Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0.
7 Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep it depressed.
8
Press the neutral button and the function button on the gear lever and hold pressed down.
9
480
Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. The indicators for the high f and the low splitter group g flash alternately in the gears display. Release the clutch pedal. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker.
Release the clutch pedal. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. Depress the clutch pedal fully. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker. Release the clutch pedal. The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker.
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
When N flashes in the gear display, start the engine.
When neutral N appears in the gear display, the teach-in procedure is complete.
The warning buzzer and a shift noise sound in the central loudspeaker.
Release the clutch pedal, neutral button and function button.
Practical advice Transmission
i When the warning buzzer sounds, you must depress or release the clutch pedal within three seconds. You must hold the neutral button on the gear lever pressed for the whole of the teach-in procedure. If the event messages are not deleted after the teach-in procedure, activate the GS back-up process ( page 474). Have the transmission examined. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1
Emergency gearshift (NMV) If the drive should fail, a rigid power transmission link can be established in the power take-off.
2 3 4 5 6
Power take-off (NMV)
1 Retainer 2 Slotted nut 3 Tapped holes for retainer
7 8 9
481
Practical advice Transmission
1 2 3 4
Risk of accident and injury
G
When the engine is running, the power takeoff shaft turns as soon as the connection is established. The rotating shaft can cause serious injury. Operate the emergency gear shift for the transmission-independent power take-off only with vehicle stationary, the parking brake applied and the engine switched off.
5 6 7 8 9
482
Unscrew retainer 1. Unscrew slotted nut 2 to the stop, approximately 4½ turns.
i If the slotted nut is hard to move, turn the drive shaft slightly. Secure the slotted nut with the retainer by turning the retainer round and screwing it onto a suitable thread.
After repairing the drive, disconnect the rigid power transmission link again. The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice Brake system Brake system Releasing the spring-loaded parking brake if there is a failure of charge pressure
To release the spring-loaded brake mechanically
In an emergency or in the workshop it is possible to release the spring-loaded parking brake mechanically or pneumatically. Risk of injury and accident
Before the vehicle is returned to service, the proper operation of the spring-loaded parking brake must be restored.
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
1
Do not use a impact drive to unscrew the spring-loaded brake release bolts. Maximum release torque of the springloaded brake release bolt is 70 Nm.
2 3
To restore the spring-loaded parking brake to operational condition
G
When the spring-loaded parking brake is released, the vehicle can roll away unexpectedly.
!
Spring-loaded brake release bolt (example)
1 Braked position 2 Released position Slacken the release bolts to the stop (released position).
Charge the brake circuit until the cutoff pressure is reached.
4
Move the parking brake valve lever to the release position ( page 52).
5
Tighten the release bolts fully (braking position). Tightening torque min. 25 Nm, max. 45 Nm.
6 7 8 9
483
Practical advice Brake system
1 Arrangement of spring-loaded brake cylinders:
2 3 4 5 6
To release the spring-loaded brake using tyre pressure of spare wheel
Front axle Rear axle
i
1
2
1
2
4x2, 4x4
x1
–
x
–
A minimum air pressure of 8.5 bar is required in spare wheel.
6x2
–
–
x
x
6x2/2
x
–
–
x
6x2/4
–
–
x
x
6x4, 6x6
–
–
x
x
8x4/4, 8x6/ 4, – 8x8/4
x
x
x
Vehicle
1 Optional extra
7 8 9
484
Connect tyre inflator hose to the test connection and push connector on to the tyre inflation valve.
i
Uncouple compressed-air lines to the trailer or semitrailer ( page 377).
When the release indicator lamp for the parking brake ! goes out, the spring-loaded cylinders are completely released.
Move the lever of the parking brake valve to release position ( page 52) and turn key in the ignition lock to position 2.
Comply precisely with the manufacturer's operating instructions when releasing the brake on the trailer or semitrailer.
Remove the dust caps from the test connection of the trailer brake circuit reservoir and from the tyre inflator valve on the spare wheel.
Practical advice Brake system
Releasing the spring-loaded brake with an external source of compressed air Release is possible via: the front coupling head the tyre inflator connection the spare wheel
i
!
Only charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection in an emergency.
As far as possible do not charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection. The compressed air is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pressure protection is not provided via the pressure regulator.
To release the spring-loaded brake using compressed-air from the spare wheel requires a minimum pressure of 8.5 bar.
1 2 3 4
the test connection on reservoir of trailer brake circuit.
5 6 7 8 9
485
Practical advice Compressed-air system Compressed-air system
1
If the shut-off pressure of the external compressed-air source lies below 10 bar, dump the compressed air on the vehicle to be towed until the pressure is below 10 bar. This can be done, for example, by repeated operation of service brake on the vehicle that is receiving the pressure.
Charging the compressed-air system via the front coupling head With the engine stopped, it is possible to
2 charge the compressed-air system via the 3
front coupling head. The coupling head is located behind the cover in the bumper and is marked red.
!
4 1 Coupling head (example)
5 6 7 8 9
486
After the compressed-air system has been charged, the charge pressure available in the individual compressedair circuits is limited when engine is not running.
Practical advice Compressed-air system
Charging the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection
i Only charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection in an emergency.
!
1
As far as possible do not charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection. The compressed air is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pressure protection is not provided via the pressure regulator.
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Tyre inflator connection
8 9
487
Practical advice Pneumatic suspension Pneumatic suspension
1 2 3
Charging the pneumatic suspension from an external compressed-air source
i It is possible to charge the pneumatic suspension reservoir from an external compressed-air source.
4 Before charging the pneumatic suspen5
sion reservoir, turn the key in the ignition to position 2. Charging is possible via:
6 the tyre inflator connection ( page 487) or the front coupling head ( page 486)
7
the pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection
8 9
488
i Charging the pneumatic suspension reservoir via the pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection or the front coupling head requires a minimum pressure of 10.5 bar. Charging the pneumatic suspension reservoir via the pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection requires a minimum pressure of 7 bar.
Compressed-air drier (example)
1 Tyre inflator connection 2 Pneumatic suspension "Charge" connection
! After the compressed-air system has been charged through the front coupling head, the charge pressure available in the individual compressed-air circuits is limited when engine is not running.
Practical advice Trailing axle Trailing axle Trailing axle, pneumatic It is not possible to raise the trailing axle when vehicle is unladen or partially laden if there is insufficient charge pressure available. Run the engine until pressure regulator cuts out.
1
Nummek trailing axle, hydraulic It is not possible to raise the Nummek trailing axle when vehicle is unladen or partially laden if:
2
the hydraulic pump of the Nummek trailing axle is faulty
3
the fuse of the hydraulic pump motor on the Nummek trailing axle has blown ( page 525)
4
there is Insufficient oil in the hydraulic system of the Nummek trailing axle
5 6 7 8 9
489
Practical advice Steering system/Telligent® steering system Steering system/Telligent® steering system
1 To prevent faults from occurring in the 2
Risk of accident
The maintenance work should always be
Adopt appropriate driving technique and have steering system repaired immediately.
workshop.
The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
3 carried out by an authorised specialist
4 DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis5 6
G
steering system have maintenance work carried out on the steering system in accordance with the maintenance instructions.
it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 8 9
490
If the power steering assistance should fail, the vehicle will be very difficult to steer.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres Spare wheel under chassis
Spare wheel location Risk of injury
1
Take off the wheel cover.
G
Operate winch until cable is lightly tensioned.
When you release the spare wheel, the centre of gravity can easily change due to the heavy weight of the wheel, causing the wheel to fall or tip over and injuring you or other persons. Using the winch, let down or take out the spare wheel.
To remove the spare wheel
Loosen the nuts on the securing bolts. Lower the spare wheel and its crossmember with the winch, allowing the cable to pay out fully.
Spare wheel under chassis
1 Hand crank 2 Securing nuts
Pull the spare wheel out to the side or to the rear. Unscrew the spare wheel from the spare wheel cross member.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
491
Practical advice Wheels and tyres Spare wheel under tipper body
1
Risk of accident
2
G
Before removing the spare wheel from beneath the tipper body, observe body manufacturer's operating instructions.
3 4 Spacer
5
i Secure spare wheel with tyre size
6
385/65 R 22.5 and 425/65 R 22.5
7
only in conjunction with spacer from vehicle tool kit pocket.
8 9
492
1 Tipper body support (example) Raise tipper body and fit support ( page 385). Remove the spare wheel from beneath the tipper body.
Practical advice Wheels and tyres Spare wheel at side of chassis
Semitrailer tractor vehicles
1 Securing nuts 2 Wheel cover
i Clean securing nuts and securing bolts of rust/dirt and spray with rust release fluid.
For semitrailer tractor vehicles with side panelling: remove side panelling.
Unscrew and remove the retaining nuts.
1
For vehicles with underride guard: Remove underride guard.
Lower spare wheel with winch, completely unwinding the line.
2
Remove wheel cover 2.
Pull spare wheel out to the side.
Assemble hand crank with pump lever from the vehicle's tool kit, ( page 433).
Remove the retaining plate through the centre hole of wheel rim.
3 4
Place pump lever with hand crank on the winch so that locking sleeve on winch engages in the cutouts on pump lever.
5
Operate winch until cable is lightly tensioned.
6
Clean securing nuts and securing bolts of rust/dirt and spray with rust release fluid.
7 8 9
493
Practical advice Wheels and tyres
1 2
Changing a wheel Information on vehicle tools and emergency equipment ( page 430).
3
Risk of accident
G
Where an unapproved tyre size is used, the braking behaviour of vehicles equipped with Telligent® brake system can change. The Telligent® brake system, tachograph and speedometer must be re-calibrated if a tyre of a different size is fitted.
4
The maintenance work should always be carried out by an authorised specialist workshop.
5 6 7 8 9
494
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice Wheels and tyres
i When changing a wheel note the following carefully: Use only the tyre and wheel sizes approved for your vehicle type. Please also observe particularly the specific national approval regulations for tyres. These regulations stipulate under certain conditions a particular type of tyre for your vehicle or forbid the use of particular types of tyre. Please observe also the required tyre load capacity and tyre speed index for your vehicle. Please obtain the information from the vehicle certificate.
Special rims and wheel nuts are required for conversion of the vehicle from steel wheel rims to light-alloy rims. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Different wheel nuts are required on the front and rear axles for securing wheels light-alloy wheels. Do not interchange wheel nuts when fitting the wheels. Never use wheel nuts intended for pressed-steel wheels. Check tyre pressures. Observe the tyre pressure table ( page 579). Do not change the tyres' direction of rotation.
If the tractor vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer are equipped with different pressed-steel wheels (hub centring and centring with spherical spring washers): carry a spare wheel for centring with spherical spring washers. It is possible to use this wheel for both types of wheel centring until next opportunity for repair is reached. Use the wheel nuts for a wheel with hub centring. Use tightening torques as for wheels with hub centring.
1
Do not damage threads of attachment studs when changing a wheel.
6
2 3 4 5
7 8 9
495
Practical advice Wheels and tyres
1
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
2
Assemble the pump lever ( page 433). Positioning of vehicle jack
3
Risk of accident and injury
4 Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims
5 1 Wheel nuts with pressure plate 2 Wheel nut with spherical spring washer
Wheel nuts for light-alloy rims
1 Single tyre 2 Twin tyres Apply the parking brake.
6
Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0.
7
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension: this prevents re-adjustment of chassis height.
8 9
496
G
The vehicle's jack is intended only to raise the vehicle for a short time. The vehicle must be secured by axle stands of sufficient loadbearing capacity, if work is being carried out beneath it.
Practical advice Wheels and tyres !
Front axle with steel springs
All-wheel-drive front axle
1
Position vehicle jack only at the attachment points provided, never locate jack under the differential housing.
2
Do not raise vehicles with a loading crane or loading tailgate, using the hydraulic supports. Damage would be caused to the chassis.
3 4 Jacking point
Jacking point
Locate vehicle jack under the spring support, directly in front of the front axle member.
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the axle support frame.
5
i
6 7
If the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt the cab forwards ( page 453).
8 9
497
Practical advice Wheels and tyres
1 Air-sprung front axle
Air-sprung, steered leading axle (8x4/4)
2 3 4 5
Jacking point
6
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup of the air spring support, directly in front of the front axle member.
7 8
i If the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden underlay (from vehicle tool kit) and tilt the cab forwards, ( page 453).
9
498
Location point of jack
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup, directly in front of the front axle member.
i If the tyre is flat, drive onto the wooden underlay (from vehicle tool kit).
Practical advice Wheels and tyres Rear axle with steel springs
Air-sprung rear axle
Nummek trailing axle
1 2 3 4
Jacking point
Jacking point
Jacking point
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the axle support tube.
Locate the vehicle jack under the location cup on the air spring support.
Locate the jack under axle swing arm.
5 6
i Position the support plate on the jack such that the axle arm lies in the recess of the support plate.
7 8 9
499
Practical advice Wheels and tyres
1 Hendrickson leading axle (6x2/2)
Hydraulically steered trailing axle
Risk of injury
2
4
6
Jacking point
Jacking point
Locate the vehicle jack under the spring mounting support plate.
Locate the jack under the axle carrier.
i 7
G
When you release the wheel, the centre of gravity can easily change due to the heavy weight of the wheel, causing wheel to fall or tip over and injuring you or other persons. Carefully remove the wheel.
3
5
To remove a wheel
Position the support plate on the jack such that the spring mounting lies in the recess of the support plate.
8 9
500
i Set the jack in such a way that the support plate sits under the middle of the axle carrier.
Unscrew and remove the caps from the wheel nuts using the wheelbrace. Loosen all wheel nuts and remove all but three evenly distributed wheel nuts. Remove the last three wheel nuts when it is clear that the wheel is sitting on the wheel stud under no stress. Remove the wheel.
Practical advice Wheels and tyres To fit a wheel
Twin tyres with light-alloy wheels: Before fitting the inner wheel, place the fitting sleeve (from vehicle tool kit) on the wheel bolt. Place the wheels in position and screw on two or three wheel nuts finger-tight. Remove the assembly sleeve.
Assembly sleeve
Clean rust and dirt from locating surfaces of the wheel hub, wheel rim and wheel nuts. On wheel nuts with a pressure plate, lightly oil the friction contact surfaces between the pressure plate and the wheel nut.
Screw on the remaining wheel nuts and tighten them in a crosswise pattern. Observe correct tightening torque ( page 577). Rims with hub centring:
Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern. Observe correct tightening torque ( page 577).
1 2
! Ensure correct centering. The wheel bolts must located centrally in the holes of the wheel.
3 4
Rims with centring by spherical spring washers and wheel studs: Replace wheel and screw on two or three wheel nuts with spherical spring washers finger-tight.
5
6
Place wheel in position and screw on all wheel nuts.
7 8 9
501
Practical advice Wheels and tyres
1
!
2
Ensure correct centering. The wheel bolts must located centrally in the holes of the wheel.
3
Screw on remaining wheel nuts with spherical spring washers.
4
Tighten wheel nuts in a diagonal pattern. Observe correct tightening torque ( page 577).
Tyre inflator connection The tyre inflator connection is on the front of the compressed-air drier and has an integral pressure regulator.
5
! Only use the tyre inflator connection for inflating tyres. As far as possible do not charge the compressed-air system via the tyre inflator connection. The compressed air is then neither cleaned nor dried. Pressure protection is not provided via the pressure regulator.
Risk of injury
6
Compressed-air drier (example)
1 Tyre inflator connection
7
G
If you inflate tyres to an excessive pressure they can explode. In order to inflate tyres, reduce charge pressure in the compressed-air system to approximately 6 bar. Do not exceed a maximum tyre inflation pressure of 10 bar. The tyres can explode.
8 9
502
Practical advice Wheels and tyres To inflate tyres with the tyre inflation connection
1
Reduce the charge pressure in the compressed-air system to the required value given in the tyre pressure table, e.g. 6 bar.
2 3
This can be done, for example, by repeated operation of service brake.
4
Remove protective cap 1. Connect the tyre inflator hose (vehicle tool kit).
5
Inflate the tyre.
i
6
Observe tyre pressure table ( page 579).
7 8 9
503
Practical advice Electrical system Electrical system
1 2
Replacing bulbs Lamps and lights are essential components of vehicle safety. Therefore, ensure that all lamps are functioning at all times.
G
3
Risk of injury
4
Bulbs can be very hot. Therefore, before replacing, switch off and allow to cool. There is a risk of burning.
Do not use a lamp which has been dropped or whose glass bulb shows scratches. The lamp can explode. Do not hold the glass bulb with bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass bulb with alcohol or spirit and wipe with a lint-free cloth. Only operate lamps at correct rated voltage.
5
H1, H3 and H7 bulbs operate at high pressure and high temperature. There is a risk of burning and explosion.
6
Only operate bulbs in closed lamps constructed for that purpose. Only use replacement lamps of same type.
7
Store lamps and bulbs out of reach of children.
8 9
504
Protect lamps from moisture when in use and do not allow them to come into contact with liquids. Safety glasses and non-slip gloves must be worn while replacing bulbs to prevent injuries.
Xenon lamps operate at high voltage, high pressure and high temperature. There is a risk of fatal injury if live parts of the lamp and circuit equipment are touched. If the headlamp is damaged, do not touch the xenon lamp. Do not replace xenon lamps yourself, but have them replaced by an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For safety relevant work and work on safety relevant systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a specialist workshop.
Practical advice Electrical system Replacing a lamp To prevent a short circuit, switch off lighting before replacing lamps. Use only 24 Volt lamps of same type and of same wattage. Do not work with oily or moist hands. Hold lamps with a clean, lint-free cloth only. Check contacts for corrosion and clean if necessary. Check that all seals are sitting correctly. Replace damaged housing seals.
If the new lamp still does not function after replacement, have the lighting examined in an authorised specialist workshop. DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Have the headlamp setting regularly checked.
Overview of lamps
1
Exterior lighting
2
Main headlamps Main-beam headlamps
H1 24 V 70W
Dipped-beam headlamps H7 24 V 70W Turn signal lamp, front
3
PY 21W
Side lamp/parking lamp W 5W 24 V
4
Turn signal/ perimeter, front side
P 21/5W
5
Front foglamp (additional headlamp)
H3 24 V 70W
Perimeter, roof front
C 5W
6 7 8 9
505
Practical advice Electrical system Interior lighting
1
Rear lamps P 21W
Entry door trim lamp
2
Turn signal and brake lamp, reversing lamp, rear foglamp
R 10W
3
Perimeter, side marker, rear lamp and licence plate lamp
R Cab roof/ceiling lamp
4
Side marker lamp
LED lighting
Rotating signal lights
45W 24 V
5
MEGASPACE entry access step lamp
R 5W
7 8 9
506
10 W festoon lamp
Interior lighting
P 18W
Reading lamp
R 10W
Nightlight
W 1.5W
Reading lamp, sleeping 10W festoon berths lamp Swivelling reading lamp, reclining seat
6
Ambient lighting (blue)
5W halogen
Roofspace/footwell trim 60 – 150 mcd@20 mA Compartment above windscreen
765 – 1,575 mcd@20mA
Exterior stowage compartment lamp
5W festoon lamp
i Always carry a selection of spare bulbs in the vehicle for use in an emergency.
Practical advice Electrical system Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamps
Headlamps, front turn signal lamps
1
Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1. Swing out the headlamp.
2
Pull off the cable connector. Disengage the cover and remove.
3
Pull cable connector from the bulb.
Rear of headlamp (example) Headlamp (example)
1 Headlamp retaining screws 2 Front foglamps
3 Turn signal lamps 4 Dipped-beam headlamps 5 Main-beam headlamps 6 Side lamps
Detach retainer spring and take out the bulb.
4
Re-assemble the lamp in the reverse order.
5
Insert new bulb into the holder so that base plate locates in the cutout.
6 7 8 9
507
Practical advice Electrical system
1 Turn signal lamp Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1.
2 Swing out the headlamp. Pull off the cable connector.
3 Disengage and remove the cover.
Turn the lock of the bulb holder for turn signal lamp 3 to left and remove.
Side lamp/parking lamp
Press the bulb down, turn it to the left and withdraw it.
Swing out the headlamp.
Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.
Unscrew headlamp fixing screws 1. Pull off the cable connector. Disengage and remove the cover. Remove side lamps bulb holder 6. Withdraw the capless bulb. Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.
4 5 6 7 8 9
508
Practical advice Electrical system Side turn signal lamp, perimeter lamp
Press bulb holder 2 down, turn it to the left and remove it. Press the bulb down, turn it to the left and remove it. Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order. Foglamp
Remove the housing cover.
1
Disconnect cable connector 1. Detach retainer spring and take out the bulb. Re-assemble the lamp in reverse order. Insert new bulb into the holder so that base plate locates in the cutout 2.
2 3 4
1 Fixing screw 2 Lampholder for turn signal/perimeter lamp
5
Unscrew fixing screw 1 and remove complete lamp unit.
6
Pull off the cable connector.
7 1 Cable connector 2 Cut-out
8 9
509
Practical advice Electrical system
1 Rear lamps
Rear lamps Unscrew fixing screws 1. Remove the lamp lens.
2
Press the bulb down, turn it to the left and withdraw it.
3
To replace licence plate bulb, withdraw the reflector unit.
4 5 6 7 8
Replace the bulb and re-assemble in reverse order. Rear lamps, left
1 Fixing screws 2 Perimeter lamp/side marker lamp 3 Turn signal lamps 4 Brake lamp 5 Rear lamp 6 Reversing lamp 7 Rear foglamp 8 Licence plate lamp
9
510
Rear lamps, right
Practical advice Electrical system Front perimeter lamp
Side marker lamps
i
Press retainers 1 on the cable connector together and hold in this position.
Semitrailer tractor vehicle:
Pull off cable connector 2.
swing side panel out before changing side marker lamp in the side trim.
Unlock and remove side marker lamp.
2 3
i If the LED is defective, the complete side marker lamp must be replaced. 1 Securing bolts 2 Festoon bulb
6
Remove the lamp lens.
Refit both screws and tighten.
4 5
Unscrew fixing screws 1. Replace festoon bulb 2 and re-assemble in reverse order.
1
7
1 Cable connector 2 Side marker lamp
8 9
511
Practical advice Electrical system
1 Entry access step lamp
Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screwdriver. Pull off cable connector 2.
2
Press bulb holder 3 down, turn it to the left and withdraw it.
3
Press the bulb down, turn it to the left and withdraw it.
4
Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.
5 6
Entry door trim lamp
Entry lamp (example)
1 Lamp lens/cover frame 2 Cable connector 3 Bulb holder 1 Lens 2 Reflector
7 8 9
512
Practical advice Electrical system Lever off lamp lens 1 with a screwdriver.
Interior ceiling lamp
Lever off lamp lens with a screwdriver. Press down interior lamp 1 or reading lamp 3, turn to left and withdraw.
Pull off cable connector and withdraw reflector 2.
Nightlight 2: Pull off green cover and withdraw the plug-in cap lamp.
Press the festoon bulb towards left and withdraw.
Replace lamp and re-assemble in reverse order.
Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.
The lamp lens must audibly engage when it is replaced.
The lamp lens must audibly engage when it is replaced. 1 Interior lighting 2 Nightlight 3 Reading lamp
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
513
Practical advice Electrical system Exterior stowage compartment lighting
1 Reading lamp, berth 2 3 4 5 Lever out lamp lens from the pivot hinge (arrow) with a screwdriver.
6
Press the festoon bulb towards left and withdraw.
7
Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp lens.
8 9
514
Fold out the reading lamp. Release lamp lens with a screwdriver and remove. Press the bulb upwards, turn it to the left and withdraw it. Replace bulb and re-assemble the lamp lens.
Lever lamp lens out of the mounting at the back. Press the festoon bulb downwards and withdraw. Replace the festoon bulb and reassemble the lamp lens.
Practical advice Electrical system Adjustable reading lamp
Headlamp setting Correct headlamp adjustment is of great importance for road safety. Therefore, regularly check settings with a headlamp setting device (observe manufacturer's operating instructions). Observe correct basic headlamp beam settings, see type plate ( page 552).
Before adjusting:
1
Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface. The headlamp beam adjuster must be at a right angle to the vehicle. Correct tyre pressures. Set headlamp range control to the basic setting.
2 3
Switch on headlamps.
4 5
Turn the switch cover to position Ò.
unladen (ready for use – filled with fuel) and
Check each headlamp separately. Cover the headlamp not being checked, and the additional lamps.
Push bulb rearwards towards bulb holder and remove.
have one driver on board or a load of 75 kg
For how to check and adjust headlamp setting ( page 516).
6
In order to check headlamp setting, the vehicle must be 1 Reading lamp
Replace bulb and re-assemble in reverse order.
! Air-sprung vehicles: a pressure of at least 10.5 bar must be present in the compressed-air system.
7 8 9
515
Practical advice Electrical system
1 To check and adjust headlamp setting 2
Lateral adjustment
i
Turn adjusting screw 3 until lateral setting is correct.
Vertical adjustment:
The dipped-beam's light-dark boundary at a distance of 10 metres is determined by measuring headlamp height (centre of headlamp to ground) and deducting the stated basic headlamp setting.
If no lateral correction is necessary
Basic headlamp setting:
adjust height using adjusting screw 2.
1%
Then correct the height setting using adjusting screw 2.
3 4 5 1 Securing bolts 6
2 Inner adjusting screw (vertical adjustment) 3 Outer adjusting screw (lateral adjustment)
7 8 9
516
= 10 cm
1.5% = 15 cm 2%
= 20 cm etc.
Practical advice Electrical system
Partially masking headlamps – driving on left/right The headlamps are designed so that they illuminate the edge of the carriageway for a particularly long distance. The beam is asymmetrical. If vehicle is driven in countries where traffic drives on opposite side of the road to that of country where vehicle was approved, the beam falls not on the edge of the carriageway, but onto the opposite carriageway. This will dazzle road users travelling in the opposite direction.
Risk of accident
G
In countries where vehicles drive on the opposite side of the road to that of the country where vehicle was approved, there is a risk of dazzling from the asymmetrical dipped beam. To prevent dazzling of oncoming traffic, cover over headlamps with adhesive tape, following the details issued by Mercedes-Benz.
The area of the headlamp lens to be covered may be seen in the relevant illustration below for the vehicle.
Prepare adhesive tape using commercially approved opaque adhesive tape in accordance with the dimensions, apply to corresponding area of the headlamp.
1 2
i
3
Comply with national legislation when vehicle is operated in other countries and when used for international transport work.
4
The responsibility for vehicle lighting always rests with the driver.
5 6 7 8 9
517
Practical advice Electrical system
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Self-produced adhesive strips for left-hand drive vehicles
518
Practical advice Electrical system Left-hand-drive vehicles
1
1 H7 headlamp, right: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left 2 H7 headlamp, left: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left 3 Xenon headlamp, right: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left 4 Xenon headlamp, left: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on left
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
519
Practical advice Electrical system
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Self-produced adhesive strips for righthand drive vehicles
520
Practical advice Electrical system Right-hand-drive vehicles 5 H7 headlamp, right: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right. 6 H7 headlamp, left: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right. 7 Xenon headlamp, right: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right. 8 Xenon headlamp, left: covered area for use in countries where vehicles drive on right.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
521
Practical advice Electrical system
1 2
Fuses The fuse box is in the electrical equipment compartment on co-driver's side.
To open the electrical compartment Fold back floor covering in the direction of the arrow. Unlock fasteners 1 by lifting up. Remove lid from the electrical compartment.
3
Risk of fire
G
Use only fuses with the specified ampere rating. Do not fit fuses with higher ampere rating. This would result in damage to the electrical system or even burnt-out cables. Do not re-wire fuses or bridge them out.
To close the electrical compartment
4
Insert lid of the electrical compartment in lower guide slot and close.
5 6
Engage fasteners 1 and lock by folding down. 1 Fuse box fastener
7 8 9
522
Fold down floor covering.
Do not replace a fuse until the reason for the fault has been traced and rectified.
! Before replacing a fuse, switch off all electrical consumers and disconnect the batteries' negative (–) terminals.
Practical advice Electrical system To check/replace fuses
i
The individual electrical circuits are protected by safety fuses or a circuit breaker.
A faulty fuse can also be identified by the burnt out fuse wire.
If an electrical circuit failure occurs, switch off electrical consumers and check the fuses. Pull fuse out of its module with the safety fuse extractor provided, and insert it into the test socket. If the LED lights up, the fuse is in working order. If the LED does not come on, the fuse has blown or is defective.
1 2
Replacement fuses/fuse extractor Replacement fuses and fuse extractor are located in module B in the electrical compartment, see fuse assignment ( page 526).
3 4 1 Fuse extractor 2 LED 3 Test socket 4 Spare fuses
5 6
If necessary, replace the fuse. Insert the fuse.
7 8 9
523
Practical advice Electrical system
1
!
Circuit breaker
!
If a circuit breaker has tripped:
2
If a fuse blows repeatedly, have the cause of fault rectified in an authorised specialist workshop.
If a circuit breaker trips repeatedly, have the cause of the fault rectified in an authorised specialist workshop.
3 4 5
Rectify the cause of tripping and reset the circuit breaker back on.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
DaimlerChrysler recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safety-related systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
6 Circuit breaker
1 On 2 Tripped 3 To trip
7 8 9
524
Practical advice Electrical system Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle
1
The fuse for the hydraulic pump motor (5 amp safety fuse) is located in the hydraulics box on the left of the chassis.
2 3 4 Vehicles with Nummek trailing axle
1 Fuse (hydraulic pump motor)
5 6 7 8 9
525
Practical advice Electrical system
1 Allocation of fuses, diodes, relays 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
526
Practical advice Electrical system
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
1
F1
20
Driver's door
30
2
F2
20
Other I-CAN subscriber
30
F3
20
Co-driver's door
Fuse Base module A
30 ®
F4
15
Transmission control, Telligent gearshift
30
F5
20
Trailer
30
F6
10
Switch panel
30
F7
30
Distribution terminal 30.2
30
F8
30
Distribution body terminal 30.1
30
F9
20
Trailer ABS
30
F10
30
Distribution body terminal 15.2
15
F11
15
Telligent® brake system
30.1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
527
Practical advice Electrical system
1
Fuse
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
F12
15
Transmission control, Telligent® gearshift
30
F13
10
Auxiliary heating time switch
30
F14
10
Drive control, ignition lock
30
F15
20
Blower
30
F16
10
Interior lighting
30
F17
10
Instrument cluster, tachograph diagnostic socket
30
F18
20
Sliding/tilting sunroof
30
Base module A
2 3 4 5
F19
6 7
15
®
Telligent brake system
30 ®
F20
10
Transmission control, Telligent gearshift
15
F21
10
Engine control, alternator
15
F22
10
Trailer ABS
15
F23
15
Brake lamp, body
54
8 9
528
Practical advice Electrical system
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
1
F24
15
Permanent+ distribution, body
D+
2
F25
10
Diagnostic socket
15
F26
30
Distribution terminal 15
15
F27
10
Blower
15
F28
10
Drive control
Fuse Base module A
®
3
15
F29
10
Telligent brake system
15
F30
10
Instrument cluster, airbag
15
F31
10
Temperature sensor, audio device
15R
F32
10
Cigarette lighter
15R
4 5 6 7 8 9
529
Practical advice Electrical system
1
Fuse
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
F1
15
Battery heating
30
F2
20
Heated windscreen
30
F3
20
Heated windscreen
30
F4
10
Refrigerator
30
F5
10
Sun visor, loading tailgate
15
F6
10
Engine compartment lamp
15
F7
15
Socket 12 V
15
F8
10
Electronic rear axle additional steering
30
F9
10
Electronic rear axle additional steering
15
F10
10
Seat heating, belt checks
15
F11
10
Auxiliary air conditioning, reclining seat
30
F12
10
Auxiliary air-conditioning
15
F13
10
Audio device 12 V
30
F14
10
Lane Assist
15
Module A1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
530
Practical advice Electrical system
Rating
Consumer
Terminal
1
F1
20
Flame-start system
30
2
F2
20
Cab tilting pump
30
Fuse Module A2
®
F3
10
Telligent distance control
15
F4
10
Retarder
30
F5
10
Anti-theft alarm system
30
F6
10
Rotating beacon lamp
30
F7
10
Transfer case oil cooler
30
F8
20
Transfer case oil cooler
30
F9
10
24 V sockets
30
F10
Free
F11
Free
F12
Free
F13
Free
F14
15
Load compartment light
3 4 5 6 7 8
30
Module B
9
Spare fuse
531
Practical advice Electrical system
1
Module location
Designation
Terminal
K1
Trailer, body brake lamps
54
K2
Supply permanent+ signal
:D+
K3
Supply terminal 15.2
15
K4
Supply terminal 15.1
15
K5
Supply terminal 15R
15R
General module A (Relay)
2 3 4
Module A31 (Relay)
5 6 7 8 9
K1
Transfer case oil radiator
K2
Roller tipper/loading tailgate
K3
24 V socket
K4
Telephone fittings
K5
Free
K6
Free
K7
Free
K8
Free
K9
Free
K10
Free
532
15R
Practical advice Electrical system
Designation
1
K1
Heated windscreen/belt checks
2
K2
Heated windscreen/belt checks
K3
Transfer case oil radiator
K4
Battery heating
K5
Free
K6
Free
K7
Free
K8
Free
K9
Free
K10
Free
Module location Module A32 (Relay)
3 4 5 6
Module D (Diode withstand voltage) D1
7 Loading tailgate
8 9
533
Practical advice Unlocking and locking in an emergency Unlocking and locking in an emergency
1 2
Radio remote control A radio remote control with a flat battery can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle. Have the battery replaced by an authorised specialist workshop.
3 DaimlerChrysler recommends that you vis4 5
it a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. For work relevant to safety and work on safetyrelated systems in particular, it is essential that maintenance work is carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
6
i
7
When the radio remote control battery needs to be replaced, an event message appears in the multi-function display.
8 9
534
Risk of poisoning and explosion
G
Batteries contain toxic substances. Therefore, keep batteries out of reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Batteries can leak or explode if you try to recharge batteries that are not specially designed for re-charging. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire and do not try to open them with force or there is a risk of explosion.
Environmental note
H
Do not dispose of used batteries with household waste. Take discharged batteries to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to an authorised collection point for used batteries.
1 Battery 2 Spring contact Battery removal Lever up both sides of the radio remote control housing halves at key ring location. Push out old battery 1 from under spring contact 2 and remove it.
Practical advice Unlocking and locking in an emergency To fit the battery Insert new battery 1 under the spring contact with the positive terminal upwards 2 using a lint-free cloth.
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof mechanically The drive is located in rear area of the cutout for the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Press both halves of housing together until they engage.
Remove the 5 DIN 911 Allen key 2 from vehicle document wallet.
1
Pull the blind to opposite end of cutout and engage in position ( page 342).
2
Pull blind further out of roller mechanism (arrow) until opening 1 is visible.
3
Insert Allen key 2 into the opening and push upwards.
i Observe the terminal markings on the spring contact.
4
To close
Batteries are obtainable from any specialist workshop or from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Turn the Allen key clockwise.
5 6
1 Opening 2 Allen key
7 8 9
535
Practical advice Unlocking and locking in an emergency
1
Closing the tilting sunroof mechanically The drive is located in rear area of the cut-
2 out for the tilting sunroof. The opening is closed off with a plug.
3 4
To close Remove a flat screwdriver (blade width 4 mm) from vehicle tool kit pocket. Remove plug.
5 6 7 8 9
536
Insert flat screwdriver into the opening of the drive. Turn the screwdriver anti-clockwise. Replace the plug in the opening.
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing Jump-starting If the starter batteries are discharged, a second vehicle can be used to jump-start the vehicle.
Before starting from a mobile charging station (batteries with a mains power stage), pull out the mains plug. Overvoltage can damage electronic components in the vehicle.
Before jump-starting, disconnect mobile communications systems, e.g. telephone, radio equipment, fax, etc., from the electrical system.
!
Check and make sure that the vehicles are not touching each other.
Do not use quick charging devices for jump-starting.
Make sure that you have easy access to the batteries ( page 423).
A discharged battery can freeze at a temperature of –10 °C. Do not start the engine in these circumstances. First, thaw out the battery. Jump-start only from batteries with same operating voltage (12 V/24 V). Use jump leads with protection against polarity reversal, insulated terminals and a cross section of approximately 70 mm².
Risk of explosion and injury
G
1 2 3 4
There is a risk that batteries may explode due to build-up of explosive gas. Avoid creating sparks. Do not work with open flames or smoke in vicinity of the batteries.
5
Battery acid is caustic.
6
There is a risk of injury from ejection of acid spray from batteries if you bend over them when jump starting the vehicle.
7
Keep children away from batteries. Wash off acid spray from skin, eyes or clothing immediately with clean water. If necessary seek medical attention.
8 9
537
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
1 2 3 4
i Tractor vehicles with integrated batteries at the rear of the vehicle have a socket for jump-starting on the left side of the vehicle at fuel tank height. It is not necessary to uncouple the semitrailer. It is possible to use this external starting socket for jump-starting. Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0.
5 Switch off all electrical consumers. Take off the battery covers.
6 Begin with other vehicle's battery: 7
Connect first the positive terminals, then the negative terminals with the jump leads. Do not swap the connection terminals.
8 9
538
Run the engine of the assisting vehicle at fast idling speed. Turn the key in the ignition lock of the vehicle receiving assistance to position 3. When the engine has started allow it to run at idling speed.
i A description of the starting procedures for vehicles fitted with flamestart system can be found on page 129. Disconnect the jump leads, first from the negative terminals, then from the positive.
! When the jump leads are detached, the engine of the vehicle being started must only be running at idling speed.
Have the battery examined in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i Jump leads with protection against polarity reversal can be obtained from any specialist workshop or from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Environmental note
H
Batteries contain lead. Do not dispose of used batteries with household waste. Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take empty batteries to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to an authorised collection point for used batteries. Transport and store full batteries in an upright position. Secure batteries against tipping over during transport.
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
Retrofitting the towing coupling You can have a towing coupling 1 retrofitted to end cross-member 2 of the chassis.
! In order to prevent damage to tail cross-member, you must only fit the towing coupling in conjunction with a reinforcing plate 3. Using the towing coupling, you may only tow or manoeuvre vehicles with a total weight up to a maximum of 25 tonnes. You must not use the towing coupling for trailer operation or for vehicle recovery purposes.
1
Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer operation will result in damage to the end cross-member.
2
Observe the details on the type plate fitted to the towing coupling.
3 4 Towing coupling (example)
Information is available from any specialist workshop or your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
5 6 7 8 9
539
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
1
Tow-starting Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:
If the engine exceeds the permitted engine speed after the clutch is engaged, an alarm sounds.
Loads in excess of 25 tonnes or trailer operation will result in damage to the end cross-member ( page 539).
The retarder can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. To deactivate the retarder, remove fuse F 4 in module A2 in the electrical compartment ( page 526).
Do not exceed a towing speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Risk of accident
4
!
Vehicles with towing coupling:
G
2 3
!
The vehicle is equipped at the front with a
5 coupling jaw to allow manoeuvring or towing with the vehicle or for towing away.
6 7 8 9
540
The charge pressure display for brake circuit 1 and brake circuit 2 must show a minimum charge pressure of 8 bar.
To prevent damage to the engine select a higher driving gear or reduce the towing speed.
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing Hydro-pneumatic gearshift
Telligent® gearshift
Telligent® automatic gearshift
Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2.
Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2.
Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Select 4th gear.
Select 5th or 6th gear.
Select 4th gear.
Tow-start the vehicle. When a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
The gear display shows 4th gear in the left-hand position. Tow-start the vehicle. When a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, release the clutch pedal and slowly depress the accelerator.
1
The gear display shows 4th gear in the left-hand position.
2 3
Tow-start the vehicle. When approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, depress the accelerator. The Telligent® automatic gearshift engages.
4 5 6
i If you depress the accelerator slowly, the Telligent® automatic gearshift engages slowly. If you depress the accelerator quickly, the Telligent® automatic gearshift engages quickly.
7 8 9
541
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
1 2
Towing Depending on the cause of failure and the equipment fitted to your vehicle, you must perform a series of different measures before towing your vehicle.
3 Risk of injury and accident
G
4
The drive shaft can fall and injure you as it is being removed. Before removal, secure the drive shaft against falling.
5
When you start the vehicle moving, the traction control system (ASR) can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. Switch off ASR before you start to move the vehicle.
6 7 8 9
542
Risk of injury and accident
G
When the engine is not running On corners you may deviate from the carriageway or collide against the towing vehicle. The power steering does not operate. You must apply a great deal of force to steer the vehicle. Arrange with the driver of the towing vehicle a system of unmistakable communication signals and adopt suitable driving behaviour.
! When the engine is not running and you are towing your vehicle, there is a risk of damage to the transmission. Transmission lubrication does not function. Observe the "Towing vehicles with engine damage" section ( page 544) the brake system, gear selection and pneumatic suspension have no compressed air supply.
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
When towing the vehicle, run the engine if possible or provide a secure compressed-air supply from the towing vehicle. For short towing distances, you can charge the compressed-air system via an external compressed-air source ( page 486).
Vehicles with Telligent® stability control: Switching off ( page 91).
Telligent®
Vehicles fitted with Telma retarder:
stability control
i When towing a vehicle equipped with Telligent® stability control, you must also switch off the Telligent® stability control.
Risk of accident
1
G
The retarder can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. To deactivate the retarder, remove the fuse F 4 in module A2 in the electrical compartment ( page 526).
2 3 4
If the compressed-air system cannot be charged, you must mechanically release the spring-loaded parking brake ( page 483).
5 6 7 8 9
543
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
1 Attaching the towbar
Swing cover 1 of the coupling pin upwards.
2
Swing cover 2 of the coupling jaw downwards.
3
Release coupling pin 3, pivot it forwards through approximately 90° and lift it out.
4
Insert the towbar and allow coupling pin to engage in the lock.
5
Front coupling jaw
6 7 8 9
544
Towing vehicles with engine damage
i Four-axle vehicles: With the drive shaft fitted, the 2nd power steering pump takes over power steering during the journey.
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing Towing distance up to 1 km
Towing distance up to 60 miles (100 km)
Shift the transmission into neutral.
1
!
!
All-wheel-drive vehicles:
Risk of transmission damage. When the engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. You may tow a vehicle with engine damage at a maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h) and for a maximum distance of 0.5 miles (1 km).
Risk of transmission damage. When the engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. You may tow a vehicle with engine damage and high range selected at a maximum speed of 25 mph (50 km/h) and for a maximum distance of 60 miles (100 km). You do not need to remove the driveshaft to the drive axle.
Switch transfer case into the position for road travel ( page 252).
2
Vehicles with hydro-pneumatic gearshift (HPS):
3
®
Vehicles with Telligent gearshift/ automatic gearshift: If the vehicle's electrical power supply and/or compressed-air supply has failed, you must remove the driveshaft before towing the vehicle. Shift the transmission into neutral. All-wheel-drive vehicles:
4 5
Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift/ automatic gearshift: If the vehicle's electrical power supply and/or compressed-air supply has failed, you must remove the driveshaft before towing the vehicle.
6 7
Transmission
1 Locking plug
8
Switch transfer case into the position for road travel ( page 252).
9
545
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing Vehicles with Telligent® gearshift/ automatic gearshift:
1
Press the j or k button on the multi-function steering wheel. The multi-function display shows
2
Transmission control back-up mode – Towing.
3
! If the multi-function display shows Towing not possible – remove propeller shaft, you may tow the vehicle at a
4 GP setscrew for high range
5 Unscrew locking plug 1 on transmission above drive shaft.
6
Remove the GP setscrew from vehicle document wallet; screw it fully into the opening and tighten.
Enable GS back-up function menu ( page 473). Activate GS back-up function ( page 474). Press the æ or ç button on the multi-function steering wheel until the highlight is positioned on Towing.
7 8 9
546
maximum speed of 5 mph (10 km/h) and for a maximum distance of 0.5 miles (1 km). Failure to comply will lead to transmission damage. For longer distances or for higher speeds, you must remove the driveshaft.
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing Towing distances greater than 60 miles (100 km)
! Risk of transmission damage. When the engine is not running, transmission lubrication does not function. If you want to tow the vehicle further than 60 miles (100 km) or at a speed higher than 25 mph (40 km/h), you must remove the driveshafts to the driven axles. Remove driven axle driveshafts.
To be observed with transmission and transfer case damage Remove driven axle driveshafts.
To be observed with front axle damage
1
i Towing requirements are the same as with engine damage.
Risk of injury and accident
2 3
G
4
When you start the vehicle moving, the traction control (ASR) can produce uncontrolled braking of the vehicle. Switch off ASR before you start to move the vehicle.
Raise the front axle.
5
6 7 8 9
547
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
1 All-wheel-drive vehicles: 2 3
Remove the propeller shaft between rear axle and transfer case.
Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2.
Vehicles with pneumatic suspension:
Engage the differential lock (transverse lock).
Set chassis height as required with control panel ( page 290). Four-axle vehicles:
4 5 6
To be observed with rear axle damage
Remove both driveshafts. Do not raise the front axle.
!
Vehicles with two driven rear axles:
If you raise the front axle of a laden four-axle vehicle, this will result in damage to chassis. Only raise the front axle of four-axle vehicles when the vehicle is in the unladen condition.
Remove driveshafts at both rear axles.
7 8 9
548
Removing driveshafts, rear axle HL 7, HD 7
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Remove the propeller shaft between front axle and transfer case.
Rear axle HL 7, HD 7
1 Circlip
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing Unscrew and remove the oil drain plugs at the planetary hubs. Catch the oil that runs out in a suitable container. Remove the planetary hub end covers.
Rear axle HL 7, HD 7
Re-fit closure cap.
1
i If vehicle is to be towed for more than 60 miles (100 km), add oil to the planetary hubs. Use clean oil only.
2
Pull out the circlips with pliers.
3
Remove the drive shafts together with sun gear. For this, use the special tool or a M 8 x 120 mm bolt.
4
2 Special tool
5 6 7 8 9
549
Practical advice Jump-starting, tow-starting/towing
1 Removing drive shafts, rear axle HL 6,
Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2.
2
Engage the differential lock (transverse lock).
HL 8
Do not raise the front axle.
3
Unscrew the bolt connections on the wheel hub.
4
Remove the drive shaft at the wheel end.
5 Rear axle HL 6, HL 8
6 1 Bolt connections on the wheel hub 7 8 9
550
Risk of accident
G
In Germany, for instance, maximum vehicle height must not exceed 4 metres (13 ft 1 in). When transporting the vehicle on a low-loader, the maximum permitted vehicle height of 4 metres (13 ft 1 in) must not be exceeded. Observe carefully the height of bridges and other structures on the route.
Technical data Vehicle type plates Service products and capacities Operating data 1 Tyre pressure table Limiting-speed feature Compressed-air reservoir
2 3
Radio remote control
4 5 6 7 8 9
551
Technical data Type plates Type plates
1
Vehicle type plate Information on the type plate
2 Type Basic headlamp setting
3 Flue gas coefficient
The vehicle type plate is located on the door frame. The vehicle identification number is located on the longitudinal member. The type plate and the vehicle identification number are explained here using an example.
Rear axle ratio
4 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 5
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible axle loads
6 7 8 9
552
1 Vehicle type plate (example) 2 Vehicle identification number on the right-hand longitudinal member (example)
Technical data Type plates Vehicle identification number (VIN) WDB
934.032
1
K
1 264253
WDB
2
Vehicle manufacturer 934.032
Vehicle model designation number 1
Steering wheel (1 = left-hand-drive vehicles, 2 = right-hand-drive vehicles) K
3
Code letter or code number of manufacturer's works 264253
Vehicle identification end number
4
Vehicle type designation
5 18 46 18
Maximum gross vehicle weight in metric tonnes 46
6
Engine power output in bhp (= x 10)
7 8 9
553
Technical data Type plates
1 Vehicle type plate – explanatory notes 2 3
The model designation, vehicle design, axle version and number of wheels or pairs of wheels are given on the vehicle type plate. The meaning of the individual figures is explained here using the example (model 934.03).
4 5 6 7
Vehicle type plate (example)
934.03 930 4
8x8/4 Model designation Vehicle design 0 Platform trucks 2 Tippers/concrete mixers 4 Semitrailer tractor vehicle
03 Axle version 00...04 07, 08 11 20, 21 23 22 14/16/24/40 18, 41 30, 31, 42 32 33
8 9 1. Nummek trailing axle 2. Hendrickson leading axle
554
8
Number of wheels or pairs of wheels x8
Number of wheels or pairs of wheels /4
4x2 4x4 6x21 6x2 6x2/22 6x2/4 6x4 6x6 8x4/4 8x6/4 8x8/4
Number of steered wheels
Technical data Type plates
1
Engine type plate
2 3 4 1 Engine type plate
5
2 Engine type 3 Engine number
6 7 8 9
555
Technical data Service products and capacities Service products and capacities
1 Service products are all products needed to operate the vehicle such as:
2 3 4 5
Lubricating products (oils and grease) Brake fluid
!
Coolant
Service products or special lubricant additives which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz could result in damage to the assemblies.
Fuels Windscreen cleaning fluid Mercedes-Benz achieves optimum compatibility by ensuring that the service products used in the vehicle conform to the materials used in the vehicle. You should only use service products in
6 your vehicle which meet the strict 7
Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will provide information about Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. Only then is optimum compatibility with the vehicle guaranteed.
8
i Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to restrict your warranty rights if service products or special lubricant additives which have not been approved are used.
Risk of injury
G
Service products constitute a health hazard. Always wear appropriate protective clothing and a breathing mask when handling service products. If possible, avoid inhaling vapours. Do not allow service products to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Clean affected areas of skin with soap and water. Change out of soiled clothing without delay. If the service products come into contact with the eyes, wash them thoroughly with clean water and consult a doctor if necessary. If any service product is swallowed, a doctor should be consulted immediately. Service products are highly flammable. For this reason, avoid fire and naked flames and refrain from smoking when handling service products.
9
Keep service products away from children.
556
Technical data Service products and capacities
Environmental note
H
Unless they are handled properly, service products can damage people's health and the environment. Do not allow service products to enter the ground the sewage system surface water.
Further notes on handling different service products storage disposal are available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Engine oils
1
Only use engine oils complying with Sheet No. 228.5 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products. These engine oils have a high standard of quality and have favourable effects on
2
engine wear fuel consumption
3 4
exhaust gas emissions.
Observe the legal requirements.
5
Service products Drums
6
Parts which have been contaminated by the service products, such as filters or cleaning cloths
7
must be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner.
8 9
557
Technical data Service products and capacities
1
!
2
Non-approved engine oils could lead to malfunctions and engine damage. The use of such oils could affect your warranty rights.
3
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
4 Oil change 5
Oil change intervals depend on vehicle operating conditions and on the quality of the oil used in the engine.
6
The driver information system automatically shows the time for an oil change as an event message in the display. Select the SAE class (viscosity) of engine oil in accordance with the outside temperatures.
! If oil for all-year-round operation is not used in the engine, change the engine oil in good time before the cold season commences, and add an approved engine oil of the specified SAE class. SAE engine oil classes
Single-grade oils
7
Multigrade oils
8 9
558
Technical data Service products and capacities The following data on engine oils is programmed in the "Adjusting service products" menu of the driver information system:
Mixibility of engine oils
Sheet No. of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.
quality grade
SAE class Adding/topping up the engine oil When topping up, DaimlerChrysler recommends that you only use engine oils of the same quality grade and SAE class as the oil filled at the last oil change.
Adjusting oil quality
1
If in the unlikely event the
!
engine oil type
If you top up the engine oil or perform an oil change using an engine oil of a lower quality, the quality of this oil must be adjusted in the "Adjusting service products" menu in the driver information system.
SAE class filled in the engine are not available: top up the engine oil using another approved mineral or synthetic engine oil.
! Mixing oils has a negative effect on the benefits of high-quality engine oils.
If you top up using the higher quality engine oil this quality should in no way be entered in the driver information system.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
559
Technical data Service products and capacities
1
i The
2
quality SAE class
3 4 5
if necessary, the approval in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, e.g. Sheet no. 228.5 can be seen from the drum designation on the oil reservoir.
6 7 8 9
560
Engine oils for use with bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel) Only use engine oils complying with Sheet No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products which are approved for operation with bio-diesel fuel which have not been mixed or mixed with standard diesel fuels
! The engine oil change intervals must be shortened.
Environmental note
H
If your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuels, special precautions must be taken and national specifications complied with when disposing of engine oils. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Technical data Service products and capacities Coolant The coolant is a mixture of water and a corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent or water and a coolant additive without antifreeze properties. In order to maintain corrosion protection and to increase the boiling point, the coolant must remain in the cooling system all the year round.
! The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the coolant should be checked every six months. Renew the coolant every three years, since the level of corrosion protection gradually decreases. Water alone is not permissible as a coolant, even if antifreeze protection is not required. The water in the coolant must satisfy the requirements specified on sheet no. 310 of the MercedesBenz Specifications for Service Products.
If the water quality is not sufficient you must filter and/or treat the water. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Do not increase the concentration of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze beyond 55% by volume (= maximum antifreeze protection). Above this concentration, antifreeze protection deteriorates and heat dissipation is less effective. During the colder months, check corrosion protection and antifreeze more frequently.
Coolant mixing ratios Water % by vol.
Corrosion/ antifreeze % by vol.
1 Antifreeze protection to °C
2
50
minimum 50
–37
45
maximum 55 approximately –45
3 4
Environmental note
H
Unless they are handled properly, coolant can constitute a risk both for people and for the environment. Coolant must not be allowed to get into the sewage system, surface waters, the ground water or the ground itself. Dispose of used coolant in an environmentally friendly manner. Observe the legal requirements. Further information on how to handle, store and dispose of coolants is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
561
5 6 7 8 9
Technical data Service products and capacities
1 Coolant additives without antifreeze 2 3 4
No antifreeze protection is needed in countries in which the temperature is always above freezing point. It is permitted in these countries to mix water with a coolant additive without antifreeze properties instead of a corrosion/antifreeze additive. Comply with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.
!
5 6
Renew the coolant once a year. Do not use fuel additives such as anticorrosion protection oils for the cooling system.
7 8 9
562
Diesel fuels
Adjusting the fuel grade
Only use standard automotive diesel fuels in accordance with DIN EN 590. Grades such as marine diesel fuel, heating oils, etc. are not permitted.
When the vehicle is delivered, the "Adjusting service products" menu of the driver information system is set to the normal sulphur content (in %) in the fuel available in the country of delivery.
! Filter the fuel before adding it when refuelling the vehicle from drums or canisters. This prevents malfunctions in the fuel system as a result of impurities in the fuel. Special additives must not be used as they could lead to malfunctions and engine damage. The use of such additives could affect your warranty rights.
If you refuel the vehicle occasionally or predominantly in other countries, you must adjust the normal sulphur content of this country in the "Adjusting service products" menu in the driver information system. For an overview of sulphur content in % of fuel available in other countries, see ( page 567).
Technical data Service products and capacities Diesel fuels at low temperatures At low outside temperatures paraffin separation may reduce the diesel fuel's freeflowing properties. To prevent operating problems, use diesel fuel with improved flow properties in the winter months. In Germany, winter-grade diesel fuels are sold which remain reliable in operation down to approximately –20 °C. Wintergrade diesel fuel can normally be used without risk of malfunctioning at the outside temperatures expected in the country where it is on sale.
Fuel additives
i Do not use additives in winter diesel fuels. The fuel's flow properties could be impaired by any such fuel additive. If summer-grade diesel fuel or wintergrade fuel with less resistance to low temperatures is in use, add a quantity of flow improver or kerosene, depending on the outside temperatures.
The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This improves the flow properties of the diesel fuel by approximately 8 °C. Risk of fire and explosion
G
Adding petrol lowers the flash point of the diesel fuel. This adds to the risk of handling this fuel mixture.
1 2 3 4
Do not add petrol to diesel fuel.
5
Add the additives to the diesel fuel at the appropriate time, before paraffin separation reduces the diesel's flow properties. Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be removed by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by stopping the engine in a heated area.
6 7 8 9
563
Technical data Service products and capacities
1 Flow improvers 2
The effectiveness of flow improvers cannot be guaranteed with all fuels. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3
The addition of flow improvers does not affect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel. Kerosene
4 The addition of 5% by volume of kerosene 5 6 7 8
improves the cold-resistance of diesel fuel by approximately 1 °C. The proportion of kerosene additive must not exceed 50%.
If summer-grade diesel fuel or wintergrade fuel with less resistance to low temperatures is in use, add a quantity of flow improver or kerosene, depending on outside temperatures. Risk of fire and explosion
G
Adding kerosene lowers the flash point of the diesel fuel. This increases the risk of handling this fuel mixture. Mix kerosene with diesel fuel only in the fuel tank.
Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel) It is also possible to run the vehicle on biodiesel fuel. This results in a slightly higher fuel consumption a slightly reduced engine power output increased white smoke formation after a cold start Please refer to the notes on Sheet No. 135 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.
i
Add the kerosene first, then the diesel fuel.
i
Add as little as possible, consistent with outside temperatures.
Comply with the relevant safety regulations.
It is possible to mix standard diesel fuel with FAME fuel (fatty acid methylester).
Run the engine for a while to ensure that the additive reaches all parts of the fuel system.
9
564
For safety reasons, only mix bio-diesel fuel with diesel fuel in the vehicle's fuel tank.
Technical data Service products and capacities ! The fuel filter and engine oil filter must be replaced 600 miles (approximately 1,000 km) after switching to bio-diesel fuel. The fuel filter and engine oil filter must be replaced with every oil change. Bio-diesel fuel shortens the service life of conventional fuel filters. DaimlerChrysler therefore recommends fitting a special fuel prefilter. Further information is available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. When switching to bio-diesel fuel the "Service Products" menu of the driver information system is set to FAME ( page 198).
The intervals for oil changes and replacing the engine oil filter are shorter. Only use bio-diesel fuel in accordance with DIN EN 14214. Special additives are not permitted. Fuels which do not comply with DIN E 14214 or which have had special additives added could cause malfunctions or even engine damage. Bio-diesel fuel corrodes painted surfaces. For this reason, they must not be allowed to come into contact with paintwork. Rinse off immediately with water. Only use engine oils complying with Sheet No. 228.5 or 228.3 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products.
If the vehicle is not used for long periods of time, bio-diesel fuel could adhere to components of the fuel system. If the engine is not used for longer periods of time, use up the bio-diesel fuel and run the vehicle for a short time on conventional diesel fuel and leave it in the fuel system. The use of bio-diesel fuels is not recommended for vehicles which spend long periods out of use (e.g. fire engines). Observe the manufacturer's operating instructions on how to run the auxiliary heating on bio-diesel fuel.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
565
Technical data Service products and capacities
1 2 3 4 5 6
Environmental note
H
If your vehicle runs on bio-diesel fuel, ask your disposal plant whether you must collect the engine oil separately. Not every manufacturer of two refined (lubricant manufactured from used engine oil ) can process bio-diesel fuel to produce enriched engine oil. Special precautions must be taken and national specifications complied with when disposing of engine oils. Information is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
7 8 9
566
Mercedes-Benz will not accept any warranty claims for damage if
Bio-diesel fuel (FAME fuel) at low temperatures
such damage is in directly or indirectly caused by the use of bio-diesel fuels which do not comply with DIN E 14214
Bio-diesel fuels complying with DIN E 14214 remain reliable down to an outside temperature of approximately –20 °C.
the specifications in accordance with Sheet No. 135 of Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products for operation with bio-diesel fuels are not observed malfunctions or consequential damage (e.g. paintwork damage) are caused by the handling or by operation with biodiesel fuels.
The vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This improves the flow properties of the diesel fuel. Flow improvers The addition of flow improvers does not affect the cold stability of the bio-diesel fuel.
Technical data Service products and capacities Table showing fuel sulphur content
1 Sulphur content (% by weight)
0...0.1 Europe
0.1...0.3
0.3...0.8
0.8...
Austria
Italy
Azores
Armenia
Albania
Belgium
Lithuania
Bulgaria
Azerbaijan
Andorra
Czech Republic
Luxembourg
Iceland
Estonia
Bosnia-Herzegovina
Denmark
Netherlands
Madeira
Georgia
Croatia
Finland
Norway
Poland
Latvia
Montenegro
France
Portugal
Russia
Macedonia
Romania
Germany
Slovakia
Malta
Slovenia
Great Britain
Spain
Moldova
Yugoslavia
Greece
Sweden
Turkey
Hungary
Switzerland
Ukraine
2 3 4 5 6 7
Ireland
8 9
567
Technical data Service products and capacities
1
Sulphur content (% by weight) 0...0.1
2
0.1...0.3
0.3...0.8 India
Australia
Australia
Asia
Hong Kong
Indonesia
Korea
Israel
3
Japan Singapore
4
Taiwan Thailand
5 North America
Mexico
6
USA South America
7
Canada
Africa
8 9
568
Argentina South Africa
0.8...
Technical data Service products and capacities
1
Service products and capacities Series
Engine with oil filter
Capacity approximately
Service product
Engine oil ( page 557)
Sheet no.1
2
501 LA
541.9..
maximum 34 litres
(228.0/1)
+ refrigerator block
541.9..
maximum 27 litres
(228.2/3)
502 LA
542.9..
maximum 38 litres
228.5
+ refrigerator block
542.9..
maximum 29 litres
3 4 5 6
1 MB Specifications for Service Products.
7 8 9
569
Technical data Service products and capacities
1 2
Transmission2
G 231
Series
Capacity approximately
Service product
Sheet no.1
715.5..
15.5 litres
Transmission oil SAE 75W-90
235.11
15.5 litres
Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W, 80W/85W
235.1
1.0 litres
Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W/85W
235.5
Transmission oil SAE 75W-90
235.11
+ transmission oil cooler
3
G 210 – G 260
4
+ transmission oil cooler
1.0 litres 715.5..
+ power take-off
5 6 7 8 9
NA 121 – 1b
+0.4 litres
NA 121 – 2b; 121 – 2c
+0.6 litres
NA 123 – 10b; 124 – 10b
+0.6 litres
NA 123 – 11b/c; 124 – 11b/c
+1.0 litres
NA 125 – 10b; 125 – 10b/R
+0.7 litres
NA 125 – 11b/2c;
+1.3 litres
NMV 150, NMV 200
+2.9 litres
1 MB Specifications for Service Products. 2 G 210–G 260 with transmission oil cooler: only use transmission oil complying with Sheet No. 235.11.
570
Technical data Service products and capacities
Transfer case
VG 1700
Series
Filling caService product pacity approximately
Sheet no.1
750.86.
11.4 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90
235.0, 235.6
Transmission oil SAE 80, 80W
235.1, 235.5
80W/85W
235.11
+ oil cooler Transfer case
VG 2400
Retarder (Voith)
2 3
+0.5 litres 750.850
13.2 litres
Transmission oil SAE 75W/85W
235.4
750.851
10.2 litres
Transmission oil SAE 75W-90
235.11
4 5
750.852 + oil cooler
1
+0.5 litres 5.9 litres
Single-grade engine oil SAE 10W, SAE 20W-20, SAE 30
6
227.0
7
1 MB Specifications for Service Products.
8 9
571
Technical data Service products and capacities
1 2
Series
Front axle
Differential hub reduction AL7
730.108
Differential hub reduction AL7
730.109
3 4
Rear axle
5
Through-drive AD7 730.110 Planetary hubs Differential hub reduction HL7, 748.210, 748.211 HD7 748.220, 748.230
6 Through-drive HD7
7
748.231, 748.240 748.214, 748.217 748.236, 748.239 748.211, 748.231 748.215, 748.217 748.237, 748.239
Planetary hubs HL6
746.213
HL8
748.590
14.0 litres
1 MB Specifications for Service Products.
572
Sheet no.1
235.0 235.6 235.8 235.0 235.6 235.8
2.5 litres 3.5 litres each 3.25 litres 15.0 litres
8 9
Filling capac- Service product ity approximately 7.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90 7.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90 8.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 each1.5 litres 8.0 litres Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90 Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 85W-90 Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 12.0 litres
Hypoid transmission oil SAE 90, 235.0 85W-90 Hypoid transmission oil SAE 75W-90 235.8
Technical data Service products and capacities
Series
Power steering
Filling caService product pacity approximately
Sheet no.1
4.5 litres
236.3, 236.6
Steering gear oil or transmission fluid (ATF)
2 3
+ Telligent® steering system Cab tilting unit
1
Tipper oil or hydraulic fluid or
236.2, 236.3
transmission fluid (ATF)
236.6, 341.0
Fifth-wheel coupling, trailer coupling
Multipurpose grease
267.0
Axle load compensation linkage
Multipurpose grease
267.0
Propeller shaft universal joint, slide piece
Multipurpose grease
267.0
Front axle king pin
Multipurpose grease
267.0
4 5 6 7 8
1 MB Specifications for Service Products.
9
573
Technical data Service products and capacities
1 2 3 4 5
Series
Clutch – hydraulic section Hydraulic component of the Range change transhydraulic-pneumatic gear- mission shift: + NMV/WSK Battery cable terminals Fuel tank Cooling system
6 7
541.9...
502 LA engine + Retarder (Voith) + Retarder (Telma)
542.9...
8 9
1 MB Specifications for Service Products.
574
Sheet no.1
331.0 331.0
1.37 litres
501 LA engine
Windscreen washer system, headlamp cleaning system
Filling capac- Service product ity approximately Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus) 1.27 litres Brake fluid (DOT 4 plus)
Acid-resistant grease 300– Diesel fuels ( page 562) 950 litres 34.5– Coolant ( page 561) 36.5 litres 45.0 litres +13.5 litres +11.5 litres 16.0 litres Water with windscreen washer concentrate S for summer or W for winter. Observe the correct mixing ratio.
350 130 310
371.0
Technical data Operating data Operating data
1
Operating data – overview Compressed-air system (reservoir pressure) Service brake (constant pressure system) Brake circuit 1
minimum 6.8 bar
Brake circuit 2
minimum 6.8 bar
Brake circuit on trailer/semitrailer
minimum 5.5 bar
Pressure regulator (activation/deactivation pressure) Spring-loaded brake release circuit External compressed-air source (charging the compressed-air system)
2
10.0 bar
3
approximately 10.2/12.3 bar
4
minimum 5.5 bar maximum 10.0 bar
Gearshift at transmission
minimum 7.0 bar
Auxiliary consumers
minimum 5.5 bar
5 6 7 8 9
575
Technical data Operating data
1
Engine Engine speed limiter (transmission in neutral)
2
approximately 1,700/min
Engine speed limitation (emergency running mode)
1,300 rpm
Idling speed
3 4 5
approximately 500 rpm ®
Minimum engine operating speed (vehicles with Telligent automatic gearshift)
approximately 550 rpm
Exhaust brake (operating range)
900 – 2,300 rpm
Engine oil pressure (idling speed)
minimum 0.5 bar
Engine oil pressure (rated speed)
minimum 2.5 bar
Rated speed
approximately 1,800 rpm
Operating temperature (coolant temperature)
6
Normal operation Arduous operation (automatically reduced engine power output)
7
Maximum permissible coolant temperature
8
Tyre pressure Maximum permissible air pressure for inflating tyres ( page 579)
9
576
approximately 80 – 95 °C from approximately 105 °C 110 °C
10.0 bar
Technical data Operating data
1
Wheel nut tightening torques (Nm) Light-alloy wheels
600 ± 25 Nm
Pressed-steel wheel, hub centering by wheel hub
600 ± 25 Nm
Pressed-steel wheel, centring by spherical spring washers and wheel bolts Wheel nut cover caps
2
450 Nm 50 – 70 Nm
3
Spring actuator Spring-loaded brake release screw release torque Spring-loaded brake release screw tightening torque
4 maximum 70 Nm minimum 25 Nm, maximum 45 Nm
Release pressure (reservoir pressure in compressed-air system)
minimum 8.0 bar
Release pressure (with outside source of compressed air)
minimum 6.5 bar
Release pressure with tyre air pressure (spare wheel)
minimum 8.5 bar
5 6 7 8 9
577
Technical data Operating data
1 2 3
Fifth-wheel coupling (low maintenance) Tightening torque (Nm) for the friction lining of the securing bolts (see manufacturer's operating instructions) Pneumatic suspension Filling the air-spring system via tyre inflator connection or front coupling head
minimum 9.0 bar
Filler valve, red protective cap
minimum 6.5 bar
4 Speed limiter
5
Limiting speed (there may be variations in certain countries)
6
Steering wheel play
7
Maximum permissible steering wheel play (measured at the rim of the steering wheel with the engine running)
8 9
578
approximately 85 km/h
30 mm
Technical data Tyre pressure table Tyre pressure table Single tyres Risk of accident
G
If tyre pressures are too low, road safety and tyre life will both be adversely affected; fuel consumption and tyre wear will increase, and there will be an increased risk of tyre damage.
i Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.2 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient temperature. Remember this when checking tyre pressures inside a building – particularly in winter.
!
!
The tyre pressure on the front axles for Michelin tyres must be set in accordance with the values in the table +1 bar. Do not, however, exceed the maximum permissible tyre pressure of 8.5 bar. Exceptions to this are Michelin tyres which have a recommended tyre pressure of 9 bar.
Use only wheels and tyres of a size approved for this type of vehicle. Comply in particular with the permissible tyre specifications for each country. These specifications may specify a certain type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit the use of certain types of tyres which may be permissible in other countries.
1
Comply also with the required tyre load capacity and the speed index for your vehicle.
2 3 4 5 6 7
Example: Room temperature = approximately 20 °C Outside temperature = approximately 0 °C Required tyre pressure: specified tyre pressure + 0.4 bar
8 9
579
Technical data Tyre pressure table
1 Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate) 2 3 4 5
Tyres 12.00 R 20 12.00 R 20 13.00 R 20 13.00 R 20 14.00 R 20 14.00 R 20 12 R 2 2.5 12 R 22.5 13 R 22.5 13 R 22.5
LI 154 157 163 164 160 164 149 150/152 154 156
6,000 6.5 6.5 – – – – 7.25 7.0 6.5 6.25
6,300 7.0 6.75 – – – – 7.75 7.5 6.75 6.5
1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)
6 7 8 9
580
6,500 7.25 7.0 – – – – 8.0 7.75 7.0 6.75
6,700 7.51 7.251 – – – – 8.251 8.01 7.251 7.01
6,900 7.75 7.5 – – – – – 8.251 7.5 7.5
7,100 8.0 7.75 – – – – – 8.51 7.75 7.75
7,500 8.5 8.0 – – 5.5 – – – 8.5 8.25
8,000 – 8.75 6.5 – 6.0 6.0 – – – 8.75
8,500 – – 7.00 6.25 6.5 6.5 – – – –
9,000 – – 7.75 6.75 7.0 6.75 – – – –
9,500 – – 8.25 7.00 – 7.25 – – – –
10,000 – – – 7.5 – 7.5 – – – –
Technical data Tyre pressure table Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate) Tyres 12 R 24 12 R 24 285/60 R 22.5 295/60 R 22.5 295/80 R 22.5 305/60 R 22.5 305/70 R 22.5 315/60 R 22.5 315/70 R 22.5 315/80 R 22.5 385/65 R 22.5 425/65 R 22.5
LI 156 160 148 150 152 150 150 152 154 156 160 165
6,000 – – 8.25 7.5 7.0 7.75 7.5 7.5 7.0 6.25 – –
6,300 6.25 – 8.75 8.0 7.5 8.25 8.0 7.75 7.5 6.75 – –
6,500 6.5 – – 8.25 7.75 8.5 8.25 8.25 7.75 7.0 – –
1 6,700 6.75 – – 8.5 8.01 8.75 8.5 8.5 8.0 7.51 6.5 –
6,900 7.0 – – – 8.251 – – 8.75 8.25 – 6.75 –
7,100 7.25 6.75 – – 8.51 – – 9.0 8.5 7.75 7.0 –
7,500 7.75 7.0 – – – – – – 9.0 8.25 7.25 –
8,000 8.25 7.5 – – – – – – – 8.75 8.0 6.5
8,500 – 8.25 – – – – – – – – 8.5 6.75
9,000 – 8.75 – – – – – – – – 9.0 7.25
9,500 – – – – – – – – – – – –
10,000 – – – – – – – – – – – –
2 3 4 5 6
1 Trailing axle +1 bar (maximum tyre pressure 9.0 bar)
7 8 9
581
Technical data Tyre pressure table
1
Twin tyres
!
2 3 4 5
Use only wheels and tyres of a size approved for this type of vehicle. Comply in particular with the permissible tyre specifications for each country. These specifications may specify a certain type of tyre for your vehicle or prohibit the use of certain types of tyres which may be permissible in other countries. Comply also with the required tyre load capacity and the speed index for your vehicle.
6 7 8 9
582
Technical data Tyre pressure table Tyre pressure in bar, axle loads in kg (see type plate) Tyres 12.00 R 20 12.00 R 20 14.00 R 20 14.00 R 20 12 R 22.5 12 R 22.5 13 R 22.5 13 R 22.5 12 R 24 12 R 24 285/60 R 22.5 295/60 R 22.5 295/80 R 22.5 305/60 R 22.5 305/70 R 22.5 315/60 R 22.5 315/70 R 22.5 315/70 R 22.5 315/80 R 22.5
LI 150 153 157 160 146 148 149 150 153 156 145 147 148 147 148 148 148 150 150
9,500 6.0 – – – 6.0 6.0 – – – – 7.0 6.0 – 6.0 6.0 – – – –
1
10,000 10,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 12,500 13,000 13,500 14,000 14,500 15,000 16,000 17,000 18,000 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.5 7.75 8.0 8.5 – – – – – – – – 6.5 6.75 7.25 7.5 7.75 8.0 8.5 8.75 9.0 – – – – – – – – – – – 5.5 5.75 6.0 6.25 6.75 – – – – – – – – – – – – 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 6.25 6.75 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.25 – – – – – – – – 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.5 – – – – – – – – – 6.25 6.5 6.75 7.25 7.75 8.0 8.25 – – – – – – 6.0 6.5 6.75 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.5 – – – – – – – – – 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.25 – – – – – – – – – – 6.75 – – – – – – – 7.5 7.75 8.25 8.75 – – – – – – – – – – 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 8.0 – – – – – – – – – 6.5 6.75 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.5 – – – – – – – – 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 8.0 – – – – – – – – – 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 – – – – – – – – – 6.75 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.5 – – – – – – – – 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 – – – – – – – – 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 8.25 8.75 – – – – – – – – 6.25 6.5 7.0 7.25 7.5 8.0 – – – – – – –
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
583
Technical data Speed limiter Speed limiter
1 The vehicle's maximum speed is limited to 2 3 4 5 6
85 km/h. Variations may be permitted by legal requirements in all countries concerned. Once a road speed of 50 mph (approximately 85 km/h) has been reached, the engine automatically regulates the speed. Caution is needed when overtaking. Risk of accident
G
If the driver exceeds the maximum speed of the vehicle, there is a risk of rolling for articulated vehicles. You would also overload the vehicle's brakes and tyres. There is a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle, particularly if you are driving down long steep slopes with a loaded vehicle.
7 8 9
584
You are responsible for ensuring that the legal maximum permitted speed is not exceeded. Downshift and engage the engine brake early on to make full use of the engine braking effect on long downhill sections. Slow the vehicle down by braking if necessary.
Technical data Compressed-air reservoir Compressed-air reservoir Compressed-air reservoir information for first-time buyers and other users Accompanying documentation in accordance with Council Directive 87/404/EEC and EN 286-2 The reservoir is a–
b–
c–
only to be used for motor vehicle compressed-air systems and those of their trailer vehicles, and only for the supply of compressed air; to be marked for identification with a works number and the reservoir manufacturer's name together with the principal operating data and the EC mark – see type plate or engravings directly on the reservoir wall, to be manufactured with a "declaration of conformity" in accordance with Article 12 of Directive 87/404/EEC.
d–
to be secured to the vehicle by retaining straps (clamps). On buses, direct mounting at the threaded rings is permitted.
– only to be cleaned using non-alkaline
In the case of aluminium reservoirs, soft liquid-proof retaining strap inserts are to be used to prevent contact between different materials. Securing straps are to be set in such a way that the base connecting seams are not touched and that the reservoir is not subjected to any strain that would impair operating safety.
– to be emptied at regular intervals suffi-
Coatings applied to aluminium reservoirs must not contain lead, and the top paint coating must only be applied on top of a suitable primer coat. Steel threaded unions for aluminium reservoirs must have a corrosion-proof coating,
1
detergents (aluminium reservoir)
– to have the interior visible through the threaded unions. cient to prevent the accumulation of condensation (drainage ring nut at lowest point of reservoir). e–
to require no maintenance if Item d is complied with.
f–
No welding, heat treatment or other operation relevant to safety is to be performed on the pressure bearing walls of the reservoir (casing, base, ring nuts).
g–
Internal reservoir pressure may exceed maximum operating pressure Ps by not more than 10% for a brief period.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DaimlerChrysler AG
9
585
Technical data Compressed-air reservoir
1
Aluminium tank
Steel tank
2 3 4 5 6 7
Type plate, aluminium reservoir (example)
Type plate, steel reservoir (example)
1 SAG, Austria SMA, Italy 2 MB part number 3 Volume (litres) 4 Testing establishment code number 5 Year
1 L&S, Germany Elesfr, France LMP, Portugal Silverton Engineering, South Africa 2 MB part number 3 Volume (litres) 4 Year 5 Testing establishment code number
8 9
586
Technical data Compressed-air reservoir Aluminium tank Volume (litres)
1 MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
4
004 432 1001
20
004 432 1401
35
003 432 9801
6.0
003 432 4601
20
004 432 4601
35
004 432 2701
7.5
004 432 1201
25
003 432 9601
35
004 432 4901
10
004 432 1301
25
003 432 9701
40
003 432 4001
15
003 432 3701
30
003 432 3401
40
004 432 0101
20
003 432 5201
30
003 432 3801
45
003 432 0101
20
003 432 5301
30
004 432 4401
60
004 432 4101
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
587
Technical data Compressed-air reservoir
1 Steel tank 2 3 4
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
Volume (litres)
MB Part No.
4
004 432 0501
20
004 432 1901
30
004 432 4301
6.0
003 432 0601
20
004 432 3101
35
003 432 9501
7.5
004 432 0701
25
003 432 9301
35
004 432 2601
10
004 432 0801
25
003 432 9401
40
003 432 3901
15
003 432 3301
25
004 432 4201
40
004 432 0001
20
003 432 1401
30
003 432 2001
45
003 432 9901
20
003 432 1501
30
003 432 3201
60
004 432 4001
5 6 7 8 9
588
Technical data Radio remote control Radio remote control
1
Radio type approvals Country
Radio remote control transmitter MB Part no. 001 820 12 97
Control unit basic module MB Part no. 000 446 00 18
Immobiliser MB Part no. 020 545 39 32
Austria
1
1
GZ 100 243-ZB/97
Belgium
1
1
RTT/D/X 1443
Denmark
1
1
ALR 96129
Finland
1
1
G 750723 H
France
1
1
2
Germany
1
1
DL 0001 97
Great Britain
1
1
12462
Greece
1
1
EK 482
Hungary
1
1
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Application for radio type approval submitted 2 Not required
8 9
589
Technical data Radio remote control
1 2
Country
Radio remote control transmitter MB Part no. 001 820 12 97
Control unit basic module MB Part no. 000 446 00 18
Immobiliser MB Part no. 020 545 39 32
Ireland
1
1
IRL TRA 24/5/60/23
Italy
1
1
DGPGF/SEGR/2/FO/ 000197
Luxembourg
1
1
L-2431/10203-02H
Netherlands
1
1
NL 97021470
Norway
1
1
NO 96000845-R
Portugal
1
1
ICP-022TC-97
Spain
1
1
E D.G.Tel. 07 97 0641
Sweden
1
1
2
Switzerland
1
1
BAKOM 96.1106.G.P.
3 4 5 6 7
1 Application for radio type approval submitted 2 Not required
8 9
590
Technical terms
ABS (anti-lock braking system) ABS is an integral component of the Telligent® brake system (->BS). This prevents the wheels from locking when the vehicle is braking. The vehicle thus remains steerable. It is operational from walking pace, regardless of road surface conditions. ADR (Accord européen relatif au transport international des marchandises dangereuses par route) ADR is the European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road. This corresponds to the German GGVS agreement.
AG (automatic gear selection) ->Control unit abbreviation System which automatically determines and selects the best possible gear for the driving situation, accelerator pedal position, engine operating conditions, etc. The automatic gear selection is a monitored electronics system and forms part of the Telligent® automatic gearshift system. AHK Trailer coupling APU (air processing unit) Four-circuit safety valve with filter dryer and tyre inflator connection
ART (distance-regulating cruise control) ->Control unit abbreviation Driving system which enables you to maintain a specified distance from the vehicle in front.
1
If there is no vehicle in front, the system works like conventional ->cruise control.
3
If a slower vehicle is detected ahead, the distance-regulating cruise control reduces your speed enough to allow you to maintain the set specified distance from the vehicle.
2
4 5 6 7 8 9
591
Technical terms
1 ASR 2 3
(acceleration skid control) Function of the Telligent® braking system. Acceleration skid control prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the vehicle pulls away or accelerates, regardless of the road conditions.
4 Belt drive 5
Drive connection from the engine to the engine accessories, such as the alternator, coolant pump or cold compressor.
6 7 8 9
592
BS (Telligent® brake system) ->Control unit abbreviation Electronic braking system which comprises the regulating functions for ->ABS, ->ASR, ->SR, continuous brake (engine brake/->retarder) and Brake Assist. Takes into consideration the current vehicle weight and any trailer/ semitrailer when distributing brake power. This always ensures that the vehicle/trailer combination is braked with optimum effect.
BTS (battery cut-off switch) ->Control unit abbreviation BW (binary value) Stored binary values in the diagnostics menu serve only as information for service personnel. These values will help the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to diagnose and rectify malfunctions more rapidly. CAC (Customer Assistance Center) DaimlerChrysler customer service centre offering advice on all matters concerning the vehicle, and support in the event of a breakdown.
Technical terms
CAN (Controller Area Network) Means that the control units are networked and exchange data with each other. Controls vehicle functions, such as the central locking system or windscreen wipers, depending on the vehicle or environmental conditions and delivers information to the ->FIS. This system connects the vehicle's electronic systems. CODE Checks whether a person entering or driving the vehicle is authorised to do so, and forms part of the anti-theft system.
Control unit Electronic component that controls the functions of the engine or transmission, for example.
Drive train Collective term for all vehicle components which belong to the drive, such as:
Control unit abbreviation The control unit abbreviation sorts an event message and information in the Diagnostics menu of the corresponding electronic system.
Engine
Cruise control Driving system which makes it possible to store any speed above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Transfer case
Clutch
1 2 3
Transmission Propeller shafts
4
Axle drive shafts
5
Driving mode selector switch Switch with which the driver of a vehicle with Telligent® automatic gearshift can select automatic or manual operating mode.
6 7 8 9
593
Technical terms
1 EAB 2 3 4 5 6
(electronic trailer brake) Supplements the Telligent® braking system
EDW (anti-theft alarm system) ->Control unit abbreviation The towing vehicle and trailer/ semitrailer are protected against break in and theft by motion and sound sensors. EHZ (additional electronic rear axle control) ->Control unit abbreviation Telligent® steering system
Engine number Number specified by the manufacturer and marked on the cylinder head, by which each engine can be clearly identified. Engine oil viscosity Measurement of the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The viscosity is better the higher the temperature the oil can withstand without becoming too thin, or the lower the temperature the oil can withstand without becoming too thick.
EPS (electronic pneumatic gearshift) Transmission shifting which electronically transfers the shift pulses to the transmission. The gears are shifted by pneumatic units on the transmission. ->EPS III S, ->EPS III optional EPS III S (electronic pneumatic gearshift) Telligent® gearshift, third generation EPS III SA (electronic pneumatic gearshift) Telligent® automatic gearshift, second generation with automated clutch. FAME fuels (fatty acid methyl ester) FAME fuels are bio-diesel fuels which are based on fatty acid methyl ester.
7 8 9
594
Technical terms
FFB (radio remote control) The radio remote control can be used to: lock and unlock the driver's door first and then the co-driver's door centrally lock and unlock the driver's and co-driver's doors activate and deactivate the antitheft alarm system FIS (driver information system) The driver information system can be used to call up important information relating to the vehicle and to modify the vehicle's settings. The ->multi-function display serves as the display window for the driver information system. You can use the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate in the ->driver information system menus.
FLA (flame-start system) ->Control unit abbreviation The flame-start system is a cold-start aid for use at very low outside temperatures (below –20 °C). The flame-start system is automatically activated below about –4 °C. FM (front module) ->Control unit abbreviation Electronic control module, which is linked via the ->CAN to the base module ->GM and the rear end module ->HM.
FR (drive control) ->Control unit abbreviation Electronic control module; incorporating the functions of ->AG and the clutch. GGVS (German regulations for the transport of dangerous goods by road) Two EMERGENCY OFF switches (battery cut-off switches) should be fitted in vehicles used for transporting dangerous goods. When the EMERGENCY OFF switch is operated, the engine stops running and all major electrical consumers are disconnected from the vehicle's electrical circuit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
595
Technical terms
1 GM
(base module) ->Control unit abbreviation Central electronic module, which is connected via the ->CAN to the front module ->FM and the rear end module ->HM.
2 3 GS
4 5
(gear control unit) ->Control unit abbreviation The gear control unit is a monitored electronic system and is part of the Telligent® gearshift or Telligent® automatic gearshift system.
6 7 8 9
596
GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) The GSM standard establishes the guidelines for constructing a cellular digital mobile system. Thanks to this uniform standard, it is possible to use a mobile phone abroad. Within GSM there are approximately 300 network operators in 120 countries. The transmission method is digital. HM (rear end module) ->Control unit abbreviation Electronic control module; which is connected via the ->Controller Area Network to the base module ->GM and the front module ->FM.
HPS (hydraulic pneumatic gearshift) Transmission shifting which transfers the shift movements to the transmission hydraulically. Pneumatic units on the transmission shift the ->splitter unit and the range group. HZR (heating control and air conditioning) ->Control unit abbreviation Electronic control module for the automatic air conditioning. INS (instrument panel) ->Control unit abbreviation The instrument panel is an independent control unit. It controls the indicator lamps, needle instruments and the multi-function display.
Technical terms
KB Clutch operation KOM (communications gateway) Communications interface KS (clutch control) ->Control unit abbreviation Clutch control is a monitored electronic system which forms part of the Telligent® automatic gearshift system.
KSA (enhanced central locking system) The enhanced central locking system includes ->central locking for the driver's and co-driver's door, the electric power windows and electric sliding/ tilting sunroof. When the vehicle is locked, the side windows and sliding/ tilting sunroof close automatically if they are still open. If the sliding/tilting sunroof closing lock switch is activated, the sliding/tilting sunroof will remain open. LIM (limiter) Driving system which makes it possible to limit the road speed from 10 mph (15 km/h) upwards.
LM rim (light metal rim)
1
Loading platform approach aid When reverse gear is engaged, the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle appears in the ->multi-function display. M+S tyres (winter tyres) (slush and snow) Tyres which bear the marking M+S are intended for wintry road conditions. The rubber mix of these tyres contains special additives which prevent the tyres from becoming "hard" even at low temperatures. For safety reasons, M+S tyres should be fitted as soon as temperatures fall below +4 °C.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
597
Technical terms
1 MBS
(Mercedes-Benz item number) Diagnostics menu display
2 Menu 3
The displays in the multi-function display of the ->driver information system (FIS) are arranged in menus. Several commands are in the menus.
4 MFD 5 6
(multi-function display) Display in the instrument panel which has ->menus to show information and settings for the ->driver information system.
7 8 9
598
MR (engine control) ->Control unit abbreviation Engine control is a monitored electronic system which forms part of the Telligent® engine system. It controls the engine, e.g. the engine idling speed. MSF (modular shift panel) ->Control unit abbreviation MSS Engine start/stop function
Multi-function display Display in the instrument panel which has ->menus to show information and settings for the ->driver information system. Multi-function steering wheel Steering wheel with control buttons which control the ->driver information system. MW (measured value) Stored measured values in the diagnostics and results menus serve only as information for service personnel. These values will help the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to diagnose and rectify malfunctions more rapidly.
Technical terms
Network operator logo Identifying symbol for the mobile network operator
PFA (particle filter system) ->Control unit abbreviation
RS
NMV (power take-off, engine connected)
PSM (programmable special module) ->Control unit abbreviation Interface for the connection of special-purpose bodies to the vehicle electrics/electronics system.
Rumble strip noise The lane assist warning sound reproduced over the vehicle audio system which informs you that you are driving across road lane markings on construction sites.
RAD (radio) ->Control unit abbreviation
SAE code Fault code specified by the Society of Automotive Engineers.
NOX Treatment of gas emissions (DeNOx) ->Control unit abbreviation NR (level control) The chassis frame can be lowered, raised or moved to the normal position (driving position) using the Telligent® level control panel. Overrevving range Speeds in the red area of the rev counter at which the engine can only operate for a short period.
Retarder The anti-wear brake which acts on the propeller shaft. Supplements the continuous brake.
1
(retarder control) ->Control unit abbreviation
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
599
Technical terms
1 SMS 2 3 4 5 6 7
(short message service) Mobile network service enabling small amounts of data to be sent and received. This can be data, text or even illustrations with up to a maximum of 160 characters.
SPA (lane assist) ->Control unit abbreviation Lane assist is a convenience system which continuously monitors the position of the vehicle in relation to the roadside markings through a camera behind the windscreen. If the lateral lane markings are driven on or crossed, an audible warning in the form of a "rumble strip" noise will sound over the left-hand or right-hand cab loudspeaker.
8 9
600
Speed index Part of the tyre designation; indicates the speed range for which a tyre is permissible. SR (stability control) In critical driving conditions, such as sudden swerving or cornering too fast, Telligent® stability control reduces the risk of skidding, jack-knifing or toppling, regardless of the vehicle load or road surface conditions. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) ->Control unit abbreviation Airbag and seat belt control
Stand-by position Function of the Telligent® level control ->NR. With sufficient reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system, Telligent® level control maintains the chassis frame at the stored height for approximately five seconds. TCO (tachograph) ->Control unit abbreviation TEL Hands-free device (telephone) ->Control unit abbreviation Telligent® Telligent® systems are networked electronic systems, which have been developed specially for Actros. These systems control the engine, transmission and brakes, for example.
Technical terms
Tightening torque (Nm) Force with which bolt connections, e.g. wheel bolts, are tightened. Nm = Newton meters TMB (co-driver's door module) ->Control unit abbreviation TMF (driver's door module) ->Control unit abbreviation TP (telematics platform) ->Control unit abbreviation Traction Force which is transferred from the vehicle to the road via the tyres, and which describes the grip.
Vehicle identification no. Number specified by the manufacturer and affixed to the longitudinal member chassis, by which each vehicle can be clearly identified. ->VIN VIN (vehicle identification number) Number specified by the manufacturer and affixed to the longitudinal member, by which each vehicle can be clearly identified. WR (roll control) Telligent® roll control electronically regulates the damping effect of the suspension, automatically adapting it to the vehicle load, driving situation and road surface characteristics. Telligent® roll control is a monitored electronics system which forms part of Telligent® level control.
WS (maintenance system) ->Control unit abbreviation Depending on the vehicle's operating conditions, the Telligent® maintenance system calculates service due dates for: oil change (service work) in mechanical assemblies (service points) general service work on other service points WSK (converter and clutch unit) ->Control unit abbreviation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
601
Technical terms
1 Xenon headlamps
ZL
2
ZV
3 4
An electric arc in the front Xenon headlamps generates light. A xenon lamp delivers twice as much light as a modern bulb with a heating filament.
ZDS (central data accumulator) ->Control unit abbreviation Independent component of the GM. Serves as a back-up memory for programmable vehicle electronics data.
5 ZHE 6
(auxiliary heating) ->Control unit abbreviation
7 8 9
602
(auxiliary steering) ->Control unit abbreviation (central locking) When the vehicle is locked, the driver's and co-driver's doors lock at the same time.
Index
A ABS 76 ABS activation 87 ABS deactivated 85 ABS, event messages 79 ABS or Telligent® brake system event messages 79 Actros Info (menu) 160 Actros Info menu 160 Adjustable reading lamp 143 Adjusting (seat) 41, 118 Adjusting oil quality 202, 559 Adjusting the driver's suspension seat 41 Adjusting the exterior mirrors 45 Adjusting the steering wheel 44 ADR/GGVS emergency-off switch 126 After the engine has been started 50 Air conditioning 75 Air conditioning switch 325 Airbag 70, 72
Air-recirculation mode 321 Alarm 178 Alarm menu 178 Ambient lighting 142 Anti-lock braking system 76 Anti-theft alarm system 105, 111 Applying parking brake 62 Arrangement of fuses, diodes, relays 526 ART 280 Ashtray 344 ASR 87 Attaching the towbar 544 Audio and mobile communication equipment 73 Audio equipment 169, 359 Operating audio equipment 359 Operating cassette player 364 Operating CD player 363 Regulating volume 360 Selecting radio station 361
Audio menu 169 Automatic air conditioning 315 Automatic bulb check 379 Auxiliary air conditioning 323 Auxiliary heating 177, 327 Auxiliary heating menu 177 Axle load indicator 163
1 2 3
B Batteries 423 Battery care 427 Charging 428 Checking the fluid level 426 Disconnecting 424, 425 Before starting the engine 40 Belt tensioner 72 Belt tensioners 70 Berth 32, 121 Berth access step 122 Berth switch unit 32 Bio-diesel fuels (FAME fuels) 564, 566 Bleeding the fuel system 468 Brake assist system 77 Brake system 483
603
4 5 6 7 8 9
Index
1 Brakes 371 2
Brake system 77 Braking with anti-lock protection Breakdown assistance 540 Breakdown equipment 39 BS 77
84
3 C 4 5 6 7
Cab locking 453 Cab stowage compartments (exterior) 348 Cab stowage compartments (interior) 345 Cab tilt lock 51 Cab tilting system – checking oil level/ topping up 460 Cables, compressed-air and hydraulic lines 375 Care 397
8 9
604
Cassette player 364 CD player 363 Central locking 103, 105 Central locking system 34, 102 Changing a wheel 494 Changing gear Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 216 Hydro-pneumatic shifting 55 Telligent® automatic gearshift – Automatic mode 240 Telligent® automatic gearshift – Manual mode 245 Telligent® gearshift 57 Charging the refrigerant accumulator 324 Checking anti-corrosion protector 415 Checking compressed-air brake system for leaks 412 Checking compressed-air lines 412 Chocks 39
Cigarette lighter 344 Climate control 307 Clock 148 Clock menu 197 Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof manually 535 Closing tilting sunroof manually 536 Cockpit 14 Cockpit switch units 22 Combination switch 134 Communication equipment 73, 74 Compressed-air lines 375 Compressed-air reservoir 585 Compressed-air system 50 Charging compressed-air system via front coupling head 486 Charging compressed-air system via tyre inflator connection 487 Constant engine speed 260
Index
Construction-site filter 326 Construction-site mode 229 Continuous brake 261 Control unit abbreviations 208 Converter and clutch unit 166 Converter and clutch unit temperature 166 Cool box 347 Coolant 561 Coolant level 421 Coolant temperature 162 Coupling up 373 Cruise control 275 Cruise control sound 184 Cruise control sound menu 184
D Deleting SMS 170 Demisting 322 Demisting windows 322 Diagnostics 207 Diagnostics menu 207 Diesel fuels 562 Differential lock 185 Differential lock permanent display 185 Differential locks 253 Dipped-beam headlamps 59, 132, 507 Direct gearshift Telligent® gearshift 222 Distance control Telligent® distance control distance warning 288 Distance control (ART) 280 Door release mechanism 104 Driver information system 150 Driver's vehicle checks 38 Driving position (chassis) 294 Driving safety systems 76 Driving tips 368 Driving with ASR 88
E Econometer 145 Electro-hydraulic cab tilting system 457 Electromagnetic fan clutch lock-up 467 Electronic-pneumatic gearshift 218, 231, 437 Emergency equipment/ first-aid kit 39, 430 Emergency gearshift (NMV) 481 Emergency-off switch 127 Engine brake 263 Engine emergency running mode 462 Engine oil consumption 370 Engine oil grade 202 Engine oil grade display 202 Engine oil level 163, 418 Checking the engine oil level 418 Engine oil viscosity 200 Engine oil viscosity menu 200 Engine oils 557
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
605
Index
1 Engine oils for use with bio-diesel 2 3 4 5 6 7
fuel 560 Engine start/shutdown with cab tilted 461 Engine tunnel shelf 347 Engine type plate 555 Engine-dependent power take-off (NMW) 258 Engine-resident power take-off 259 Enhanced central locking system 106 Entry access step lamp 504, 512 EPS III S 214, 218 EPS III S/EPS III SA 437 EPS III SA 214, 231 Event info menu 175 Event menu (driver information system) 175 Events menu 210 Exterior door release mechanism 104 Exterior mirrors 302
8 9
606
F FAME fuels (bio-diesel fuels) 564, 566 Fifth-wheel coupling (low maintenance) 578 Fire extinguisher 39, 430 First-aid 39, 430 First-aid kit 39, 430 Flame-start system 49, 129 Flashing light 504 Flow improvers 564, 566 Fluids and lubricants Adjusting quality/viscosity 198 Fluids and lubricants menu 198 Foglamp 504, 509 Fresh air filter 326 Front foglamps 133, 504, 505, 507
Fuel additives 563 Fuel consumption 369 Fuel gauge 148 Fuel grade 562 Fuel level 40 Fuel level and range 168 Fuel prefilter 469 Fuel sulphur content 199, 567 Function check of brake systems 77 Fuses 522 Checking/replacing 523 Miniature circuit breaker 524 Fuses, Diodes, Relays 522, 526
Index
G Gear indicator 219, 231 Gear lever 220, 232 Gearshift 214 Telligent® gearshift 225 Gearshift unit 26 Telligent® automatic gearshift Telligent® gearshift 220 Grab handles 36 GS back-up function menu 473
232
H Hands-free system 74, 350 Hazard warning lamps 137 Head restraint 120 Headlamp Headlamp setting 515 Headlamp flasher 134 Headlamp range control 133 Headlamps 507 Checking headlamp setting, adjusting 516 Headlamp cleaning system 24, 136, 419 Headlamps partially covered – driving on left/right 517 Heating and heater-air conditioning control panel 309 Hendrickson leading axle 297 High-pressure cleaner 397
High-pressure compressor 410 Hillholder 130 HPS 214, 215, 434 Hydraulic lines 375 Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 54, 214, 215, 434, 470
1 2 3
I Idling speed 265 Ignition lock 37 Ignition lock positions 37 Immobiliser 125 Indicating 40, 60 Indicator lamps 20 Inflating tyres with tyre inflator connection 503 Insect screen 342 Instrument lighting 143 Instrument panel 18
4 5 6 7 8 9
607
Index
1 Instrument panel switch units, centre 2 3
section 28 Interior ceiling lamp 504, 513 Interior lighting 138, 504, 505 Switching off 140 Switching on 139 Intermittent wipe 304 Item number of control unit 209
4 J
Jack 39, 430 Jump-starting 537
5 K 6
Kerosene 564 Key 103
7 8 9
608
L Lamps 504, 505 Lane assist 96 Language menu 182 Leading axle 297 Level control 186, 290 Permanent display 186 Level control permanent display 186 Light switch unit 135 Light switches 59, 132 Lighting 40, 132, 504 Limiter 269 Liquid load volume monitoring 194 Load compartment light 135 Load info 165 Load monitoring 378 Load pressure monitoring 192 Load temperature monitoring 189 Loading platform approach aid 379 Locking the driver's and co-driver's doors 34, 65 Locking the driver's door 34, 65 Locking using key 65 Locking using radio remote control 65
M Main-beam headlamps 60, 132, 134, 507 Maintenance 171 Maintenance menu 171 Maintenance system 408 Manual mode Telligent® automatic gearshift 243 MB item number 209 Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting system 454 Menu navigation 155 Mirror heating 29, 303 Miscibility of engine oils 559 Monitoring info 161 Monitoring info menu 161 Multi-function display 156 Multi-function steering wheel 25
Index
N Navigation system 73 New SMS 169 New SMS menu 169 Nightlight 141 Nummek trailing axle 489 O Occupant safety 68 Oil change intervals 558 Oil level in engine Checking engine oil level 163 Opening and closing doors 102 Opening and closing roof hatch 343 Opening and closing the side windows 30, 338 Opening and closing the tilting roof 342 Opening the door from the inside 65
Opening the door from the outside 36 Opening the maintenance flap 417 Opening using the radio remote control 35 Opening with the key 34 Operating temperature 576 Outside stowage compartment lighting 504, 514 Outside temperature display 147 Overview of lamps 505
P Parking 371 Parking brake 130 Applying 62 Release 52 Parking vehicle Telligent® automatic gearshift 250 Particulate filter 326 Perimeter lamp 509, 511 Pneumatic suspension 290, 578 Charging pneumatic suspension via external compressed-air source 488 Poly-V-belt 462 Power take-off 255, 257, 258, 259 Preselected direct shift 223
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
609
Index
® 1 Preselected gearshift with Telligent
2 3 4 5 6 7
driver's choice 227 Pressure 579 Programmable special module (PSM) 256 Pull away Telligent® gearshift 222 Pulling away 52 Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 54, 216 Telligent® automatic gearshift – Automatic mode 239 Telligent® automatic gearshift – back-up function 476 Telligent® automatic gearshift – Manual mode 244 Telligent® automatic shifting 57 Telligent® gearshift 55 Telligent® gearshift back-up function 475 Pump lever 39, 430, 433
8 9
610
R Radio 73, 359, 361 Radio and mobile communication equipment 74 Radio mode arrow key menu 187 Radio remote control 35, 109, 534, 589 Radio type approvals 589 Raised driving position 295 Rapid change in direction 238 Reading lamp 140, 504, 505, 514 Rear foglamp 134, 504, 505 Rear lamps 505, 510 Rear-view mirror 302 Reflective safety jacket 39, 431 Refuelling 372, 562 Reminder 160 Removing a wheel 500 Replacement fuses/fuse extractor 523 Replacing a lamp 505
Reservoir pressure 162 Reservoir pressure for brake circuits 1 and 2 149 Reservoir pressure in the compressed-air system 50, 575 Restraint systems 68 Retarder 264 Rev counter 144 Reversing warning 99 Rocking out bogged-in vehicle 230, 238 Roll control 95 Rotating beacon lamp 136, 504, 505 Running the vehicle in 370
Index
S Safety regulations for air conditioning 75 Seat belt 46, 69 Checking the seat belts 414 Seats 41, 118 Selecting events 210 Selecting neutral 221 Telligent® automatic gearshift 236 Telligent® gearshift 221 Selecting reverse gear Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 218 Telligent® automatic gearshift 237 Telligent® gearshift 229 Semitrailer coupling 40, 373
Service due date 173, 174 Service note 172 Service products 556 Capacities 569 Setting clock mode 206 Setting language for driver information system (FIS) 182 Setting time 197 Settings menu 183 Side lamp/parking lamp 504, 508 Side marker lamps 504, 505, 511 Side wind deflector 384 Single tyres 579 Sliding/tilting sunroof Opening and closing 340 Sliding/tilting sunroof closure lock 108 Sliding/tilting sunroof lock switch 341 SMS text message 169 Snow chains 394, 395
Spare wheel location 491 Special tools 432 Speed limiter 578, 584 Split-shifter 217 Spring actuator 577 Spring-loaded brake Releasing spring-loaded brake with an external source of compressedair 485 Releasing spring-loaded parking brake if there is a failure of charge pressure 483 Stability control 90, 543 Standby switch 293 Starting and stopping the engine with cab tilted 461 Starting the engine 49 Starting-off aid 296
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
611
Index
1 Steering 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Steering wheel play 51, 578 Steering system/Telligent® steering system 490 STOP lamp 451 Stopping Hydro-pneumatic gearshift 218 Hydro-pneumatic shifting 63 Telligent® automatic gearshift – Automatic mode 242 Telligent® automatic gearshift – Manual mode 249 Telligent® automatic shifting 63 Telligent® gearshift 228 Telligent® shifting 63 Stopping the engine 64 Stopping the engine – Telligent® automatic gearshift 64 Switching audio equipment on/off 359 Switching off Lane assist 98 Switching on Lane assist 98 Switching on lights 59, 132 Swivelling reading lamp 504, 505
9
612
T Tachograph 45, 251 Tail lamps 504 Teach-in procedure 478 Telephone 73, 74, 169, 350 Telephone book 354 Telephone menu 169 Telligent® automatic gearshift 231 Gearshift unit 232 Operating mode selector switch 233 Selecting operating mode 233 Telligent® automatic gearshift automatic mode 239 Telligent® automatic gearshift modes of operation 232 Telligent® automatic gearshift unit 27 Telligent® brake system 77 Telligent® distance control (ART) 280 Telligent® driver's choice Telligent® gearshift 226
Telligent® gearshift 55, 218 Gearshift unit 220 Selecting neutral 221 Telligent® gearshift unit 26 Telligent® level control 290 Telligent® maintenance system 408 Telligent® roll control 95 Telligent® stability control (SR) 90, 543 Event message 93 Switching off 91, 543 Switching on 91 Telligent® stability control event message 93 Temperature regulator 316, 319 The first 1,250 miles (2,000 km) 370 Tilting the cab 453 Timed heating 332 Tipper body support 385 Tipper operation 385 Topping up the engine oil 418 Topping up the windscreen washer/ headlamp cleaning system 419
Index
Total distance recorder 144 Towing 540, 542 Towing and tow-starting 540 Towing coupling, retrofitting 539 Traction control (ASR) 87 Trailer ID 165 Trailer/semitrailer coupling 40, 373 Trailer/semitrailer monitoring 378 Trailing axle 298, 489 Transfer case 252 Transmission control back-up mode 189, 207, 473 Transmission control back-up mode menu 189, 207 Transmission oil grade 203 Transmission oil grade menu 203 Transmission oil quality 570
Transmission oil viscosity 570 Transmission-dependent power take-off 257 Trip computer 166 Trip computer menu 166 Trip data 166 Turn signal and brake lamps 40, 60, 504, 505 Twin tyres 582 Two-way radio, fax machines, telephone 74 Two-way radio, fax, telephone 73 Type plates 552 Tyre inflator connection 502 Tyre pressure 576 Tyre pressure table 579 Tyres 75 Tyres and wheels 390
U Underride guard 100 Units menu 205 Units menu, temperature unit 205 Unlocking the driver's and co-driver's doors 34, 35 Unlocking the driver's door 34, 35 Unlocking using key 103 Unlocking using radio remote control 103 V Vehicle check using the driver information system (FIS) 40 Vehicle document wallet 432 Vehicle jack 497 Vehicle key 103 Vehicle lighting, turn signal and brake lamps 40, 504 Vehicle tool kit and emergency equipment 430, 432 Vehicle tool kit pocket 431 Vehicle type plate 552 Voltage transformer 358
613
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Index
1 W 2 3 4 5 6 7
Warning lamp 39, 431 Warning triangle 39, 431 Wearing seat belts 46 Wheel – fitting 501 Wheel nuts 370, 496 Tightening the wheel nuts 577 Tightening wheel nuts 392 Wheel nut tightening torques (Nm) 577 Wheel wrench 39 Wheelbrace 430 Wheels and tyres 491 Wind deflector 381 Windscreen cleaning platform 305 Windscreen wipers 61, 304 Winter driving 394 Winter operation 394 Wiping action 304 Work-area lamp 135
8 9
614
Contact
Editorial office
Mercedes-Benz will be happy to answer any queries you may have:
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding the Operating Instructions to the technical documentation team at the following address:
Mercedes-Benz contact Telephone: 00 800 1 777 7777 International: +49 69 95 30 72 77 Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and DaimlerChrysler can be found on the following websites: www.mercedes-benz.com www.daimlerchrysler.com
DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC: R803, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany As at: 30.07.2002 Title illustration number N00.01-2201-31 Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission. Print W. Kohlhammer GmbH
View more...
Comments
